vvEPA
           United States    ;
           Environmental Protection
           Agency
           Center for Environmental
           Research Information
           Cincinnati OH 45268
           Technology Transfer
Handbook
Improving POTW
Performance Using the
Composite Correction
Program Approach

-------

-------
EPA-625/6-84-008
                                   HANDBOOK
                          IMPROVING POTW PERFORMANCE
                                   USING THE
                     COMPOSITE CORRECTION PROGRAM APPROACH
                     U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY

                 Center for Environmental  Research Information
                            Cincinnati, Ohio 45268
                                 October 1984

-------
                                    NOTICE
This  document  has  been  reviewed  in  accordance  with  the  U.S.  Environmental
Protection Agency's  peer and administrative review  policies  and  approved for
publication.     Mention  of  trade  names  or  commercial   products  does  not
constitute endorsement or recommendation for use.
                                     ii

-------
                                   FOREWORD
The  formation  of the  Environmental   Protection  Agency marked  a  new era  of
environmental awareness in America.  This Agency's goals are national  in scope
and encompass broad  responsibility in the  areas  of air and  water pollution,
solid wastes, pesticides,  hazardous  wastes, and  radiation.   A  vital  part  of
EPA's  national   pollution  control  effort  is  the  constant  development  and
dissemination of new technology.

It  is  clear that  only the most  effective  design and  operation  of pollution
control  facilities  will  be  adequate  to  ensure  continued protection  of  this
Nation's  natural resources.    It is  essential  that  we  achieve  the  maximum
performance  possible  of existing  Publicly  Owned Treatment  Works  (POTWs)  to
achieve maximum  benefit from our expenditures.

The purpose  of  this  Handbook  is to provide  POTW  owners/administrators and the
engineering community with a new source of information to be used in improving
the  performance of  POTWs  through  application  of  the Composite  Correction
Program  (CCP)  approach.    It  is the  intent of the  manual  to  supplement the
existing body of knowledge in this area.

This  Handbook   is  one  of  several   publications   available  from  Technology
Transfer to  describe technological advances and present new information.
                                       i i i

-------
                                ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
Many  individuals  contributed  to the preparation and  review  of this Handbook.
Contract  administration  was  provided  by the  U.S.   Environmental  Protection
Agency (EPA), Center for Environmental Research Information,  Cincinnati, Ohio.
CONTRACTOR-AUTHORS

     Major Authors:
Bob A. Hegg, James R. Schultz, and Kerwin L. Rakness,
  Process Applications Inc., Fort Collins, CO
CONTRACT SUPERVISORS

     Project Officer:

     Reviewers:
Denis J. Lussier, EPA-CERI, Cincinnati, OH

Jon H. Bender, EPA-MERL, Cincinnati, OH
Charles E. Gross, EPA-OWPO, Washington, DC
Torsten Rothman, Dynamac Corp., Rockville, MD
TECHNICAL PEER REVIEWERS

     Thomas M. Rachford, Gannett Fleming Environmental Engineers,
                          Inc., Harrisburg, PA
     Stephen Poloncsik, EPA Region 5, Chicago, IL
     Walter G. Gilbert, EPA-OWPO, Washington, DC
                                      IV

-------
                                   CONTENTS
Chapter
                                                                       Page
           FOREWORD
           ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
           LIST OF FIGURES
           LIST OF TABLES

           INTRODUCTION           ;

           1.1  Purpose and Scope,
           1.2  Background
           1.3  Overview
           1.4  References        i
 m
  iv
 vii
viii
   1
   2
   3
   3
           APPROACH TO CONDUCTING COMPREHENSIVE PERFORMANCE EVALUATIONS

           2.1   Objective
           2.2   Methodol ogy
           2.3   Personnel Capabilities for Conducting CPEs
           2.4   Estimating CPE Costs
           2.5   References

           HOW TO CONDUCT COMPREHENSIVE PERFORMANCE EVALUATIONS

           3.1   Introduction
           3.2   Initial  Activities
           3.3   Data  Collection
           3.4   Evaluation of Major Unit  Processes
           3.5  .Evaluation of Performance-Limiting Factors
           3.6   Performance  Evaluation
           3.7   Presentation  to  POTW  Administrators and  Staff
           3.8   CPE  Report
           3.9   Example  CPE
           3.10  CPE  Results
            3.11  CPE  Worksheets
           3.12  References

           APPROACH  TO CONDUCTING COMPOSITE  CORRECTION  PROGRAMS

            4.1   Objective
            4.2   Methodology
            4.3   Personnel  Capabilities'for Conducting CCPs
            4.4  Estimating CCP  Costs
            4.5   References

            HOW  TO CONDUCT COMPOSITE CORRECTION PROGRAMS

            5.1  Introduction
            5.2  CCP Activities
   5
   5
  12
  13
  14
   16
   16
   20
   25
   45
   56
   58
   59
   61
   69
   69
   69
   71
   72
   74
   76
   77
   78
   78

-------
CONTENTS (continued)
Chapter
5








APPENDIX
A

B
C
D
E
F

G

H

I

J
K
L
M
N
0


HOW TO CONDUCT COMPOSITE CORRECTION PROGRAMS (Cont.)
5.3 Initial Site Visit
5.4 Improving Design Performance-Limiting Factors
5.5 Improving Maintenance Performance-Limiting Factors
5.6 Improving Administrative Performance-Limiting Factors
5.7 Improving Operational Performance-Limiting Factors
5.8 Example CCP
5.9 CCP Results
5.10 References

CPE CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM, CHECKLIST AND GUIDELINES FOR
PERFORMANCE-LIMITING FACTORS
CPE SUMMARY SHEET FOR RANKING PERFORMANCE-LIMITING FACTORS
EXAMPLE CPE REPORT
DATA COLLECTION FORMS USED IN CONDUCTING CPEs
GUIDELINES FOR FIELD ESTIMATING EQUIPMENT POWER USAGE
PROCEDURE FOR CONVERTING STANDARD OXYGENATION RATES TO
ACTUAL OXYGENATION RATES
EXAMPLE FORMS FOR ESTABLISHING A PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
PROGRAM FOR SMALL POTWs
DESIGN RELATED PERFORMANCE-LIMITING FACTORS IDENTIFIED
IN ACTUAL CPEs
EXAMPLE PROCESS MONITORING SUMMARY FOR AN ACTIVATED
SLUDGE POTW
EXAMPLE PROCESS MONITORING SUMMARY FOR AN RBC POTW
PARAMETERS USED TO MONITOR THE ABF TREATMENT PROCESS
SUSPENDED GROWTH MAJOR UNIT PROCESS EVALUATION WORKSHEET
TRICKLING FILTER MAJOR UNIT PROCESS EVALUATION WORKSHEET
RBC MAJOR UNIT PROCESS EVALUATION WORKSHEET
ABF MAJOR UNIT PROCESS EVALUATION WORKSHEET
vi
Page

79
83
85
86
86
103
106
108


110
127
130
137
182

185

190

196

208
214
219
225
235
242
250


-------
                                LIST OF FIGURES
Number


2-1

3-1

3-2

3-3

4-1
5-1
5-2

5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7

5-8
F-l
CPE/CCP Schematic of Activities

Effect of Aeration Basin DO Concentrations on Sludge
  Settling Characteristics
Typical Return Sludge Flow Rates with Various
  Clarifier Surface Overflow Rates
Flow Diagram of POTW in Example CPE

Relationships of Performance-Limiting Factors to
  Achieving a Performance Goal

Typical Scheduling of Onsite and Offsite Involvement
Sample Process Control and Performance Monitoring
  Form for a Small POTW
Representations of Activated Sludge Floe
Activated Sludge Mass Control Using MCRT
Activated Sludge Mass Control Using Total Sludge Mass
Simplified Activated Sludge Process Diagram
Process Control Testing at a 950 m3/d Contact
  Stabilization POTW   ;
Graphical Representation of Improved Performance from
  a Successful CCP

Atmospheric Pressure at Various Altitudes
Page


   6


  52

  54
  62


  73

  80

  82
  88
  91
  92
  93

  99

  107

  189
                                       vii

-------
                                LIST OF TABLES
Number
                                                            Page
2-1

2-2

3-1
3-2

3-3
3-4

3-5

3-6

3-7

3-8

3-9

3-10

3-11
3-12

3-13
3-14
3-15

3-16

3-17

3-18
3-19
3-20
3-21

3-22


4-1

5-1
5-2
Classification System for Prioritizing Performance-Limiting
Factors                                                        9
Typical Costs for Conducting CPEs                             13

Preliminary Plant Information to Collect by Telephone          18
Parameters for Scoring Capability of Aeration Basins
  in Suspended Growth POTWs                                   26
Typical Standard Oxygen Transfer Rates                        27
Parameters for Scoring Capability of Clarifiers in
  Suspended Growth POTWs                                      29
Typical Ranges for Return Activated Sludge Pumping
  Capacities                                                  30
Criteria for Scoring Sludge Handling Capability for
  Suspended Growth POTWs                                      31
Typical Unit Sludge Production Values for Suspended
  Growth POTWs                                                32
Typical Sludge Concentrations for Suspended Growth
  POTWs                                                       33
Guidelines for Evaluating Capacity of Existing Sludge
  Handling Processes                                          34
Miscellaneous Unit Values Used in Evaluating Capacity
  of Sludge Handling Capability                               35
Suspended Growth Major Unit Process Capacity Evaluation       36
Parameters for Scoring Aerator Capability for Trickling
  Filter POTWs                                                38
Parameters for Scoring Aerator Capability for RBC POTWs       39
Parameters for Scoring Aerator Capability for ABF POTWs       40
Parameters for Scoring Capability of Clarifiers in
Trickling Filters and RBCs                                    41
Criteria for Scoring Sludge Handling Capability for
  Fixed Film POTWs                                            42
Typical Unit Sludge Production Values and Sludge
  Concentrations for Fixed Film POTWs                         43
Trickling Filter Major Unit Process .Capacity Evaluation       44
RBC Major Unit Process Capacity Evaluation                    44
ABF Major Unit Process Capacity Evaluation                    44
Typical Mean Cell Residence Times for Suspended Growth
  POTWs '                                                      51
Suspended Growth Major Unit Process Capacity Evaluation
  for  Example CPE                                             67

Typical Costs for Conducting a CCP                            76

Typical CCP Facilitator Involvement                           80
Process Control  Monitoring at a Small Activated
  Sludge Plant                                                98

-------
Number
C-l
C-2
E-l
F-l
F-2
                          LIST OF TABLES (continued)
Springfield, KS POTW Major Unit Process Evaluation
Springfield, KS POTW Capacity Potential
Worksheet for Calculation of Power Factor
Typical Values of Alpha Used for Estimating AOR/SOR
Oxygen Saturation at Standard Pressure and Actual
  Water Temperature
Page
 132
 133
 183
 187
 188
                                      ix

-------

-------
                                   CHAPTER 1

                                 INTRODUCTION
1.1  Purpose and Scope
This  Handbook  provides  information  on methods  to  economically improve  the
performance  of  existing publicly  owned  treatment  works  (POTWs).    It  is
"how-to"  oriented  and  describes ;an  approach that  POTW  owners can  use  to
achieve  improvements  in  treatment  without major  capital  expenditures.   The
approach consists of an evaluation phase and a performance improvement phase.

The eyaluation  phase  is  a  thorough review  and  analysis  of a  POTW's  design
capabilities   andassociated  administration,  operation,   and  maintenance
practices.   It is conducted to  provide  information  for POTW administrators to
make  decisions  regarding efforts  necessary  to  improve  performance.    The
primary objective is to determine if significant improvements in treatment can
be  achieved  without making  major  capital  expenditures.   This  objective  is
accomplished  by  assessing  the  capability of major  unit  processes  and  by
identifying  and  prioritizing  those  factors that limit  performance  and  can be
corrected to improve performance. !

The performance  improvement  phase  is  a  systematic  approach  to  eliminating
those factors  that limit performance  in existing POTWs.  Its major benefit is
that it optimizes the capability of existing facilities to perform better and/
or treat more wastewater.

This  document   has  been prepared   for   the  benefit  of  POTW  owners  and
administrators.    It   is expected  that  consultants   for  POTWs,  regulatory
personnel,  and  administrators  of privately  owned  treatment works will  also
find the  information useful.  This  Handbook  focuses  on POTWs treating typical
municipal  wastewater  compatible  With  common  biological  wastewater treatment
processes.   It has been written mainly  for POTWs with flows up to about 40,000
nr/d  (10  mgd),  which  includes  pver   95  percent  of  existing  POTWs in  the
United States  (1).   The  scope of the Handbook  is further focused on mechanical
plants  using activated  sludge  (suspended  growth),  trickling  filters  (fixed
film), and variations of these  prpcesses  for  secondary treatment.  Variations
of suspended growth processes .included  are:
       Plug flow
       Complete mix
       Extended aeration
- Contact
- Tapered
stabilization
aeration
- Oxidation
- Step feed
ditches

-------
 Fixed  film  processes  included  are:

     - Conventional rock  filters
     - Plastic media  filters
     - Redwood media  filters
- Activated biofilters (ABFs)
- Rotating biological  contactors (RBCs)
 1.2  Background
A  1980 General Accounting Office report indicated that 87 percent of 242 POTWs
surveyed  were in  violation  of the  effluent requirements  in  their discharge
permit  (2).   At 9 of  the  15 POTWs studied further, operation and maintenance
problems  were determined to be a  significant cause  of poor  performance.  A
comprehensive  national  study to identify and  quantify  the  specific causes of
inadequate  POTW performance  was  conducted  in the  late 1970s  (3-6).   This
study, involving site visits  to 287 facilities and detailed evaluations of 103
of these  facilities,  identified the most predominant problems  at  POTWs.   The
top  factors  identified included problems in  all  four  major areas that affect
plant  performance: design,  administration,  operation,  and  maintenance.    A
major  conclusion  from this  study  is that  each  POTW usually has  a number of
performance-limiting problems that are unique to that facility.

In response  to  these  needs,  a   program   that  effectively  eliminates  all
performance-limiting  factors at  an  individual  POTW  has  been  developed  and
demonstrated.  It  is called  the Composite Correction Program (CCP) because it
brings together  the  positive features of many  individual  programs to correct
all the specific performance-limiting problems identified at a subject plant.

CCPs have been successfully  demonstrated at a number of facilities  (6-8).   The
most  successful   of  these   demonstrations  have  occurred  in  POTWs  where  a
combination of minor  design  changes, process  adjustments,  operator training,
and  appropriate  administrative actions led  to  improving  plant performance to
the desired level.

Application  of the  CCP approach  has  been made  more  attractive by  recent
congressional  actions.   In December  1981,  the EPA Construction Grants Program
was changed to provide  (starting  October  1984) for  55  percent  rather  than 75
percent as the Federal  funding  share for  POTW construction (9).  In addition,
the  Federal  share  of planning  and design phases will  not  be paid  until  the
construction phase is  approved  and funded (10).   These changes, and trends at
both the  national   and  State  levels, make  it more important  than  ever  to
achieve maximum utilization  of existing facilities  and  to  avoid or delay  the
need for capital  improvement projects.

It is apparent that improved performance  is  not  achievable  in some facilities
without making significant capital  improvements.  To identify facilities where
performance could  be  improved  using a  nonconstruction-oriented  approach,  a
Comprehensive  Performance  Evaluation  (CPE)  phase was  developed.    A CPE  is
performed to  determine if a  CCP  could result  in significant  improvement  in
plant performance and/or capacity.

-------
The  1981  changes   to  the  EPA  Construction  Grants  Program  also  added  the
requirement that,  one  year after being  placed  in operation,  grantees  either
certify that their  facilities  are capable  of  meeting the treatment levels for
which they  were  designed or propose  a corrective course  of action  (10).   A
CPE5  with  its emphasis  on identification  of problems, and  a CCP,  with  its
emphasis on  making existing plants  perform  to  their  optimum  level, can  be
valuable tools for POTW owners to use in satisfying this grant requirement.
1.3  Overview
Many  parties  are  involved  in  achieving  optimum performance  from  wastewater
treatment facilities  (11).   The following discussion provides  perspective  to
the roles of these parties.

A recent  project  conducted  to develop a  strategy  to  improve POTW performance
and achieve compliance with effluent  permit  requirements  concluded  that local
owners  and  administrators of  wastewater  treatment facilities  should  be made
more  aware  that they  are clearly responsible  for their  plant's  performance
(8).   Compliance  with  effluent permit requirements  was  found  to  be  only  a
secondary  objective  of  many  local  administrators.    Often  their  primary
concerns  were   obtaining  facility' grants,  avoiding  problems  with State  and
Federal  regulatory  personnel,  and   providing   safe  working  conditions  for
employees.   Although  each  of these concerns   is  important,  local  facility
administrators  must  recognize  that  their  primary  objective  in  treating
wastewater is to achieve the required effluent quality.   Once local  priorities
have been focused toward cost-effectively achieving adequate treatment, owners
can  direct  their  technical   staffs or consultants  toward the  ultimate goal.
Technical  assistance  is  available  from  a  variety  of   sources:  engineers,
operators, suppliers, contractors, trainers, contract operators, and financial
consultants.

It  is  assumed  that POTW owners  and  administrators have  already  recognized  a
need  to  improve the performance of their wastewater  treatment facilities and
will  use this  Handbook  to   economically  accomplish  the  required  wastewater
effluent quality.
1.4  References
When an NTIS number is cited in a 'reference, that reference is available from:

         National Technical Information Service
         5285 Port Royal Road
         Springfield, VA 22161
         (703) 487-4650

-------
 1.  The 1980  Needs Survey -  Conveyance,  Treatment and  Control  of Municipal
     Wastewater, Combined Sewer Overflows,  and  Stormwater Runoffs,  Summary of
     Technical    Data.      EPA-430/9-81-008,  NTIS   No.   PB-82-131533,   U.S.
     Environmental   Protection  Agency,  Office  of  Water   Program  Operations,
     Washington, DC, 1981.

 2.  Costly  Wastewater   Treatment  Plants  Fail   to   Perform  as  Expected.
     CED-81-9,   Report  by  the Comptroller General  of   the  United  States,
     Washington, DC, 1980.

 3.  Hegg,  B.  A.,  K.  L.  .Rakness,  and J.  R.  Schultz.   Evaluation of Operation
     and Maintenance  Factors  Limiting  Municipal  Wastewater  Treatment  Plant
     Performance.   EPA-600/2-79-034, NTIS  No.  PB-300331,  U.S.  Environmental
     Protection   Agency,   Municipal   Environmental    Research   Laboratory,
     Cincinnati, OH, 1979.

 4.  Gray,  A. C., Jr., P. E. Paul, and H. D. Roberts.   Evaluation of Operation
     and Maintenance  Factors  Limiting  Biological  Wastewater  Treatment  Plant
     Performance.   EPA-600/2-79-087, NTIS  No.  PB-297491,  U.S.  Environmental
     Protection   Agency,   Municipal   Environmental    Research   Laboratory,
     Cincinnati, OH, 1979.

 5.  Hegg,  B.  A.,  K. L.  Rakness,  J.  R.  Schultz, and L.  D. Demers.  Evaluation
     of  Operation  and.  Maintenance  Factors  Limiting  Municipal  Wastewater
     Treatment  Plant  Performance  -  Phase  II.    EPA-600/2-80-129, NTIS  No.
     PB-81-112864,    U.S.    Environmental    Protection    Agency,    Municipal
     Environmental  Research Laboratory,  Cincinnati, OH,  1980.
 6.
 7.
 8.
 9.
10.
11.
Hegg,  B.  A.,  K.  L. Rakness, and  J.  R.  Schultz.  A Demonstrated Approach
for  Improving  Performance  and  Reliability   of  Biological  Wastewater
Treatment   Plants.      EPA-600/2-79-035,   NTIS   No.   PB-300476,   U.S.
Environmental   Protection  Agency,   Municipal   Environmental   Research
Laboratory, Cincinnati, OH, 1979.
Hegg,  B.  A.,  K. L.
Effluents.   Water
1982.
 Rakness,  and J.
Engineering  and
 R.  Schultz.
Management,
  The  CCP Way
12910  40-43,
to Better
September
Schultz,  J.  R.,  B.  A.   Hegg,  and  C.  S.  Zickefoose.    Colorado  CCP
Demonstration  and Development  of  Areawide  Compliance  Strategy.   Draft
report,  U.S.  Environmental  Protection  Agency,  Municipal   Environmental
Research Laboratory, Cincinnati, OH, 1983.

Municipal  Wastewater Treatment  Construction  Grant  Amendments  of 1981.
Public Law 97-117, December 29, 1981.

Grants  for Construction of Treatment Works;  Interim and Proposed Rules.
40 CFR Part 35, Vol. 47, No. 92, May 12, 1982.

Hill,  W.  R.,  T.  M.   Regan,   and C.   S.  Zickefoose.    Operation  and
Maintenance  of  Water Pollution Control  Facilities -  A WPCF White Paper.
JWPCF 51:899-906, 1979.

-------
                                  . CHAPTER 2

         APPROACH TO CONDUCTING COMPREHENSIVE PERFORMANCE EVALUATIONS
2.1  Objective
The objective of a Comprehensive Performance  Evaluation  (CPE)  is  to  establish
whether  a  major facility  upgrade  is necessary  or if a  Composite  Correction
Program (CCP) is capable of producing the desired effluent qu*1 '•*;-.
2.2  Methodology
A CPE  achieves  the  above objective through several  activities:  evaluation  of
the major  unit  processes;  identification  of all  performance-limiting  factors;
prioritization  of  performance-limiting   factors;  assessment  of  ability  to
improve performance with a CCP; arid reporting CPE results.   Although these are
distinct activities, some of them are conducted concurrently with others.   For
example,  evaluation  of  the  major  unit  processes  and   identification  of
performance-limiting factors are generally conducted at the same time.

Although this Handbook presents all the information required to conduct a  CPE,
many references are available  on  techniques  for  evaluation of treatment plant
performance,  reliability,  etc.  !(1-14).     It   is   recommended  that these
references be consulted for further specifics on the subject.
     2.2.1  Evaluation of Major Unit Processes
Major  unit  processes  are evaluated  to  assess the general ability of  the  CCP
approach, as  opposed  to  a major  construction approach,  to achieve  desired
performance levels.   If the  CPE  indicates that the major unit  processes  are
adequate, a major plant expansion! or upgrade is not necessary and a  properly
conducted CCP should  achieve  the  desired  performance.   If, on the other hand,
the CPE shows that major unit processes are inadequate, owners should  consider
the  expansion  of  these   processes   as   the  focus   for  achieving   desired
performance.                      '

Results  of   evaluation   of  major  unit  processes   can  be  summarized   by
categorization of plant type, as illustrated in Figure 2-1.

-------
i— i

>
i — i
«=c
f-l U_
1 O
CM
O
LU t— i
I— i 1 1 1
O
oo
0-
o
LU
Q.

CD
O
CO £-
$£ E
2-g %
CO CD QX
£ CD *-
<^ ™— •—
P CD >
pa: 2
Q. Q.
E





*



1


CO
m
Evaluation
of
Init Processe
III J
O -2,












CO
QJ
CO
CO
si
»-?
^•E =
Z> CD
0<
•«
2





^-






CO
•4— «
CO C
Q_ CD D) CD
o CD :-E .E |
sllsl
S-S.U- C Q.

Q t**J -^rj .^ fft
O







CD
(J
V--,
0)
a.










\ s
CD
>
ID

:ormance Ac
s_
CD
Q.
•a
CD
CO
CD

!co
CD
CO
CO (15
CD 22-
O CO
*" ° D-
"" -1
"c?












_
Implemeni
CCPTo



E co
03 "
i- .V" .ti
hieve Desi
:ormance F
sting Facil
<£u1

-------
Type  1  plants  are  those POTWs  where a  CPE shows  that current  performance
difficulties are not caused by limitations in the  size or capabilities  of  the
existing major unit processes.   In these  cases,  the major problems  are related
to plant operation,  maintenance,  or administration, or to problems  that can be
corrected with  only minor  facility modifications.   POTWs that  fall  into  this
category  are   most   likely  to   achieve  desired  performance  through   the
implementation of a nonconstruction-oriented  CCP.

Identification  of a POTW as  Type 2 represents  a  situation where the marginal
capacity of major unit  processes will  potentially  prohibit  the  ability  to
achieve the desired performance level.   For  Type  2 facilities,  implementation
of  a  CCP will  lead  to  improved  performance  but may  not  achieve  required
performance levels without significant physical  plant improvements.

A  Type  3   plant  is  one  in  which   the  existing  major unit  processes  are
inadequate.   Although  other limiting factors  may exist, such  as the operators'
process  control  capability,  minor design features,  or the  administration's
unfamiliarity with  plant needs, 'performance cannot  be  expected  to  improve
significantly   until   physical   limitations   of  major  unit   processes   are
eliminated.   In this case,  implementation of  a nonconstruction-oriented CCP is
of limited  value and  is  not  recommended.   Owners  with a Type 3 facility would
best  meet  their  needs  by   pursuing  development  of  wastewater  treatment
facilities  suitable  for handling!  present and  future waste  loads  as  well  as
addressing  factors identified in the CPE.  A more  detailed study of treatment
alternatives and financing mechanisms would  be  warranted.  CPEs that identify
Type 3 facilities are  still  of benefit to POTW administrators in that the need
for construction  is  clearly  defined  for facility owners.   Additionally,  the
CPE provides  an understanding  of|the capabilities  and weaknesses  of existing
operation and maintenance practices  and  administrative policies.   POTW owners
can use this information to evaluate use of existing facilities as  part of any
major plant upgrade and  as a guideline  for optimizing operation, maintenance,
and administration.
     2.2.2  Identification of Performance-Limiting Factors
Whereas the evaluation of major  unit  processes  in a plant is
categorize  performance  potential by  assessing  only 'physical
identification of performance-limiting factors focuses on one
factors unique to that facility.
 used  to  broadly
 facilities,  the
facility and the
To  assist  in this identification,  a  list of 70  different  factors  that could
potentially  limit a  POTW's  performance  is provided in Appendix A  (1).   These
factors  are  divided  into  the ,categories  of  administration,  maintenance,
design,  and  operation.    Suggested  definitions  of  each  factor  are  also
provided.   This list was developed as  a result of many plant  studies  and is
provided for convenience and  reference.   If  alternate names  or  definitions
provide  a  clearer understanding to those involved in conducting  a CPE,  they
should be  used  instead.  If different  terms  are  used, each factor  should be
defined  and  these definitions  should  be readily  available  to those conducting
the CPE  and  those interpreting the results.

-------
Note that  the  list includes  factors on capacity of major unit  processes.   If
the  evaluation  of major  unit  processes  results  in  a Type  2  or  Type  3
classification,  these  same limitations  should be documented  in  the  list of
factors  limiting the POTW's  performance.    Completing  the  identification  of
factors  is  difficult in  that true  problems  in  a  POTW are often masked.   This
concept is illustrated in the following discussion.

   A contact  stabilization plant was  routinely losing  sludge  solids  over
   the final clarifier weirs, through the chlorine contact tank, and to the
   receiving stream,  resulting in  noncompliance  with the plant's  permit.
   Initial  observations could  lead  to  the  conclusion  that  the  plant had an
   inadequately  sized final  clarifier.   However,  further  investigation
   indicated that  the solids loss was  a result of the operator's routinely
   wasting  less  sludge than  was produced.    It  was determined  that,  to
   properly control the sludge mass, increased operator time and additional
   equipment  to   adequately  monitor  and  waste  activated  sludge  to  the
   digester would  be required.  It was further determined that the digester
   was  undersized  and  would   not  provide  adequate  residence  time  for
   complete digestion.

   The most obvious  problem  is the operator's  lack of  knowledge  of how to
   apply  the   concept of  sludge  mass  control.    The  needed  laboratory
   equipment was within the approved  budget  for the  facility  and  therefore
   was not assessed as  a  major problem.   Plant administrators  indicated
   that   they    could   not  afford  additional  operator   time.     This
   administrative  policy  was  a significant  factor  limiting  performance.
   The  undersized digester  was not  a  significant  problem  in  this  case
   because unlimited cropland for disposal  of partially  digested sludge was
   available.   (Note: Disposal  of partially digested sludge on  cropland can
   no longer be  considered a permanent  solution  since enactment of  Federal
   regulations for land  disposal  of POTW sludges).    It  was concluded  that
   four  factors  contributed  to the  solids  loss  that  caused  poor  plant
   effluent quality:

        1.  Inadequate operator knowledge to  apply the concept  of sludge
            mass control.

        2.  Restrictive  administrative policy that prohibited  needed
            operator time.

        3.  Inadequate test equipment.

        4.  Inadequate digester capacity.

The  above  discussion   illustrates  that  a   comprehensive  analysis   of  a
performance problem  is essential   to  identify  the  true  performance-limiting
factors.   If   the  initial  obvious   problem of  lack  of clarifier  capacity  had
                  improper  corrective  actions and unnecessary expenditures of
been identified,
funds  would likely have  occurred.
identified  as limiting performance.
be listed without regard to order of
                                     In almost  all  CPEs,  several factors  are
                                     Initially, each  factor  identified  should
                                     severity.
                                       8

-------
It is emphasized that the purpose pf  identifying  performance-limiting  factors
is to identify, as  accurately  as  possible, causes of poor  performance  unique
to a particular plant.  Observation that  a factor does  not meet the  "industry
standard" does not necessarily constitute  cause for identifying that  factor  as
limiting  the  POTW's  performance.    An   actual   link   between   poor  plant
performance and an identified factor must  exist.


     2.2.3  Prioritization of Performance-Limiting Factors
                                  i

After  the  factors  that  limit performance  have  been   identified,  they  are
prioritized as to their adverse effect on  achieving desired plant performance.
The  purposes  of this  prioritizatipn  are   to  establish   the  type of  followup
activities necessary to achieve compliance and the emphasis that would have to
be put on each factor.  If the highest ranking factors,  i.e., those having the
most negative impact on performance, are related to physical  limitations  in
unit process  capacity, initial corrective  actions are directed toward defining
plant modifications  and obtaining Administrative  funding and action  for their
implementation.   If  the highest ranking factors  are process control  oriented,
the  initial   emphasis  of   fpllowup   activities   would  be  directed  toward
plant-specific operator training.

The  prioritization  of  factors is  accomplished by a  two-step  process.   First,
all  factors that have been identified are  individually assessed with regard to
adverse  impact  on  plant  performance  (Table 2-1);   second,  those  factors
receiving "A's" and  "B's" are  listed in order  of priority.
                                   TABLE 2-1

                    CLASSIFICATION;SYSTEM FOR PRIORITIZING
                         PERFORMANCE-LIMITING FACTORS
            Rati ng

              A

              B
         Adverse Effect of Factor
           on Plant Performance
Major! effect on long-term repetitive basis
     1
Minimum effect on routine basis or major
effect on a periodic basis

Minor effect
 Each factor previously identified  as  limiting performance is now assigned  an
 "A," "B," or  "C"  rating.   The checklist of  factors  in Appendix A includes  a
 column to enter this rating.      |

-------
The   factors   that  receive  an  "A"  are  the  major  problems  that  cause  a
performance deficiency.   They should  be  the central  focus  of  any subsequent
program  to  improve plant  performance.   An example  of  an  "A"  factor would be
"ultimate sludge  disposal" facilities, i.e., drying  beds, that  are  too small
to allow routine wasting of sludge  from an activated  sludge POTW.

All "B" factors (as well as "A's")  typically must be  eliminated before a plant
will  achieve  consistent   desired   performance.    Two  categories  of  factors
receive a "B"  rating:

      1.  Those  that routinely  contribute to  poor plant  performance  but  are
         not  the  major   problems.    An  example  would  be  a  shortage  of
         person-hours  to complete  required process control  testing in a small
         activated  sludge  plant  where  the   underlying  problem  is  that  the
         operator  does not understand  how to  run  or  interpret  the  tests or
         understand the need for a  better testing program.

      2.  Those that.cause  a  major  degradation of  plant  performance,  but only
         on a  periodic basis.   Typical  examples are an inadequate spare parts
         inventory  that causes  excessive process  downtime  once  or twice  a
         year,  or marginal  oxygen  transfer capacity  that  causes  an  oxygen
         shortage only during the hottest month of the year.   As a comparison,
         the  example  "A"  factor  above  ("ultimate  sludge  disposal")  would
         receive  a  "B" rating if adequate drying  bed capacity  were  available
         in the summer but winter weather  inhibited  drying bed use.

Factors that receive  a "C" rating can be shown to contribute to a performance
problem but their effect is minor.  They would likely be corrected with little
effort  and/or  time during followup activities.   For  example, if a critical
process stream were  accessible, but difficult  to  sample,  it could indirectly
contribute  to  poor performance by making  process  control  less  convenient and
more  time consuming.   The  problem would not be a major  focus of  a subsequent
corrective  program.    As  a further comparison,  the  example "A"  factor above
("ultimate  sludge disposal") would  receive  a "C"rating if  adequate drying bed
capacity were  available but cleaning  the  beds with a front loader has crushed
several underdrain tiles.

In the illustration presented in Section 2.2.2, "inadequate operator knowledge
to apply the concept of sludge mass control" is assigned an "A"  because of its
continuous detrimental effect on  plant  performance;  "administrative  policy"  a
"B" because of  its  routinet effect; and "testing  equipment"  a  "C" because its
effect is only a minor contributing  factor.   "Inadequate digester  size"  is
given  a  "B" because   it made  proper  sludge  mass  control  more difficult  and
labor intensive.  It is not given an  "A"  because it did not  limit performance
in  a  major way  since  adequate  sludge  disposal   capacity  is  available  by
utilizing nearby cropland.

Once each identified factor is assessed individually and assigned  an  "A," "B,"
or  "C"  classification,  those  receiving  "A's" and "B's"  are  listed  on  a
one-page summary sheet in order of priority.   This  requires that the  evaluator
assess all  the "A's"   and  "B's"  to determine  the  most serious  cause of poor
performance, second  most  serious,  etc.   A summary  sheet  for  ranking  the
                                      10

-------
prioritized  factors  limiting   plant   performance  in  order  of  severity  is
presented in Appendix B.   This  process is effective in reducing the  identified
factors to a one-page summary and  serves  as  a  valuable reference for the  next
step of the CPE: assessing ability  to  improve plant performance.
     2.2.4  Assessing Ability to Improve Performance
By definition of a CCP,  all  performance-limiting  factors  can  theoretically be
eliminated.  Nevertheless, it  is  necessary  to  specifically  assess  the  ability
of a CCP  to  improve performance  in  each POTW.   An  effective approach  is  to
evaluate  each  identified factor  individually  to  determine whether  there  are
any practical reasons a  factor cannot be  addressed.   Examples of  factors that
may  not  be  feasible  to address  are  replacement of  key  personnel,  drastic
increases  in  funding,  or  extensive  training  of  owners or administrators  to
support POTW needs.

Some  factors  have  a   variety  of  potential  solutions  or  combinations  of
corrective actions that  can  effectively  address the  problem.   For  example, an
activated  sludge clarifier may be improved by installing  baffles  to decrease
short-circuiting, by utilizing partial  flow equalization to  reduce  hydraulic
peaks, or by switching  to  other  activated sludge  mass modes to better control
sludge  settling  characteristics  and to  reduce  clarifier  loading.    Often  a
combination of these corrective  actions  would  be  appropriate.  The systematic
assessment  of the  prioritized  factors  helps assure  that  all   factors  can
realistically  be  addressed,  thus providing the  basis for the  comprehensive
approach  to improving performance.

It is the prioritization and assessment phase  of a  CPE that  requires maximum
application  of the evaluators1 judgment  and  experience.   It should be noted
that it is often necessary to  later modify the original  corrective  steps and
requirements  as  new or additional  information  becomes available  during  the
conduct of a CCP phase.  This concept is  illustrated by the following:

   A  CPE  conducted  at  an  activated   sludge  plant  identified  the  major
   performance-limiting  factors as:
                                 i
        1.   Inadequate operator understanding  to make process adjustments
            to control sludge  settling characteristics.

        2.   Inadequate staffing to make operational  adjustments.

        3.   Inadequate program to keep equipment functioning continuously.

   Based  on  these  factors, a CCP was implemented  to improve performance of
   the  existing  facilities.    It was decided that this plant could perform
   best when   the  activated  sludge settling rate  was relatively slow.   The
   plant  operator's understanding  was   improved  through training,  and he
   became capable of  making  process  control  adjustments  to  achieve the
   desired slower sludge  settlirig rate.   Once  the  desired  slower sludge
   settling  rate was  achieved, poor clarifier  performance was observed and
                                       11

-------
   effluent  quality deteriorated.    Further  investigation  indicated  that
   modifications made  a year earlier  to  the  clarifier inlet  baffles  were
   allowing  short-circuiting  to occur.   This  short-circuiting  only became
   apparent  after  the  slower  settling had  been  achieved.   These  baffle
   modifications were reassessed and changed to reduce short-circuiting and
   effluent quality improved dramatically.

In this  illustration,  a minor  design modification  was  determined  to  be  a
performance-limiting factor.   This factor was not  identified  in  the  original
CPE.    An  awareness that it may  not  be possible  to identify  all  performance-
limiting  factors  in the CPE,  as well  as  an  awareness that  the  CCP  approach
allows   further  definition   and   identification  of  factors  during   its
implementation, is an  important  aspect of assessing  a POTW's capability to
achieve improved performance.
     2.2.5  CPE Report
The  results  of  a CPE  should  be  summarized  in  a  brief,  written  report  to
provide  guidance  for facility  owners  and  administrators.    An  example  is
included  in  Appendix C.  A typical CPE  report  is  8-12  pages  in length  and
includes the following topics:

     - Facility background
     - Major process evaluation
     - Performance-limiting factors
     - Projected impact of a CCP
     - CCP costs

A  CPE  report  should not  provide a  list  of  specific  recommendations  for
correcting individual  performance-limiting factors.   This  often  leads to  a
piecemeal  approach   to   corrective  actions  where   the   goal   of   improved
performance  is  not  met.    For  Type 1  and Type 2 plants,  the necessity  of
comprehensively  addressing  the  combination of  factors identified by  the  CPE
through the implementation of a CCP should be stressed.   For  Type  3  plants,  a
recommendation for more detailed study to  support the  anticipated  upgrade  may
be warranted.


2.3  Personnel Capabilities for Conducting CPEs


Persons responsible for conducting CPEs  should  have a  knowledge of wastewater
treatment, including the following areas:

     - Regulatory requirements
     - Process control
     - Process design
     - Samp! ing
     - Laboratory testing
     - Microbiology
                                      12

-------
     - Hydraulic principles
     - Operator training         i
     - Wastewater facility budgeting
     - Safety
     - Maintenance
     - Management                :

Consulting engineers  who  routinely  work  with  POTW design  and startup,  and
regulatory agency personnel with experience in evaluating wastewater treatment
facilities,  represent  the types iof personnel  with adequate  backgrounds  to
conduct CPEs.    This  Handbook is  not  intended  as  a guide  to  the  design  or
operation of POTWs.


2.4  Estimating CPE Costs        ;
                                 i

The  cost  of  conducting  a CPE  depends  on  the size  and type  of  facility.
Activated sludge  plants tend  to  be more complex than  trickling filter plants
or  other  fixed  film  facilities.   Guidelines  for  estimating  CPE costs  and
person-days  are  presented in  Table 2-2.   These  estimates  are  for contracting
with a consultant  who  normally performs this type  of service.   The  cost  to  a
community for conducting a CPE with municipal employees would probably be less
than the  amounts shown  in  Table 2-2.   However, municipal  employees  may  not
have  the  necessary  qualifications or  may  be  too  close  to  the  existing
operation to be able to perform a truly objective evaluation.


                                 :  TABLE 2-2

                      TYPICAL COSTS FOR CONDUCTING CPEsa
    Type and Size of Facility    ;

    Suspended Growth r*5'0         |
     <800 m3/d (0.2 mgd)         !
     800-8,000 m3/d0(0.2-2 mgd)  |
     8,000-38,000 m3/d (2.0-10 mgd)
  Typical
Person-days
  Onsite
     2
     5
     7
Typical  Cost
  (1984  $)
1,500- 3,000
2,000-10,000
4,000-16,000
Fixed Film:d ;
<2,000 m3/d (0.5 mgd)
2,000-38,000 m3/d (0.5-10 mgd)
2
5
1,500- 4,000
3,000-12,000
     aFor contract consultant.    •
     ^Includes  all variations of activated sludge.
     CABF  systems, which combine suspended and  fixed growth, require an
      effort similar  to  activated sludge.
     ^Includes  trickling filters with both plastic and rock media and RBCs
                                       13

-------
2.5  References
When an NTIS number is cited in a reference, that reference is available from:

         National Technical Information Service
         5285 Port Royal  Road
         Springfield, VA 22161
         (703) 487-4650

 1.  Hegg, B. A., K. L.  Rakness,  J.  R.  Schultz, and L. D. Demers.  Evaluation
     of  Operation  and  Maintenance  Factors  Limiting  Municipal  Wastewater
     Treatment  Plant Performance  -  Phase  II.    EPA-600/2-80-129,  NTIS  No.
     PB-81-112864,   U.S.    Environmental    Protection    Agency,    Municipal
     Environmental Research Laboratory, Cincinnati, OH, 1980.

 2.  Gulp, G. L.  and N.  F.  Helm.   Field Manual  for Performance Evaluation and
     Troubleshooting   at    Municipal    Wastewater    Treatment    Facilities.
     EPA-430/9-78-001,   NTIS  No.  PB-279448,  U.S.  Environmental  Protection
     Agency, Office of Water Program Operations, Washington, DC,  1978.

 3.  Process Design Manual: Wastewater  Treatment  Facilities  for  Sewered Small
     Communities.    EPA-625/1-77-009,   U.S.  Environmental  Protection  Agency,
     Center for Environmental Research  Information, Cincinnati, OH, 1977.
 4.
Hinrichs, D. J.   Inspectors  Guide  for Evaluation of Municipal Wastewater
Treatment   Plants.     EPA-430/9-7 9-010,   NTIS   No.   PB-80-138605,  U.S.
Environmental  Protection Agency,  Office  of  Water  Program  Operations,
Washington, DC, 1979.
     Schultz,  D,
     Mechanical
     Components.
     Protection
     Cincinnati,
              W.  and  V.   B.   Parr.     Evaluation   and  Documentation  of
             Reliability   of  Conventional  Wastewater   Treatment  Plant
              EPA-600/2-82-044,  NTIS  No. PB-82-227539, U.S. Environmental
             Agency,   Municipal   Environmental    Research   Laboratory,
            OH, 1982.
 6.  Niku,  S.,   E.   D.  Schroeder,  G.  Tchobanoglous,  and  F.  J.  Samanieqo.
     Performance  of Activated  Sludge Processes:  Reliability,  Stability  arid
     Variability.  EPA-600/2-81-227, NTIS No. PB-82-108143, U.S. Environmental
     Protection   Agency,    Municipal   Environmental   Research   Laboratory,
     Cincinnati, OH, 1981.

 7.  Haugh, R.,  S. Niku, E. D. Schroder, and G. Tchobanoglous.  Performance of
     Trickling   Filter   Plants:   Reliability,   Stability   and  Variability.
     EPA-600/2-81-228,  NTIS  No.  PB  82-109174,  U.S.  Environmental  Protection
     Agency,  Municipal  Environmental  Research  Laboratory,  Cincinnati,  OH,
     1981.

 8.  Handbook for Identification and Correction of Typical Design Deficiencies
     at Municipal Wastewater  Treatment Facilities.   EPA-625/6-82-007.   U.S.
     Environmental   Protection  Agency,   Center   for  Environmental   Research
     Information, Cincinnati, OH, 1982.
                                      14

-------
 9.   Ball,  R.   0.,  M.  Harris,  a;nd  K.  Deeny.    Evaluation  and  Control  of
     Sidestreams    Generated     in    Publicly    Owned    Treatment    Works.
     EPA-600/2-82-016, NTIS  No. PB-82-195272,  U.S.  Environmental  Protection
     Agency,  Municipal  Environmental  Research  Laboratory,  Cincinnati,  OH,
     1982.                       i

10.   Energy Management Diagnostics.   EPA-430/9-82-002,  NTIS No. PB-82-198219,
     U.S.  Environmental  Protection  Agency,  Office of Water Program Operations,
     Washington, DC, 1982.

11.   Comprehensive  Diagnostic  Evaluation  and  Selected  Management  Issues.
     EPA-430/9-82-003,  NTIS  No. 'PB-82-212770,  U.S.  Environmental  Protection
     Agency, Office of Water Program Operations, Washington, DC, 1982.

12.   Contract   Operations.   EPA-4 30/9-82-004,   NTIS  No.  PB-82-197161,  U.S.
     Environmental  Protection  Agency,  Office  of  Water  Program  Operations,
     Washington, DC,  1982.

13.   Wastewater  Utility  Recordkeeping, Reporting,  and  Management Information
     Systems.   EPA-430/9-82-006,  NTIS  No.  PB-83-109348,  U.S.  Environmental
     Protection  Agency,  Office  of  Water  Program  Operations,  Washington, DC,
     1983.

14.   New  England Wastewater  Management Guide  -  Utility  Management System.
     Available  from the New England  Water Pollution Control  Commission.
                                       15

-------
                                   CHAPTER 3

             HOW TO CONDUCT COMPREHENSIVE PERFORMANCE EVALUATIONS
3.1  Introduction

This   chapter  provides   guidance   for   persons  conducting   Comprehensive
Performance Evaluations (CPEs).  If a person associated directly with the POTW
is the evaluator conducting the CPE, some of the steps may not be necessary.


3.2  Initial Activities

To determine the magnitude  of  the  fieldwork required, and to make  the  onsite
activities most productive, as much  initial  information  as  possible should be
gathered by telephone.  This  information  includes basic  data on the  POTW and
sources for any needed additional  information.
     3.2.1  Personnel
The  evaluator should obtain  the  names of  those persons associated with  the
POTW who  will  be the primary  sources  of information for the CPE.   The  POTW
superintendent, manager, or other person in charge of the wastewater treatment
facility  should be identified.  If different persons are responsible for plant
maintenance and process control, they should also be identified.

The  person most  knowledgeable about the details  of  the  POTW  budget should be
identified by name, position,  and  physical  location.   A 1- to 2-hour  meeting
with this person during the  fieldwork  will  have to be  scheduled to obtain  a
copy of the budget and discuss it.   In  many  small communities, this person is
most often  the  city  clerk;  in  larger communities,  the utilities  director,
wastewater superintendent, or  person of similar  title can usually provide  the
best information on the budget.

The  key administrative  person or persons should  also be identified.   In many
small communities or sanitation districts, an operator or plant  superintendent
may report directly to  the  elected  governing administrative body, usually  the
city council  or district board.  In larger communities,  the  key  administrative
person  is  often  the  director  of public  works,  city manager,   or  other
nonelected administrator.    In all   cases,  the  administrator(s) who has  the
authority  to  effect  a change in  policy  or  budget  for the  POTW  should  be
identified.
                                      16

-------
If a consulting engineer is currently  involved with  the  POTW,  that individual
should be informed of the CPE and, be  provided  a  copy of the final  report  for
comment.  Normally, the  consulting engineer will not be  directly  involved in
conduct  of  the CPE.   An  exception may  occur  if  there is  an  area  of  the
evaluation that could  be supplemented by the expertise  available  through  the
consultant.                        !
     3.2.2  Wastewater Treatment Plant
The initial information contained in Table 3-1 should be obtained by telephone
to  estimate  field  time  required.    The  plant  superintendent  and/or  chief
operator should be the contact for  this  information.   This  information  should
be collected  bearing  in  mind that  some  of  the  data may later be  found  to  be
inaccurate.     Generally,   the   data  that  a  chief   operator   can   provide
extemporaneously or from  a  readily available reference  is  sufficient  at this
time.                            j

Irregularities  that  may  warrant  special   consideration  when   planning  or
conducting  the  fieldwork  shouldjbe  identified,  and more  specific  questions
should be asked to define the potential  effect  on  the  evaluation.   Frequently
occurring irregularities  include:, major  process or pieces of equipment  out  of
service; key persons on vacation or scheduled for other priority  work;  and new
or uncommon treatment'processes. ;

The  single  trickling  filter, aeration basin, or  final  clarifier being  out  of
service  will  probably necessitate  postponing fieldwork  in  small  plants.   In
plants with two or more  duplicate  unit processes,  a CPE can be conducted with
one  unit out of  service  if the results  of the evaluation   are  needed  before
normal operation can be resumed. !
      3.2.3  Performance
An  indication  of  past plant overall  performance should be obtained from plant
personnel.   Most  likely,  a CPE  will  not be  conducted unless  a  performance
problem  is at  least suspected.   However,  an  evaluator  should  not  expect to
learn  on  the  telephone  the exact details of a  performance  problem.   That is,
after  all, the  purpose  of  the CPE.
      3.2.4  Scheduling
The major criterion  for  scheduling the  time  for a CPE should be the ability to
get.   commitment  of   local  personnel   availability.    Usually,  one-half  to
two-thirds of the  time  scheduled' for  fieldwork  will  require the availability
and help  of these  persons.        !
                                       17

-------
                                   TABLE  3-1
             PRELIMINARY PLANT INFORMATION TO COLLECT BY TELEPHONE
PI ant Name	
Phone Contact
    Position
    Phone No.
Design Flow
Service Population
Year Plant Built
Directions to Plant
Date
Current Flow
Most Recent Upgrade
Major Processes (type and size):
   Preliminary treatment	
   Primary treatment
   Secondary treatment
    Aeration basin
    Trickling filter
    Clarifier
   Disinfection
   SIudge treatment 	
   Unusual  processes  or equipment
   Any processes or major equipment currently not operational
                                     18

-------
                             TABLE  3-1  (continued)
Who does performance monitoring tests?
Who does process control  tests?
What process control  test equipment is  available?
Plant coverage (8 am-5 pm,  24 hr,1  etc.)
   Work hours of key individuals	
Known conflicts with scheduling fieldwork
                                I
Contact for scheduling fieldwork	
Administrator or owner (responsible official)
Who has records on the budget?__;	
Who is consultant?
Information resources (availability):
   As-built construction plans _	
   O&M manual
   Monitoring records
   Equipment literature
                                      19

-------
Scheduling  should  be  coordinated with the availability of  at least the major
process control decisionmaker, the major administrative decisionmaker, and the
person  most knowledgeable  of the plant  budget.    A  commitment of  time  from
these key  persons  is  essential  to the  successful  conduct  of a CPE.   It may
also be beneficial to inform State and Federal regulatory personnel  of the CPE
schedule   to   avoid  possible   interference   with   enforcement   activities.
Responsibility  for  this  task  should  be  clearly  identified  between  the
evaluator and local personnel during the scheduling of activities.

During the  fieldwork, the  process control  decisionmaker  should be  prepared to
devote  at  least half of  his/her time to  the  evaluation.   The administrative
decisionmaker should  be  available  for 1  hour  for  a  kickoff  meeting,  several
hours  for  reviewing  the  budget,  another several  hours  for talking  about
general  administration, and 1-2 hours for a summary meeting.

The persons required  for the conduct of  a CPE are often very busy;  however,
the evaluator should make every effort to  include all  necessary individuals to
ensure success of the CPE.
3.3  Data Collection
Initial  onsite CPE  activities  are  largely  devoted  to collection  of  data
required  for later evaluation  of the  POTW.   As  a  courtesy, and  to  promote
efficient data collection,  the  fieldwork is initiated with a  kickoff  meeting
and a  plant  tour.   These activities  are  followed  by a  period  of  time  where a
large amount of detailed data on the POTW is gathered.
     3.3.1  Kickoff Meeting
A short meeting of  key  POTW personnel (including key  administrators)  and  the
evaluator  should  be held  to  initiate the  fieldwork.   The major  purposes  of
this meeting are to explain and gain support for the CPE effort, to coordinate
and  establish  the  schedule,  and  to  initiate  the  administrative  evaluation
activities.   The  objectives  of  the CPE  should be  presented  along with  the
proposed activities.  Specific meeting times with nonplant personnel  should be
scheduled.    Information,  and  resource  requirements  should be  spelled  out.
Specific items that are required and  may  not be readily available are: budget
information to provide a complete overview of costs associated  with wastewater
treatment;  schedule of sewer use and tap charges; discharge permit (NPDES)  for
the POTW; historical monitoring data  (2 years);  utility bills  (1  year);  sewer
use  ordinance  (if applicable); and  any  facility  plans or other  engineering
studies completed on the existing  facility.   Administrative factors  should  be
noted  during  this meeting,  such  as  the  priority  put on  permit  compliance,
familiarity with  plant  needs,  and policies  on  increased funding.    These
initial   perceptions   often    prove    valuable  when   formally   evaluating
administrative factors later in the CPE effort.
                                      20

-------
     3.3.2  Plant Tour
A plant tour  should  follow the Mckoff meeting.   The objectives of  the  tour
are to familiarize the  evaluator with the physical 'plant,  make  a preliminary
assessment of design  operational  ^flexibility of the  existing  unit  processes,
and provide an initial  basis  for  discussions on performance,  process control,
and maintenance.   A  walk-through! tour following  the flow of wastewater  is
suggested.  It  is  then  appropriate to tour  the sludge treatment and disposal
facilities, followed  by  the  support facilities such  as maintenance  areas and
laboratories.    The  evalua tor  should note  the  sampling  points  established
throughout  the  plant  for both  process  control   and compliance  monitoring.
Suggestions to  Help  the evaluator  meet  the  objectives of  the plant tour are
provided in the following sections.
         3.3.2.1  Preliminary Treatment
Major components of  preliminary  treatment typically  include
or comminution, grit removal, and;flow measurement.
coarse screening
Although inadequate screening rarely has a direct effect on plant performance,
if, for example, surface mechanical aerators must be  shut  down  twice  a day to
remove  rags  in  an  activated  sludge  plant  with  marginal  oxygen  transfer
capacity,   it   could  become   a  ! significant   performance-limiting   factor^
Screening  could be  an  identified  area  that  could  improve  performance  with
minor design improvements (at least in a  small  plant  that  could utilize hand-
cleaned bar screens).  Indications of screening problems are:

     - Plugging (with rags) of raw sewage or primary sludge pumps

     - Plugging of trickling filter distributors

     - Rag buildup on surface mechanical  aerators

     - Plugging of activated  sludge return pumps where primary clarifiers
       are not  used               1

Grit removal generally only has an  indirect  effect  on plant performance.   For
example, inadequate  grit removal  ;can  cause  excessive wear  on  pumps  or other
downstream equipment resulting  irj excessive  downtime,  and replacement/repair
costs, and could deprive critical'processes of needed operator time.

Raw  wastewater flow  measurement  facilities  are  important  to  accurately
establish  plant loadings.   The  plant  tour  should  be used  to  observe  the
primary measuring  device  and to  ask several  questions  regarding plant flows.
If flow is  turbulent or  nonsymmetrical through flumes and  over weirs commonly
used  as  primary  flow measurement devices,  the  flow records  are immediately
questionable.   If flow is nonturbulent and symmetrical, there is a good chance
the primary device is sufficiently accurate.  The evaluator  should always plan
to check the accuracy of flow measurement later during the fieldwork.
                                      21

-------
         3.3.2.2  Primary Clarification
The value of primary clarification in relation to overall  plant performance  is
in decreasing the load  on  subsequent  secondary  treatment  processes.   As  such,
the  evaluator  should determine  what  performance  monitoring  of  the  primary
processes is  conducted.   As  a minimum,  sufficient data  to  calculate  average
BODg  loadings  on the  secondary   portion  of  the  plant should be  available.
The  areas  of  major concern  that  should be  discussed  during  the tour  are
flexibility  available  for   changing  operational  functions   and   clarifier
performance.

The major operational variable that affects  primary clarifier  performance  and
can  be  controlled  in most  plants  is  sludge removal.   The evaluator  should
discuss  the  process  control  method  used to adjust  sludge  withdrawal.    In
general,  primary  clarifiers  work  best  with  a minimum of  sludge  in   the
clarifier (low  sludge  detention  times and low blanket  level).   The practical
limit for minimizing the  sludge  in the clarifier  is  when the  sludge  becomes
too thin, i.e., too much water for the sludge handling facilities.   A primary
sludge concentration of greater  than  5 percent total  solids is  an  indication
that primary clarifier performance may be improved by increased sludge pumping
and warrants  further  investigation.   A  primary sludge concentration  of  less
than 3  percent total  solids  indicates there is likely little opportunity  to
improve performance with  increased sludge pumping.    The  operational  approach
used  to  improve  primary  clarifier performance  must be  weighed against  the
impact on the sludge handling processes.
The surface  overflow  rate (SOR),  which is the  daily average flow  divided  by
clarifier surface area  (CSA), can  be  a good  indicator of the performance that
can be expected from a primary clarifier handling typical domestic wastewater.
A  clarifier operating  at. an  SOR of less  than  25  m3/m2/d  (600  gpd/sq  ft)
will typically  remove 35-45 percent  of  the  BODg in  domestic  wastewater.    A
clarifier  operating  at  an SOR of 25-40 m3/m2/d  (600-1,000 gpd/sq  ft)  will
typically remove 25-35 percent of the
         3.3.2.3  Aerator
The term "aerator" is used in this  Handbook  to  describe  the  unit  process that
provides  the  conversion  of   dissolved   and   suspended  organic  matter  to
settleable  microorganisms.    Examples  of  an   aerator   are:  aeration  basin,
trickling  filter,  and   rotating  biological  contactor  (RBC).    The  aerator
represents  a  critical  process  in  the wastewater  flow   stream  in determining
overall,  plant performance  capability.    Evaluation  of  POTW capability  will
require careful analysis of the aerator unit in  all  plants.   During the plant
tour, the evaluator should determine if current operating conditions represent
normal conditions and inquire about what operational flexibility is available.
For example: Can  trickling filters  be  run  in parallel  as well as  series?  Can
recirculation  be  provided around the  filter only?  Can  aeration  basins  be
operated  in a contact  stabilization mode as well  as plug  flow  and complete
mi x?
                                      22

-------
         3.3.2.4  Secondary Clarification
In all biological wastewater treatment plants, the main  function  of  secondary
clarification is  to  separate the; sludge  solids  from the  treated  wastewater.
Another purpose  is  to  thicken  the sludge  before  removal from the clarifier.
Characteristics  that  should be  noted on  the plant  tour are  configuration,
depth, and operational  flexibility.

The  evaluator  should  note  the  general   configuration  of  the clarifier,
including  shape,  sludge removal  mechanism, and weir  and launder  arrangement.
A  circular clarifier with  a "donut" launder located several  feet  from  the
clarifier  wall  and  a  siphon-type,; rapid withdrawal  sludge collector  typically
provides  optimum performance.    A long,  narrow,  rectangular clarifier  with
effluent weirs only at the end and countercurrent sludge removal  should signal
an immediate concern about  clarifier  performance.   Clarifiers with depth less
than 3 m  (10 ft)  provide limited sludge  storage and thickening capability and
create concerns about capacity, especially in activated sludge plants.
                                  i
The SOR caa be used to roughly estimate final clarifier capacity.   An SOR less
than  25  nr/nr/d  (600  gpd/sq  ft)  for  a  circular  clarifier  indicates good
clarifier  capacity.    A  significantly   higher  SOR would   mean  that  other
processes  would  have  to be  fairly   conservative  to make the  system  perform
adequately,  and they  should  be  evaluated  with  consideration of  this higher
clarifier  loading.

When  touring activated  sludge  facilities, the evaluator  should become  familiar
with  operation  and  flexibility  of the  return  sludge  scheme: how  sludge  is
withdrawn  from  the  clarifier;  ability to  operate at higher or lower loadings;
availability  of  return  sludge  flow  measurement;  and  flexibility  to direct
return sludge  to  different  aeration  basins  or points in  the flow stream.
          3.3.2.5   Disinfection
 Disinfection facilities should be toured  to  become familiar with the process
 and  equipment  available and  because  inspection  of  disinfection  facilities
 often  provides  insight into performance  of  the  secondary treatment process.
 Where   disinfection   is  required,  nearly all  POTWs  use  chlorine  as  the
 disinfectant and incorporate  a  Chlorine contact basin of sufficient size to
 provide 10  minutes  to 2 hours  of contact time.

 In  biological wastewater treatment  facilities that  periodically lose  sludge
 solids  over the  final  clarifier  weirs.,   chlorine  contact  basins  generally
 contain a buildup of sludge solids.    If more  than  5-10 cm (2-4 in) of sludge
 has  built   up  on  the  bottom  of  the  basin,  there  is   a  good  chance   that
 significant solids  loss is  occurring  from  the  secondary clarifier.
                                       23

-------
         3.3.2.6  Sludge Handling Capability
The  evaluator's  major  concern   with   sludge  handling  facilities   is   in
identifying any potential  "bottlenecks"  and  possible alternatives  if capacity
problems are  indicated.   During the plant  tour,  the evaluator  should  become
familiar with the general flow pattern of sludge from the point at which it is
removed  from  the  primary  and  secondary clarifiers to  the   point  of  final
disposal.

All  return  flow streams  should be identified  during  the tour  and  the  plant
personnel should be questioned regarding each stream's volume  and strength  and
the availability of data.  Return supernatant streams from anaerobic  digesters
are  the  most  common   return   streams  that  cause   performance   problems.
Supernatant from aerobic digesters and filtrate from dewatering operations  are
generally not a serious problem.
         3.3.2.7  Laboratory
The  laboratory  should be  included  as  part  of the  plant  tour.    Performance
monitoring  and  process  control  testing should  be discussed with  laboratory
personnel.    Available  analytical   capability  should  also  be  determined.
Sampling  and  analytical  support are  often  essential  parts of the  evaluation
effort and the  evaluator  should  determine  what level of support  is  available
from the laboratory for the CPE.
     3.3.3  Detailed Data Gathering
Following  the  plant  tour,  a major  effort is  initiated  to collect  all  data
necessary  to  assess  the  performance  potential  of  the  existing  facilities.
This data collection effort may require two or three persons for 3-7 days in a
larger plant, and one or two persons for 1-2 days in a smaller plant.

Information  is  collected  to  document  past  performance,  process   design,
maintenance, management, budget, process control, and administrative policies.
Collecting information for many of these items requires the assistance of POTW
and other  personnel.   As  such, the  data  gathering  should be scheduled around
their availability.  The time  when key personnel are not available should  be
used by  the  evaluator to  initially  review documents such  as  O&M  manuals and
construction plans, to  summarize  notes and questions for POTW personnel, and
to check completeness of data collection.
The forms in Appendix  D
data collection  effort
below:
have proven  to  be
(1-2).   The  items
valuable working guidelines for the
covered by  these forms  are  listed
     - General POTW Information, Form D-l
     - Administrative Data, Form D-2
                                      24

-------
     - Design Data, Form D-3
     - Operations Data,  Form D-4   j
     - Maintenance Data, Form D-5  ,
     - Performance Data, Form D-6  \

When collecting data using these forms, the evaluator should be aware that the
data  are  to be  used  to evaluate  the  performance capability of  the existing
POTW.  The evaluator should continuously be asking "How does this affect plant
performance?"     If  the   area   of;  inquiry   is   directly  related  to  plant
performance, such  as  a clarifier  design  or an  administrative policy  to  cut
electrical  costs  to  an  unreasonable  level,  the  evaluator  should  spend
sufficient time and effort to fully  understand and  define  the  effect on plant
performance.    If  the  area  of  inquiry   is  not  directly  related  to  plant
performance, such as an  operator's certification  or the  appearance  of  the
plant grounds, the condition should be noted and efforts directed toward areas
that specifically impact performance.

Completion of Form  D-l  requires that values be  selected  to represent current
plant  hydraulic  and organic  loadings.  Peak  month loads  should  be used for
these calculations  to be compatible with the definition of  secondary treatment
requirements  used  as  the  basis  for this Handbook.   In  POTWs  where  special
allowance  has  been made  for  high  infiltration/inflow,  such   as  permitted
bypassing  above  a  selected  flow, that  flow at  which  secondary treatment is
required  should  be  used.
3.4   Evaluation  of Major  Unit Processes
 Once data  collection  has  been  substantially  completed, data  evaluation is
 initiated.   Initial  focus is on evaluation of  the  POTW's major  unit processes
 to determine the general  applicability of a CCP  to  improve  performance,  i.e.,
 define the  facility  as Type 1,  2,  or 3 as described in Chapter 2.

 Performance  cannot  be  improved  to   a  desired  level   unless  existing  major
 processes have adequate capacity to handle current  loadings.  The three  basic
 unit processes  whose  capacities most frequently affect  biological  wastewater
 treatment  plant performance  are:! aerator  (the  unit  that provides  for  the
 conversion   of   nonsettleable    prganics),    the   clarifier   (solids/liquid
 separator), and the  sludge handling system (1-4).

 A point  system is  used to quantify the  evaluation  of these three  basic unit
 processes.   Key loading  and  process parameters are calculated and results for
 each   parameter  assigned   a  score  by  comparison   with   standard  tables.
 Subsequently, each of the three major unit processes receives a total score by
 adding together the points  assigned the loading and  process  parameters.   The
 totals are  then compared with standards to assess whether a Type 1,  Type 2, or
 Type 3 capability is  indicated  for that  unit  process.   The overall  plant type
 is  determined  by  the  "weakest link"  among the three  major process  areas.  It
 must  be  remembered  in using this point  system  that   this  simplification can
 provide  valuable  assistance but; cannot  replace  the  overall  judgment and
 experience  of the evaluator.      i
                                       25

-------
     3.4.1  Suspended Growth Major Unit Processes
Suspended  growth  facilities  include those  plants  using  variations  of  the
activated  sludge  process.   The three significant unit  processes  within  these
types of  facilities  that determine capacity and performance  are  the  aeration
basin, secondary clarifier, and sludge handling system.
         3.4.1.1  Aeration Basin
Parameters that are used  for  scoring  the  capability of an aeration basin are:
hydraulic detention time, organic loading, and oxygen availability.  The point
system for scoring these  parameters is  presented  in Table 3-2.   To obtain the
necessary  parameters,   information  is  required  on  wastewater  flow  to  the
aeration  basin,  aeration  basin  BODs loading,  aeration basin liquid  volume,
and oxygen transfer capacity.
                                   TABLE 3-2
             PARAMETERS FOR SCORING CAPABILITY OF AERATION BASINS
                           IN SUSPENDED GROWTH POTWs*
          Current Operating Condition

          Hydraulic Detention Time, hr:

                     24
                     10
                      5
                      3

          Organic Loading, kg BOD5/m3/(j| (ib/d/1,000 cu ft):

                   0.24 (15)
                   0.40 (25)
                   0.80 (50)
                   1.28 (80)

          Oxygen Availability, kg 0£/kg BOD5 load:

                     2.5
                     1.5
                     1.2
                     1.0
                     0.8
Points
  10 (max.)
   6
   0
  -6
  10 (max.)
   6
   0
  -6
  10 (max.)
   5
   0
  -5
 -10
           Interpolate to nearest whole number between loadings listed.
                                      26

-------
Oxygen transfer capacity  is  usually the most  difficult  information  to obtain
if the original engineering data are not available or  if there  is some reason
to question the original  design  data based  oh current conditions.  Generally,
the evaluation  proceeds by using .available  data on oxygen  transfer capacity
and  assuming  it  is  correct  unless  the  transfer  capacity  appears  to  be
marginal.  If oxygen transfer capacity appears marginal, further investigation
is  warranted.   Any  of the  following  conditions would  lead an  evaluator to
suspect marginal oxygen transfer:;

     - Difficulty in maintaining minimum DO

     - Continuous operation of  all  blowers, or  all  aerators  set at  high
       speed

     - Design  data  showing less than 1.4 kg  oxygen  transfer capacity per
       kg actual BOD5 load

If  design  oxygen  transfer capacity is  unavailable  or  is  believed suspect,
oxygen transfer rates presented In  Table  3-3 can be  used  to estimate oxygen
transfer capacities.
                                   TABLE 3-3

                    TYPICAL STANDjURD OXYGEN TRANSFER RATES3
               Aeration System
               Coarse bubble diffusers^
               Fine bubble diffusers0
               Surface mechanical; aerators
               Submerged turbine aerators^
               Jet aerators6
Standard Oxygen
 Transfer Rate
  Ib 02/hp-hr

      2.0
      6.5
      3.0
      2.0
      2.8
               aGuidance for adjusting to field conditions is
                presented in Appendix F.
               bFor 2.7-3.6 m  (9-;12 ft) submergence.
               CFor 18-26 w/m3  (0.7-1.0 hp-hr/100 cu ft).
               ^Includes both blower and mixer horsepower.
               elncludes both blower and pump horsepower.
                                      27

-------
Additional  data  required  to  make  the  estimate  are  field measurements  to
calculate wire  horsepower and  calculations to  adjust oxygen  transfer  rates
from  standard  conditions to the  local  conditions of  the  subject  plant.   The
oxygen transfer capacity (kg/d) is equal  to the wire horsepower (from Appendix
E) times  the actual  oxygen  transfer rate (Ib/hp-hr,  from Appendix F) times 24
hr/d  times  0.454 kg/lb.  When  using Table  3-3 and Appendixes  E and F,  the
evaluator   should   remember   that  data   obtained  through  these  estimating
procedures  are  only  approximate,  but  generally  have  the same  degree  of
accuracy with which oxygen demands can be predicted.

Once  data  are  available  on  wastewater   flows,  8005  of  influent  to  the
aeration  basin, aeration  basin  volume,  and  oxygen  transfer  capacity,  the
following calculations should be completed by the evaluator:
   Hydraulic Detention Time in Aerator  =
                                               Aeration Basin Volume
                                           Average Daily Wastewater Flow
   Organic Loading  =
                                 Loading
                       Aeration Basin Volume
   Oxygen Availability  =
                                           Capac1ty
                               t>uL>5 Loading
When the  above calculations  have  been  completed  for  the  subject  POTW,  the
results are  compared  to  the values given  in  Table 3-2 and appropriate points
are assigned  each parameter.   If the  parameters  for  the  subject  POTW  fall
between the values listed, interpolation is used to assign appropriate points.


         3.4.1.2  Secondary Clarifiers
               return
is presented in Table
the weir location  on
Parameters  that  are used  for  scoring  the  capability  of  suspended  growth
secondary  clarifiers are:  configuration,  SOR,  depth,  return  sludge  removal
mechanism, and return sludge control.  The scoring system for these parameters
                      3-4.  The configuration score addresses the influence of
                      the rise rate  of the sludge blanket.   A  lower score is
assigned when the  effective clarifier surface area is  judged to be decreased
due to the location  of  effluent  weirs and launders.   For example, a clarifier
15 m  long  and 3  m wide  (total  surface  area of 45  m2) with a  two-sided 1-m
wide  weir located  1  m  from  the  end  is judged  to  have  9m2  of  launder
coverage [(3 m wide)  x  (1 m +  1  m +  1 m)],  or only 20%  of the surface area.
The  parameter  that  needs  to  be   determined   to  complete  the  clarifier1s
evaluation is SOR:
   SOR  =  !l}ow.trom the Clarifier
           Clarifier Surface Area
                                      28

-------
                              TABLE 3-4

           PARAMETERS FOR SCORING CAPABILITY OF  CLARIFIERS
                      IN SUSPENDED GROWTH  POTWs
Current Operating Condition   j

Configuration:                ;

  Circular with "donut" or interior launders
  Circular with weirs on walls
  Rectangular with 33% covered with launders
  Rectangular with 20% covered with launders
  Rectangular with launder at or near end

Surface Overflow Rate, m3/m2/d (gpd/sq ft):
                              I
         12  (300)             ;
         20  (500)
         27  (650)
         33  (800)
         41  (1,000)
         49  (1,200)

Depth at Weirs, m  (ft):       !
          4.6
          3.7
          3.0
          2.4
          2.1
(15)
(12)
(10)
(8)
(7)
 Return  SIudge  Removal:

   Circular,  rapid withdrawal
   Circular,  scraper to  hopper1
   Rectangular, cocurrent scraper
   Rectangular, countercurrent scraper
   No mechanical removal       i

 Return Activated Sludge Control:
                                            Points
                                              10
                                               7
                                               0
                                              -5
                                             -10
                                              15
                                              10
                                               5
                                               0
                                              -10
                                              -15
 10
  4
  0
 -5
-10
                                               10
                                                8
                                                2
                                                0
                                               •• y
   Actual RAS flow range completely within recommended RAS
    flow range; capability to;mea§ure RAS flow               10
   Actual RAS flow range completely within recommended RAS
    flow range; no capability'to measure RAS flow             7
   50%  of recommended RAS flow range covered by actual RAS
    flow range; capability to measure RA                       5
    50% of recommended  RAS  flow  range covered by  actual RAS
     flow range;  no capability to  measure  RAS flow             0
    Actual  RAS flow range completely outside recommended
     RAS flow range                                           -5

-------
Evaluation  of return  activated  sludge  control  is  based  on  the  ability  to
control the return activated sludge flow rate volume within the range normally
recommended for the particular type of activated sludge plant.   Typical  ranges
for return activated sludge pumping rates are presented in Table 3-5.
                                   TABLE 3-5

                      TYPICAL RANGES FOR RETURN ACTIVATED
                           SLUDGE PUMPING CAPACITIES
           Process Type
	Return Activated Sludge	
% of average daily wastewater flow
           Conventional A.S. and ABF
             (plug- flow or complete mix)
           Extended Aeration
             (including oxidation ditches)
           Contact Stabilization
             25-75

             50-100
             50-125
         3.4.1.3  Sludge Handling Capability
The  capability of  sludge  handling  facilities  associated  with an  activated
sludge plant is scored by  the controllability of the wasting  process  and  the
capability of the available sludge treatment and disposal  facilities.  Scoring
for sludge handling capability is not as straightforward as for the aerator or
clarifier.   This  is  because  the  capacity of  existing facilities  cannot  be
easily  assessed   due  to   the  variability  that  exists   in  precalculated
"standards"  for  process  or  loading  parameters.    To evaluate  the  sludge
handling  capacity,  the   evaluator  must   first  calculate   expected   sludge
production based  on current  loadings  to the wastewater  treatment processes.
The evaluator  then  assesses the capability of the  existing  sludge facilities
to handle the calculated sludge production.

The criteria  and  point  system  for  evaluating sludge handling  capability  are
presented  in  Table  3-6.     As  indicated  by  the  lower  points   allocated,
controllability is much less important than capacity.
                                      30

-------
                                  ;TABLE 3-6

               CRITERIA FOR XORIN6 SLUDGE HANDLING CAPABILITY
                         FOR SUSPENDED GROWTH POTWs
      Current Operating Condition                                  Points

      Controllability:

         Automated  sampling and volume control                         5
         Metered  volume  and hand  sampling                              3
         Hand measured volume  and hand sampling                        2
         Sampling or volume measurement  by  hand  not  practical          0

       Capacity:
                                  t
         150% of calculated  long-term average sludge production       25
         125% of calculated  long-term average sludge production       20
         100% of calculated  long-term average sludge production       15
          75% of calculated  long-term average sludge production       0
          50% of calculated  long-term average sludge production      -10
Controllability  of the  wasting process  is  indicated  by  the  type of  waste
sludge  volume  measurement and  th£  type of  waste sludge  sampling  available.
The optimum control for  an  activated  sludge wasting  system includes automatic
volume  control   and  automatic  sampling.    A positive  displacement pump  and
automatic  sampler,  both controlled  by  an  accurate  and precise clock,  is  an
example of this type of control.  ;

Most small activated sludge plants can  manually  measure a wasted volume (rise
in holding tank or digester, or the number of tank trucks filled) and manually
sample  (from a  tap or the open  end  of the  waste sludge line).  Most larger
plants  have flow measuring and totaling devices on waste sludge lines.

Capacity  of  existing  sludge  handling  facilities   is  evaluated  using  the
following procedures:             ;

     -  Calculate expected sludge production.

     -  Establish capacity of  existing sludge  handling unit  processes.

     -  Determine percentage of  the calculated sludge  production  each unit
        process can handle.

     -  Identify the "weakest  link"  process as the overall  capacity of  the
        existing sludge handling facilities and  compare to scoring values
        in Table 3-6.              «
                                       31

-------
 Expected  sludge production is calculated  using  current BODs loadings (unless.
 believed  inaccurate)  and  typical   unit  sludge  production  values  for  the
 existing  wastewater treatment processes (5).   Typical  unit sludge production
 values  for  various processes  are  shown   in  Table  3-7.    For  example,  an
 oxidation  ditch removing about  1,000  kg BOD5/d would  be  expected  to have an
 average  sludge  production of about  650 kg TSS/d  (1,000 kg BOD5/d x 0.65 kg
 TSS/kg BOD5  removed).
                                   TABLE 3-7

                     TYPICAL UNIT SLUDGE PRODUCTION VALUES
                          FOR SUSPENDED GROWTH POTWs
      Process Type                     kg TSS (sludge)/kg BODs removed

      Primary Clarification                          1.7

      Activated Sludge w/Primary Clarification       0.7

      Activated Sludge w/o Primary Clarification
        Conventional5                                0.85
        Extended Aerationb                           0.65
        Contact Stabilization                        1.0
      alncludes tapered aeration, step feed, plug flow, and
       complete mix with wastewater detention times <10 hours.
      blncludes oxidation ditch.
If  plant  records  include  sludge  production  data,  the  actual  unit  sludge
production  value  should be compared  to  the typical value.   If  a discrepancy
greater  than  15 percent  exists  between these  values,  further  evaluation  is
warranted.   The most common  causes of inaccurate  recorded  sludge  production
are:

     - Excessive solids loss over the final  clarifier weirs
     - Inaccurate waste volume measurement
     - Insufficient waste sampling and concentration analyses
     - Inaccurate determination of BOD removed

Using the  determined unit sludge  production  values and actual  BOD5  removals
for the  subject plant, the expected  mass  of sludge  produced per day can  be
calculated.   To  complete  the  scoring  of  sludge  handling  capability,  the
expected volume of sludge produced per day  should also be calculated.
                                      32

-------
Typical  waste sludge concentrations for  activated  sludge  plants are presented
in Table 3-8 and can be  used  to  convert  the expected mass of  sludge  produced
per day to the expected volume of sludge  produced per day.
                                   TABLE 3-8
                                  I
                         TYPICAL SLUDGE CONCENTRATIONS
                          FOR SUSPENDED GROWTH POTWs
        Sludge Type
Waste Concentration
        Primary

        Activated                 ;••
          Return Sludge/Conventional
          Return Sludge/Extended Aeration
          Return Sludge/Contact Stabilization   ^
          Return Sludge/small plant with low SOR *
          Separate waste hopper in secondary clarifier
        mg/1

       50,000
        6,000
        7,500
        8,000
       10,000
       12,000
          Returns  can often be shut off for short periods to thicken
          waste  sludge  in clarifiers with SORs less than 20 m3/mz/d
          (500 gpd/sq ft).         '.
 The  capacity of  each  of the components of the sludge handling process must be
 evaluated  with  respect  to  its  ability  to  handle  the  calculated  long-term
 average  sludge production for  current loadings.   Any  process that may become  a
 "bottleneck" should  be  considered  critical.    Typical   components  found  in
 activated sludge facilities are:\ thickening, digestion,  dewatering,  hauling,
 and di sposal.                    j

 Guidelines  for  the  capacity  evaluation  of the  components  of  the  existing
 sludge  handling  processes are  provided in Tables 3-9  and  3-10.  The guidelines
 provided  in Table  3-9  are  used  to. compare  existing  facility capacity  to
 expected sludge  production.  For example, an existing  aerobic digester  with  a
 volume   of  380   m3  (100,000 gal)  in  a  plant with  a calculated waste  sludge
 volume of 19 m3/d  (5,000 gal/d) would have  a  hydraulic  detention  time of  20
 days.  This is  133 percent of the guidelines provided for aerobic digesters in
 Table 3-9.   Thus,  this  component  of  the  sludge  handling  process in  this
 particular  POTW would  have capacity for 133 percent of  the  long-term average
 sludge production.   If the aerobi|c digester proved to have the lowest capacity
 to  handle  long-term average  sludge production  of  all the components  of the
 sludge handling processes in this POTW, sludge handling capability  would score
 22  points  (interpolated  from  Table 3-6).   The  sludge  handling  capability
 evaluation  is illustrated as part of the CPE example presented in Section 3.9.
                                       33

-------
                                TABLE 3-9

                  GUIDELINES FOR EVALUATING CAPACITY OF
                   EXISTING SLUDGE HANDLING PROCESSES
Process

Gravity Thickeners
  Primary Sludge
  Activated Sludge
  Primary + Activated
  Fixed Film
  Primary + Fixed Film

Dissolved Air Flotation
  Primary SIudge
  Activated Sludge
  Primary + Activated
  Fixed Film
  Primary + Fixed Film

Digesters
  Aerobic
  Anaerobic
   Single Stage
   Two Stage

Drying Beds

Mechanical Dewatering
  Single Unit
  Multiple Units
Liquid Sludge Haul
  Short  Haul  (<3  km)
  Long Haul  (>20  km)
 Parameters That Can Be Used
to Represent 100% of Required
  Sludge Handling Capacity9


125 kg/m2/d (25 Ib/d/sq ft)
20 kg/m2/d (4 Ib/d/sq ft)
50 kg/mf,/d (10 Ib/d/sq ft)
40 kg/nt/d (8 Ib/d/sq ft)
75 kg/m2/d (15 Ib/d/sq ft)


125 kg/m2/d (25 Ib/d/sq ft)
50 kg/m2/d (10 Ib/d/sq ft)
100 kg/m2/d (20 Ib/d/sq ft)
75 kg/m2/d (15 Ib/d/sq ft)
125 kg/nfVd (25 Ib/d/sq ft)
15 days' hydraulic detention timeb

40 days' hydraulic detention time
30 days' combined hydraulic detention time

Worst season turnover time
30 hours of operation/week
60 hours of operation/week (with one unit
   out of service)
6  trips/day maximum
4  trips/day maximum
 ^Capacity of  existing unit  processes  should not be downgraded to these
  values  if good  operation  and  process performance are documented at
  higher  loadings.   For example,  if records appear accurate and show that
  all  sludge production has  been  successfully  thickened  in a gravity
  activated sludge  thickener for  the past year at an  average loading of
  25 kg/nr/d (5 Ib/d/sq ft), the  existing  thickener  should be considered
  to have 100% of required  capacity.
 ^Hydraulic detention time  = Volume of digester/Volume of waste sludge
  expected to be  produced.
                                    34

-------
                                  TABLE 3-10

                 MISCELLANEOUS UNIT VALUES USED IN EVALUATING
                    CAPACITY OF SLUDGE  HANDLING CAPABILITY9
Aerobic Digesters
 Following Extended
 Aeration (MCRT>20 days)
Aerobic Digesters
 Following Conventional
 A, S. (MCRT<12 days)

Anaerobic Digesters for
 Activated + Primary, and
 Fixed Film (Supernating
 Capability Useable)
Digester13
  IHDT
  idays

  J10
  i!5
  120
                                             Total  Solids
                                               Reduction
  10
  ;15
 >20
  i

 J20
  ;30
  40
Volatile Solids Content           I
 of Waste Activated Sludge,       :
  Conventional (MCRT<12 days)     :
  Extended Aeration (MCRT>20 days)
10
20
30
35

20
35
40

25
35
45
                80%
                70%
     Output Solids
     Concentration
         mg/1

        12,000
        15,000
        17,000
        20,000

        12,000
        15,000
        17,000
    Equal  to input
10% greater than input
20% greater than input
 aValues  in  table  are  intended  fori use  in  allowing an  evaluation of sludge
  handling  capability  to  proceed  in the absence  of available  plant data.  Many
  other variables  can  affect the  vjalues of the parameters  shown.
 "Hydraulic  detention  time  = Volumfe of  digester/Volume of  waste  sludge
  expected  to  be produced.
          3.4.1.4  Suspended Growth Major Unit Process Analysis
 Once individual major unit  processes  are evaluated  and  given a score,  these
 results  should  be  recorded on  a| summary sheet, as  shown  in Table 3-11,  and
 compared with standards  for each major unit  process and the total  plant.   This
 analysis results in  the  subject iPOTW  being  rated a Type 1,  Type 2, or Type  3
 facility,  as described  in Chapter  2.    The  sum  of  the  points  scored  for
 aeration basin, secondary clarifiier, and sludge handling capability must be 60
 or  above  for  the  subject  POTW  to   be  designated   a  Type   1  facility.
 Furthermore, regardless  of total  points, the  aerator must  score  at  least 13
 points,  the secondary  clarifier  at  least  25  points,  and sludge  handling
 capability at least 10 points for the  plant  to be considered  Type  1.
                                       35

-------
                                 TABLE 3-11

           SUSPENDED GROWTH MAJOR UNIT PROCESS CAPACITY EVALUATION
                             Points Scored
  Aeration Basin
  Secondary Clarifier
  Sludge Handling  Capability

    Total
                                                      Points Required
Type 1Type 2
 13-30
 25-55
 10-30

 60-115
 0-12
 0-24
 0- 9

20-59
Type 3

   <0
   <0
   <0

  <20
  *Each unit process as well  as the overall  total  points must fall  in  the
   designated range for the plant to achieve the Type 1 or Type  2 rating.
If the  subject POTW meets  the  criteria  for a Type 1 plant, the evaluation has
indicated that all major processes have  adequate capacity for a CCP to be  able
to bring  the  plant into compliance.  If the  total  is less than  60 points,  or
if any  one major  unit  process  scores less than  its minimum, the  facilities
must be designated as Type 2 or Type 3.

The minimum criteria  for  a Type  2 plant are 20 total points and zero for  each
individual process.   If the total  is less than  20,  or if any  major process
scores  a  negative  value, the POTW must  be  considered inadequate and the plant
designated as  Type 3.   Type  3  plants  generally require major construction
before  they can be expected to meet secondary treatment effluent limits.

A  suspended  growth POTW  that  scored the  following during the  evaluation  of
major unit processes would meet the criteria for a Type 3 plant:

          Aeration  Basin                  14 points
          Secondary Clarifier             -8 points
          Sludge Handling Capability      10 points

                   Total                  16 points

The  point system  in  Table 3-11  has  been developed  to aid  in  assessing the
capability of  a  POTW's  major  physical  facilities.   It cannot  replace the
overall judgment  and  experience  of the  evaluator, which is often the deciding
factor  in determining the  applicability  of a  CCP.
                                       36

-------
     3.4.2  Fixed Film Major Unit Processes
Fixed film facilities  include  those plants using  rock  or plastic media  plus
those using the  RBC or  ABF  variations  of the basic'trickling filter process.
The  unit  process  in   fixed  film  wastewater  treatment  plants  that  most
significantly affects capacity and; performance is the "aerator" portion of the
plant, i.e., the  amount  and  type of trickling  filter media,  RBC media,  etc.
Other  significant  unit  processes  are  the  secondary  clarifier  and  sludge
handling capability.              i
         3.4.2.1  Aerator
            a.  Trick! ing Filters
An  approach  to  develop "equivale'ncy"  is used  to evaluate  the
trickling filters of  varying  media  types.  The  unit  surface area
rock media  is typically  43  m2/m?  (13 sq  ft/cu  ft)  (6).   This
can be used  to convert data from 'trickling  filters  with artifici
equivalent volumes  of  common  rock  media.   For example,  1,000
ft) of  a plastic  media with  a  $pecific surface  area of  89
ft/cu ft)  is equivalent to  (89/43) x  (1,000 m3) or  2,070  m3  (7
of common rock media.   Unit  surface area  information for various
is generally available in manufacturers'  literature.
capacity of
 for common
 information
 1  medi a to
   3,500 cu
 /nr*  (27 sq
,300 cu  ft)
media  types
Using the equivalency calculation, organic loadings  can  be  calculated  for all
types of media.   Despite fixed fijlm  performance  being  a function of  surface
area, loadings  for  trickling  filters are typically  expressed  as  mass  of BOD5
per  volume  of  media.    The  volumetric  loading  can be  calculated using  the
equivalency  calculation  presentee!  above.    Results  can  be  compared  with
criteria in Table 3-12 to compute a "score"  for  the trickling filter.

The capacity of a trickling filter! can be significantly decreased if the media
becomes plugged.  Ponding on  the  filter  is  a common indicator of plugging and
is generally due to overgrowth of ^microorganism mass or  disintegration of the
media.  The evaluator should  inspect the filter  in several  places by removing
media to a depth of at  least  15  cm (6 in) to ensure that ponding  or  plugging
underneath the upper layer of rocks is not occuring.
            b.  RBCs
Parameters  for  scoring  RBCs  are  presented  in  Table  3-13  (7).    The  key
parameters to be evaluated are: organic loading on the first  stage  and  on  the
entire system; number of stages provided; and  whether  or not sidestreams from
anaerobic" sludge treatment are received.  Organic loading  used for  evaluating
RBCs  is  soluble  BODs  (SBOD5)  |per   unit  of media.     If  data  are  not
available,  SBOD5  is estimated  for  typical  domestic  wastewater  as  one-half
                                      37

-------
                                 TABLE 3-12

                  PARAMETERS FOR SCORING AERATOR CAPABILITY
                         FOR TRICKLING FILTER POTWs
   Current Operating Condition

   Organic Loading, kg BOD5/m3/d
                     (lb/d/1,000 cu ft):a
            Points
  Freezing
Temperatures^*
              0.16 (10)                           20
              0.32 (20)                           15
              0.48 (30)                            0
              0.80 (50)                          -10
              1.12 (70)                          -20

    Recirculation, ratio to  raw flow:

                 2:1
                 1:1
                 None

    Anaerobic Sidestreams:c

      Not returned ahead of the trickling filter
      Returned to the wastewater stream
       ahead of the trickling filter
Covered Filter
or Nonfreezing
 Temperatures
                     20
                     10
                     -5
                    -10
               3
               2
               0
               0

             -10
    aBased on primary effluent and common rock media having a specific
     surface area of about 43 mz/m3 (13 sq ft/cu ft).
    "Temperatures below freezing for more than one month.
    cSupernatant from anaerobic digesters or filtrate/concentrate from
     the dewatering processes following anaerobic digesters.
the  primary effluent  total   6005.    If  significant  industrial  contributions
are present in the system, SBOD5 should be determined by testing.

Surface  area  data  for   RBCs   are   generally   available   in  manufacturers'
literature  or  in plant O&M manuals.   If these  sources are  unavailable  or do
not contain the  needed information,  the manufacturer's representative or  the
manufacturer should be contacted to obtain the data.

First-stage media  loading is calculated  by  dividing the mass  of  SBODs  going
to it by the total  surface area of only the first-stage media.  System  media
loading  is  calculated by  dividing the  total  SBODs load to  the RBCs by  the
total surface  area  of  all RBC media.   In most cases, the mass  of  SBOD5 will
be the  same for these calculations.    They  should  only  be different in  plants
where some of the SBOD5 load is bypassed around the first stage.
                                      38

-------
                                .  TABLE  3-13

                   PARAMETERS FOR  SCORING AERATOR CAPABILITY
                              FOR  RBC POTWsa (7)
Current Operating Condition

First-Stage Loading, g SBOD5/m2/d (lb/d/1,000 sq ft)
        12 (2.5)
        20 (4.0)
        29 (6.0)

System Loading, g

        2.9 (0.6)
        4.9 (1.0)
        7.3 (1.5)

Number of Stages:

        4
        3
        2
Anaerobic Sidestreams:b   ;

  Not returned ahead of RBC
  Returned to wastewater stream
   ahead of RBC           I
                                    (lb/d/1,000 sq ft):
                                                                 Points
                                                                   10
                                                                    0
                                                                   -6
                                                                   10
                                                                    0
                                                                   -6
                                                                   10
                                                                    7
                                                                    4
                                                                    0

                                                                   10
       alncludes mechanical  and ^ir drive RBCs.
       ^Supernatant from anaerobic digesters or filtrate/concentrate
        from the dewatering processes following anaerobic digesters.
            c.  ABFs
Parameters for  evaluating  ABF  aerators are presented in Table 3-14  (8).   The
key parameters are: biocell organic loading and aeration basin detention time.
A criterion of lesser importance! is recirculation directly around the biocell.
                                i
Organic  loadings  on  the  biocejll  are  calculated  in   a  manner  similar  to
trickling filter loadings: primary  effluent  BOD5 is divided by  the  volume of
the biocell  media.   Aeration  basin  detention time is calculated  in  a manner
similar  to  activated  sludge  aeration  basin  hydraulic detention  time:  the
aeration basin liquid volume is [divided  by the average  daily wastewater flow.
Sludge recirculation is not included in the calculation.
                                      39

-------
                                  TABLE 3-14

                   PARAMETERS FOR SCORING AERATOR CAPABILITY
                               FOR ABF POTWs (8)
      Current Operating Condition

      Biocell  Organic Loading, kg BOD5/m3/d (lb/d/1,000 cu ft):

             1.6 (100)
             2.4 (150)
             2.8 (175)
             3.2 (200)
             4.0 (250)
             4.8 (300)

      Aeration Basin Detention Time, hours:

                4
                3
                2
                1
                0.75
                0.5
Points
  15
  10
   5
   0
  -5
 -10
  20
  15
  12
   5
   0
 -10
      Oxygen Availability in Aeration Basin, kg 02/kg BOD5 to Biocell:

               1.0                                                   10
               0.75                                                   7
               0.5                                                    3
               0.4                                                    0
               0.3                                                  -15

      Recirculation - Directly Around Biocell, ratio to raw flow:

               1:1                                                    3
               None                                                   0
Oxygen availability  in  the aeration  basin  of an ABF  plant is  calculated  by
dividing mass  of oxygen transfer capacity  by the total mass  of BOD5 applied
to the biocell.   This is done because  the  removal  attributed to  the biocell
versus that occurring in the aeration basin is not easily distinguished.  Most
ABF   plants   provide   for  recirculation   directly   around   the   biocell.
Recirculation is calculated as a ratio to raw flow.
                                      40

-------
         3.4.2.2  Secondary Clarifier
Criteria  for  scoring the  capability  of  secondary  clarifiers  in  trickling
filter and RBC plants are  presented  in Table 3-15.  The calculations require
that wastewater flow rate  and  the  clarifier configuration,  surface area, and
depth  be  known  (see Section  3.4.1.2).    For ABF  plants,  the  criteria for
suspended  growth  secondary   clafifiers   presented   in  Table  3-4  are  more
appropriate and should be used.  <
                                 ;TABLE  3-15
                PARAMETERS FOR SCORING CAPABILITY  OF  CLARIFIERS
                       IN TRICKLING FILTERS AND  RBCs
          Current Operating Condition

          Configuration:

            Circular with "donut" or interior launders
            Circular with weirs on walls
            Rectangular with 33% Covered with launders
            Rectangular with 20% covered with launders
            Rectangular with launder at or near end

          Surface Overflow Rate, m3/m2/d (gpd/sq ft):

                   12 (300)      i
                   20 (500)      i
                   27 (650)      :
                   33 (800)      !
                   41 (1,000)
                   49 (1,200)

          Depth at Weirs, m (ft):
                                 i
                   3.7  (12)
                   3.0  (10)      i
                   2.1  (7)
Points
  10
   7
   0
  -5
 -10
  15
  10
   5
   0
 -10
 -15
   5
   3
   0
           For ABF plants, criteria for suspended growth clarifiers
           (Table 3-4) should be used.
                                      41

-------
         3.4.2.3  Sludge Handling Capability
Criteria for  scoring sludge  handling  capability associated  with  fixed  film
plants are presented in Table 3-16.  The criteria for controllability in  Table
3-16  are  self-explanatory.   The capacity  of sludge handling  associated  with
fixed film is evaluated using the same four-step approach presented in Section
3.4.1.3 for suspended growth POTWs.
                                  TABLE 3-16

                CRITERIA FOR SCORING SLUDGE HANDLING CAPABILITY
                             FOR FIXED FILM POTWs
       Current Operating Condition                                  Points

       Controllability:

         Automated sampling and volume control                          5
         Metered volume and hand sampling                              3
         Hand measured volume and hand sampling                        2
         Sampling or volume measurement by hand not practical           0

       Capacity:

         125% of calculated long-term average sludge production       25
         100% of calculated long-term average sludge production       15
          75% of calculated long-term average sludge production        5
          50% of calculated long-term average sludge production      -10
Different  unit  sludge  production  values are  used  in  determining  expected
sludge production from fixed film facilities.  A summary of typical  unit sludge
production values  for  the  various types of fixed  film plants  is  presented  in
Table 3-17.

Frequently,  secondary  sludge from  fixed  film facilities  is  returned to the
primary clarifiers.   Typical underflow concentrations of  the  combined sludge
from  the   primary   clarifier are  shown  in   Table  3-17  as  well   as  sludge
concentrations from the individual fixed film processes.

The  guidelines  presented  in Tables  3-9  and 3-10  can be  used  to   help  an
evaluator  determine the  capacity  limits  of  existing  sludge  treatment and
disposal facilities.
                                      42

-------
                                  TABLE  3-17
                                  I

       TYPICAL  UNIT  SLUDGE  PRODUCTION VALUES AND  SLUDGE CONCENTRATIONS
                            FOR FIXED FILM POTWs
      Process Type

      Primary Clari fIcation

      Trickling Filter
      RBC
      ABF

      Sludge Type

      Primary
      Primary + Trickling Filter
      Primary + RBC
      Primary + ABF
      Trickling Filter
      RBC
      ABF
kg TSS (sludge)/kg BODq removed

              1.7

              1.0
              1.0
              1.0

   Waste Concentration, mg/1

            50,000
            45,000
            45,000
            35,000
            30,000
            30,000
            12,000
         3.4.2.4  Fixed Film Major' Unit Process Analysis
Once major  fixed  film processes are evaluated, they  should  be
compared  to  standards for  each type of  fixed film  facility.
3-19, and 3-20 can be used for thi]s purpose.
                         summarized and
                           Tables 3-18,
The  standards  are arranged similar  to  .those for  suspended  growth facilities
presented  in  Table  3-11  and  discussed in  Section  3.4.1.4.   This  analysis
results  in the   subject  POTW  being rated  Type  1,  Type  2,  or  Type 3,  as
described in Chapter 2.  Using  these  tables,  the subject plant must score the
minimum  number  of points listed  for each individual process  and  the minimum
number total points for all processes for the plant  to  qualify for a specific
plant type.  For  example, a trickling filter  plant scoring the following would
meet  the criteria  for a  Type Ij facility  for  overall  points, aerator,  and
secondary clarifier, but  would be; classified Type 2 because of its score for
sludge handling capability.      . j

         Trickling Filter                21 points
         Secondary Clarifier      ;       27 points
         Sludge Handling Capability       6 points

              Total                      54 points
                                      43

-------
                                TABLE 3-18

          TRICKLING FILTER MAJOR UNIT PROCESS CAPACITY EVALUATION
                            Points Scored
                                                     Points Required
"Aerator"
Secondary Clarifier
Sludge Handling Capability

  Total
Type l

 17-23
 17-30
 10-30

 45-83
Type z

  0-11
  0-16
  0- 9

 15-44
Type 6

   <0
   <0
   <0
                                TABLE 3-19

                RBC MAJOR UNIT PROCESS CAPACITY EVALUATION
                            Points Scored
                                                     Points Required
"Aerator"
Secondary Clarifier
Sludge Handling Capability

  Total
Type 1
14-30
17-30
10-30
Type 2
0-13
0-16
0- 9
Type 3
<0
<0
<0
 48-90
 15-47
                                TABLE 3-20

                ABF MAJOR UNIT PROCESS CAPACITY EVALUATION
                                                     Points Required
"Aerator"
Secondary Cl
Sludge Handl
Total
Points Scored

arifier
ing Capability


Type 1
15-48
20-55
10-30
50-133
Type 2
0-14
0-19
0- 9
15-49
HType 3
<0
<0
<0
<15
 Each unit process as well  as the overall  total  points must  fall  in  the
 designated range for the plant to achieve the Type 1 or Type  2  rating.
                                    44

-------
3.5  Evaluation of Performance-Limiting Factors
The identification of  performance-limiting factors .should  be completed at  a
location other  than  the POTW so  that all  potential factors  can  be discussed
objectively.   The  checklist of I  performance-limiting  factors  presented  in
Appendix A, as well  as  the  guidelines for  interpreting  these factors, provide
the structure for  an organized  review of  problems  in the subject  POTW.   The
intent is to identify  as clearly as possible the factors that most accurately
describe the  causes  of limited i performance.   For  example, poor  activated
sludge operation may be causing  poor plant performance because the operator is
improperly  applying  activated  sludge concepts.   If the operator  is  solely
responsible for  process control ;decisions as  well  as  for  testing  for these
decisions,   the  factor of  improper  application  of   concepts   should   be
identified.

Often,  operator inability  can  bp traced  to  another source,  such as  an  O&M
manual  containing  inaccurate  information  or  a  technical  consultant  who
provides  routine  assistance  to  the  operator.    In  this  case,  improper
application of concepts plus the ;source of the problem (O&M manual or improper
technical  guidance)   should be  jidentified  as   performance-limiting  factors,
since both must be corrected in ai CCP to achieve desired plant performance.

Whereas the checklist  and  guidelines in Appendix A provide  the  structure  for
the  identification of-  performance-limiting  factors, notes taken  during  the
plant  tour and  detailed data-gathering activities (including the completed
forms  from  Appendix  D) provide the  technical  resources  for identifying these
factors.                        . i

Each  factor identified  as  limiting performance  should be weighed with respect
to  impact  on plant  performance ;and  assigned an "A,"  "B," or "C"  rating as
discussed  in  Section  2.2.3.    !Further   priori tization  is  accomplished  by
completing  the  summary sheet presented in Appendix B.   Generally, only those
factors receiving either an "A" or "B" rating are prioritized on this sheet.

Additional  guidance  for  identifying and prioritizing  performance-limiting
factors  is  provided  in  the  following  sections  for  the  general  areas  of
administration, design, operation, and maintenance.
      3.5.1  Administration Factors
 The  budget  is the  mechanism  whereby  POTW  owners/administrators  generally
 implement  their  objectives.    therefore,  evaluation  and  discussion  of the
 budget   is    an    effective    mechanism   for   identifying   administrative
 performance-limiting  factors.   j For  this   reason,  early  during  the  onsite
 fieldwork  the evaluator  should  schedule  ,a  meeting  with  the  key  POTW
 decisionmaker  and the  "budget  person."   This meeting  should be scheduled to
 occur after  the evaluator is  technically  familiar with  the plant.
                                      45

-------
Nearly  every POTW  budget is  set  up  differently  so  it  helps  to  review  the
budget with  the  assistance of plant personnel to  realistically  rearrange  the
budget  line  items  into  categories emphasizing  various  costs.   Forms  for
collecting budget data  are presented in Appendix  D.   Analysis of  these  data
can be  supported by comparison  with typical  values for  wastewater treatment
plants  (1)(4)(9)(10).   POTWs larger than 8,000 m3/d  (2  mgd) in  size  usually
have budgets that clearly describe  wastewater  treatment costs.    Budgets  for
smaller POTWs  are often  combined  with budgets for  other utilities,  such  as
wastewater  collection,   water  treatment  and distribution,  or  even  street
repairs and maintenance.  For this reason, it is often more difficult and time
consuming to establish realistic costs for small  POTWs.

Key POTW  administrators  should be  identified  and interviews scheduled  with
them as  described in Section  3.2.1.   As a  general  rule, the POTW operating
staff should not  attend  the  interviews with  POTW  administrators  because their
presence may inhibit open discussion.

The evaluation  of  administrative  performance-limiting  factors  is by  nature
subjective.   Typically,  all  administrators verbally support  goals  of  low
costs,  safe  working  conditions,  good treatment  performance,  high  employee
morale, etc.   An  important question  that the  evaluator must ask  is,  "Where
does good treatment fit in?"  Often this question can be  answered by observing
the priority of  items  implemented  or  supported by  administrators.   The ideal
situation is one in which the administrators  function with full  awareness that
they want to achieve desired performance as an end product of their wastewater
treatment efforts.  Improving working conditions, lowering possible costs, and
other  similar  goals  would  be  pursued  within  the realm of first achieving
adequate performance.
At the other end of  the  spectrum is an
raised the  monthly  rates  100 percent  last
dime  on  that  plant."    POTW administration
criteria:
                    administrative attitude that  "we  just
                         year;  we aren't  spending  another
                         can  be judged  by the  following
     Excellent:
     Normal:
     Poor:
Reliably  provides  adequate  wastewater  treatment  at
lowest reasonable cost.

Provides  best  possible  treatment  with   the   money
available.
Spends as little  as  possible  with  no correlation
to achieving adequate plant performance.
made
Administrators who  fall  into  the "poor" category typically  are  identified  as
contributing  to  inadequate  performance  during  the  factor  identification
activities.

Technical problems identified by the plant staff or the CPE evaluator, and the
potential costs associated with  correcting  these  problems,  often  serve as the
basis for  assessing administrative factors limiting  plant performance.   For
example,  the   plant  staff  may  have  correctly  identified   needed  minor
modifications  for  the  facility  and  presented  those  needs  to  the  POTW
                                      46

-------
administrators, but  had  their request  turned down.    The  evaluator  should
solicit the  other  side of  the story from  the administrators  to  see if  the
administrative  policy   is   indeedj nonsupportive  in  correcting  the  problem.
There  have  been many  instances  in which operators  or  plant  superintendents
have  convinced administrators to  spend  money  to  "correct"  problems  that
resulted in no improvement in plant performance.

Another  area   in   which   administrators   can  significantly,  even   though
indirectly,  affect plant  performance is  through personnel  motivation.    If
administrators  encourage  professional  growth  through  support  of  training,
tangible  awards for  initial  or  upgrading  certification,  etc.,  a  positive
influence exists.   If, however, administrators eliminate or skimp on essential
operator training, downgrade  operator positions through substandard salaries,
or otherwise  provide a negative  influence on  operator morale,  administrators
can have a significant detrimental! effect on overall  plant performance.

                                  !
     3.5.2  Design Factors


Data  gathered during  the plant  tour, completed Form  D-3,  and  the previously
completed  evaluation  of major unit  process  capabilities provide  the bulk of
the.  information needed to  complete  the identification  and  prioritization of
design-related  performance-limiting  factors.     However,   to   complete   the
evaluation  of  design  factors in; many  CPEs,  the evaluator must  make  field
investigation of the operational  flexibility of the various unit processes.

Field   investigations  should  be \ completed   in  cooperation  with  the  POTW
operator.   The evaluator must not make any changes unilaterally.   Any field
testing  desiredshould  be  discussed with  the  operator,whose  cooperation
should be  obtained in  making  any  needed  changes.   This approach is essential
since  the  evaluator may wish  to  implement changes that, while improving plant
performance,  could be  detrimental  to specific  equipment at the  plant.   The
operator has  worked with  the equipment, repaired  past failures,  and read the
manufacturers'  literature  and is  in  the  best position to evaluate any adverse
impact of  proposed changes.       I

Field  investigation  of  process  flexibility  defines  the limitations of  the
equipment  and processes and  al so promotes  a  better  understanding of the  time
and  difficulty  required  to  implement  better  process control.    This  is
illustrated  by  the following  discussion:

   A   380  m3/d (0.1  mgd)   extended  aeration  facility has  airlift sludge
   return  pumps that  have  been operated  to  provide return rates of 200-300
   percent of  influent  flow rates.   The  evaluator  desired  to  know if
   returns could  be  held under 100  percent  since this would substantially
   reduce  solids  loading  on  the: final  clarifier and potentially improve
   clarifier  performance.         i

   Discussions  with the  plant operator  revealed that  he  had previously
   tried  to  reduce  the  return  rate by  reducing the air  to  the  airlift
   return  pumps.   The operator  abandoned  the ideas  because  the  airlifts
                                      47

-------
   repeatedly plugged overnight when left  at  the  low rates.   The evaluator
   convinced the operator to again try reducing returns  so that the limits
   of return sludge flow control  available could be defined.

   An  airlift  pump consists  of a  vertical   pipe  with one  end submerged,
   usually 2-3 m (6-10 ft), in the basin from which  liquid is  to be pumped
   and an air supply that  introduces air  into the pipe near  its lower end.
   Air introduced into the pipe decreases  the specific gravity of the pipe
   contents (air bubble and liquid mixture),  and  the heavier liquid in the
   surrounding  basin  forces  the  air/liquid  mixture  up  the   pipe.    The
   pumping force created is proportional  to the  differential weight inside
   and outside  the  pipe.   Increased flow is achieved  by  increasing  the
   amount  of air  introduced   thus  reducing  the  specific gravity of  the
   mixture further and increasing the driving  force.

   The air rate was initially reduced to produce  a return  flow rate of 100
   percent  of  incoming wastewater  flow  as measured  by  a  bucket  and
   stopwatch.  The airlift return  pumps  plugged completely  in  less than  2
   hours because, as the sludge thickened due  to reduced  flow,  the specific
   gravity increased.   The air rate  that produced  the  desired  flow with
   thinner  sludge  was  no  longer  adequate.    The  flow  was  reset  to  100
   percent  by   increasing  the  airflow  substantially  above  the  previous
   setting.   An  hour  later   the  return  flow rate was  measured as  220
   percent.  Because the pumping rate affects  specific gravity  and specific
   gravity, in  turn, affects  the  pumping  rate, a  "snowballing"  effect was
   produced when the airlift pump  was  changed in either direction.   These
   results supported the operator's contention that return flow rates could
   not be controlled at reasonable levels.

   The air supply was again adjusted to  provide a flow rate halfway between
   the current  and  the  desired rate.  This setting  allowed  better control
   to  be  exercised  but   plugging   still  occurred  with  existing  sludge
   characteristics at return  sludge  flows of less than  about  125 percent.
   It  was  concluded that  this  was  the  practical lower  limit  for return
   sludge  flow  rate   control  with  the   existing   facilities  and  sludge
   character.  To maintain a return  sludge in the range  of 125-150 percent
   required fr.equent checking, including  an evening  check  not  before asked
   of  the operator.   In this manner, part -  but  not  all  -  of  the design
   limitation could be overcome with increased operator attention.

The areas in a  POTW that frequently  require  field investigations to determine
process flexibility are:

     1. Suspended Growth Systems

        - Control  of return sludge  flow rate  within the  ranges presented
          in Table 3-5

        - Control   of  aeration  basin DO  within  the ranges  presented  in
          Figure 3-1
                                      48

-------
   - Sludge  mass  control   by  wasting   expected   sludge   production
     presented  in  Table  3-7,  and  actual  waste  concentrations or
     representative waste  concentrations  shown  in  Table  3-8

   - Flow splitting to prevent  unnecessary overloading  of  individual
     process units
                           1 i
   - Available  mode changes  to  provide  maximum  use  of  existing
     facilities:

     o Contact  stabilization  when  the  final  clarifier  appears to be
       the most limiting process

     o Plug flow when oxygen transfer  is  marginal

2.  Trickling Filters        ;

   - Alternate disposal  methods  for anaerobic digester supernatant

   - Ability  to  lower  sludge levels  in  clarifiers without  thinning
     out  sludge to  concentrations that would  cause  sludge treatment
     or handling problems

   - Recirculation   to the  filter without  excess  hydraulic  loads on
     the primary -or secondary clarifiers

3.  RBCs                     i

   - Alternate disposal  methods for anaerobic digester supernatant

   - Ability  to lower sludge levels  in  clarifiers  without  thinning
     out  sludge  to  concentrations  that  would  cause  sludge treatment
     or handling problems   :

   - Ability  to redistribute  individual   stage  loadings   to  provide
     unit loadings  within the ranges shown in Table 3-13
                           i i
4.  ABFs                     !

   - Control  of return  sludge  flow rates within 50-100   percent of
     influent flow          !

   - Ability  to waste a precise mass of sludge on a daily  basis

   - Ability  to  spread  a  day's  sVudge wasting  over a 24-hour period,
     or at least an extended period of time
                            i
   - Ability  to provide recirculation directly around the  biocell

   - Ability  to maintain aeration basin DO at 2-3 mg/1
                                 49

-------
     3.5.3  Operation Factors
Significant performance-limiting  factors  often exist  in  the  process  control
activities of  POTW  unit processes (4) (11).  The  approach  and  methods  used in
maintaining process control can significantly affect the performance of plants
that  have  adequate physical  facilities.   This  section provides  guidance to
evaluators for  identification  and prioritization  of operational  factors  that
limit plant performance.

The evaluator  starts collecting  data for the  process control  evaluation by
identifying the key POTW  person for  process  control  strategies implemented at
the plant.  The plant  tour and data-gathering  phases also  provide opportunity
to  assess  the  process  control applied.   In  addition, the   process  control
capability of  an  operator can be  subjectively  assessed  during  the  process
capacity evaluation.  If an operator recognizes the unit process functions arid
their relative influence on plant performance,  a good grasp of process  control
is indicated.   An approach to  evaluating process control  is discussed  in the
following sections.
         3.5.3.1  Suspended Growth Facility Process Control
The process  controls  that should be available  to  an  operator of an activated
sludge  facility are:  sludge mass  control,  aeration  basin  DO control,  and
return  sludge rate control.    Techniques  and  approaches  to  improving  these
controls are presented in Chapter 5.
            a.  Sludge Mass Control
The activated  sludge  process removes colloidal  and dissolved organic  matter
from  wastewater resulting  in  a  net  increase  in  the  sludge  solids in  the
system.  Control of the  amount  of sludge maintained in  the  system  by wasting
(removing) excess  sludge is a  key  element in controlling  plant  performance.
All variations of the activated sludge process require sludge mass control  and
periodic wasting.   In  line with this  requirement, an  operator  who  properly
understands activated sludge mass control should be able to show the evaluator
a  recorded  history of  a controlled sludge mass,  e.g., records  of mean  cell
residence time  (MCRT),  mixed liquor volatile suspended  solids  (MLVSS),  plots
of aeration tank concentration  in the  aeration  basin,  total  mass  of sludge in
the pi ant, etc.

The following  are  common indicators that  sludge  mass  control is  not applied
adequately at an activated sludge plant:

     - A  sludge mass  indicator  parameter or  calculation  (MLVSS,  MCRT,
       total  sludge units)  is not run on  a  routine basis  (12).   Routine
       would  be daily for  an 8,000 nr/d  (2  mgd)  or  larger plant and  3
       times a week for a 400 nr/d (0.1 mgd)  plant.
                                      50

-------
       Only  a   settled   sludge;  test   is   used  to  determine   wasting
       requirements, e.g.,  waste, if  the  30-minute settled sludge volume  in
       a graduated cylinder is greater than  600 mg/1.

       The operator  does not  relate mass  control  to control  of  sludge
       settling  characteristics  and  sludge  removal   performance,  i.e.,
       sludge character.         !
       Significantly  less  mass  is  wasted   than   produced;
       clarifiers lose solids ov£r the weirs routinely.
              i.e.,  the
       Poor  performance  persists  and  the  mass  of  sludge  maintained
       provides an MCRT significantly out of the ranges  in  Table  3-21.
                                !  TABLE 3-21

                       TYPICAL MEAN CELL RESIDENCE TIMES
                          FOR SUSPENDED GROWTH POTWs
                Process Type
               Conventional  Aeration
               Extended Aeration
               Contact Stabilization
Typical MCRT
    days

    6-12
   20-40
   10-30
            b.  Aeration Basin D(3 Control
The aeration basin DO level  is ai significant factor in promoting the growth  of
either filamentous or zoogleal-type sludge organisms (13).   Higher DO tends  to
speed up or slow  down  the  relative populations of these major  organism  types
toward  primarily  zoogleal.    Conversely, lower  DO encourages  the  growth  of
filamentous organisms and a bulky, slow settling sludge.
                                i
A general guideline for relating' sludge characteristics to  DO concentration  in
an aeration basin is presented iji Figure 3-1.   This information can be used  to
evaluate the DO control approach1 at the POTW under study.
                                      51

-------
                               FIGURE  3-1

               EFFECT OF AERATION  BASIN 00 'CONCENTRATIONS
                   ON SLUDGE SETTLING  CHARACTERISTICS
    4 -]
    3 -
8  2
3
m
    1 -
      0
                       Tendency To Increase
                       Sludge Settling Rate
                                              Tendency To Decrease
                                              Sludge Settling Rate
10
20        30       40       50

  Oxygen Uptake Rate, mg/l/hr
60
70
                                   52

-------
The  following  are  common  indicators that  aeration basin  DO  control  is  not
applied adequately at an activated! sludge plant:

     - DO testing  is  not run on  the aeration  basin  on  a  routine  basis.
       Routine  ranges  from  daily' for  an 8,000  nr/d (2  mgd) or  larger
       plant to weekly for a 400 m3/d (0.1 mgd) plant.

     - The operator does not understand or use the relationship between DO
       and sludge character; i.e.,' sludge settling  is  very slow and DO is
       very low, or sludge  settling  is very  fast,  effluent is  turbid, and
       DO is very high.
            c.  Return Sludge Control
The  objective  of  return  sludge  control  is  to  optimize  sludge  distribution
between  the  aerator  and  secondary  clarifier  to  achieve  and maintain  good
sludge  character.    The  anoxic  condition  of  the  sludge  in  the  secondary
clarifiers is  usually not  conducive  .to  producing  desired  sludge  character.
Thus, return  sludge flow rate  control  should be used  to  maximize  the sludge
mass and sludge detention time  in jthe  aeration  basins  and minimize  the sludge
mass and sludge detention time  in jthe clarifiers.

The  following  are common indicators  that return sludge  flow  rate  control  ^s_
not adequately applied at an activ;ated. sludge plant:
     - Returns  are  operated  outside  the   ranges
       indicated in Table 3-5 and Figure 3-2.
(especially  higher)
     -The  operator believes that  a high  sludge  blanket condition  in  a
       final  clarifier can  categorically  be  improved  by  increasing  the
       sludge return rate.

     - MLSS concentrations fluctuate widely on a diurnal basis, but return
       rates  are  not adjusted throughout  the  day  to account  for diurnal
       flow variations.           ]    .
                                  i
     - The  operator has not  devised  a  method to  estimate  or measure the
       return sludge flow rate if measurement  was  not provided for in the
       original design.

     -The  operator does  not realize  that increasing the  return sludge
       flow rate  increases  the  so(lids loading to  the final  clarifier and
       decreases the settling time in the  final clarifier.


         3.5.3.2  Fixed Film Facility Process Control


There is a  lesser  amount  of process control that can be applied to fixed film
facilities  than  to  suspended growjth facilities.   However,  because fixed film
                                      53

-------
                             FIGURE 3-2


                  TYPICAL RETURN SLUDGE FLOW RATES
            WITH VARIOUS CLARIFIER SURFACE OVERFLOW RATES
CD
t3

I
•«-*
CO
CO
CD
O>
TJ
•a
Q)
•*-*
c.

I
DC
    180 -
    160 -
140 _
    120 -
CD
§  100
Q.
     80 -
    60
     40 -
 20 -
      0
                     High Return Range
                   (Poor Process Control)
                         Normal
                    Operating Range
                               i
                              20
                                   i
                                  24
 i
32
8      12     16      20     24     28      32     36


    Secondary Clarifier Surface Overflow Rate,  m3/m2/d
 i
40
                                54

-------
facility performance is so dependent on media  loading,  process control,  which
may at  first seem  unimportant,  ;can make  a significant  difference in  plant
performance.   The  following are(common  indicators that  process  control  at a
fixed film facility is not optimum.(1)(4):

     - Sludge blankets  in  either the  primary or  secondary  clarifiers  are
       maintained at a high level, i.e.,  >0.3 m (1 ft).

     - Organic loads from return process streams are not minimized despite
       poor plant performance.   \

     - Lack of good maintenance,|indicated by:

       o Distributors   on   trickling   filters   are   plugged,  or   leaky
         distributor seals are not fixed.

       o Filter  media   is  partially   plugged  and   measures   such   as
         chlorination, flooding, and recirculation are not used to address
         the problem.
       o Trickling  filter underdrain
         air vents are plugged.  ,
collector outlets  are submerged  or
       High recirculation, which  increases  primary  or secondary clarifier
       overflow   rates,   is   provided   without   regard   to   clarifier
       overloading.   Some trickling  filter plants  provide recirculation
       that  is directed  to  the  raw wet-well  and  must  pass  through the
       primary  clarifier  a secorid time  as  well as  the  trickling filter.
       Likewise,  some  trickling rfilters provide recirculation through the
       secondary  clarifier  sludge  return   to  the  head  of  the  plant.
       Recirculation provided by  these methods  should not be used.
     3.5.4  Maintenance Factors  ;
General  information  on POTW maintenance is  gathered  during the detailed data
collection  phase and  i's  recorded on  Form D-5.   However, the  evaluation  of
maintenance   performance-limiting  factors   is  done  throughout  the  CPE  by
observation   and   questioning  -concerning   the   reliability  and   service
requirements  of  pieces  of  equipment critical  to process control  and thus
performance.   -If these  units are out of service  routinely or  for  extended
periods  of  time,  maintenance  practices  may  be  a  direct  cause  of,  or a
significant contributing  cause to, a  performance  problem.   An adequate spare
parts  inventory,  to  prevent  undue  'delays  in   restoring  critical  process
functions  while  awaiting  arrival of parts  on order,  is  essential  to   the
conduct  of a  good maintenance  program.  Equipment breakdowns are often used as
excuses  for  process  control  problems.   For  example,  one  operator   of  an
activated  sludge  plant  blamed  jthe   repeated  loss of  sludge over  the  final
clarifier  weirs on  the  periodic; breakdown of  one  sludge return pump.   Even
with one pump out of service, the return sludge capacity  was over 200 percent
of  influent  flow.    The real  cause of the sludge loss  was inadequate process
                                      55

-------
control, including  inadequate
sludge flow rates.
sludge mass control  and excessively high return
Observation and documentation are necessary  portions of  the  approach  utilized
to evaluate emergency and preventive maintenance practices.  Important aspects
are examination and verification of  spare  parts  inventories  and  recordkeeping
systems.   An  example approach  to  a preventive maintenance  scheduling  system
that has been applied successfully at  several  plants is  presented  in  Appendix
6.   A good preventive  maintenance  program includes a  schedule  to distribute
the  workload  evenly.     Evaluation  of  these  items  provides
discussion  from  which  the  specific  results  of  maintenance,
maintenance,  of  the  unit  processes  can  be assessed.    This
illustrated by the following:
                                  a  basis  for
                                   or  lack  of
                                   approach  is
   A  poorly  performing  trickling  filter  plant  has  acceptable  organic
   loadings to  the  filter and very capable  secondary clarifiers,  but also
   has  a  large  buildup  of  sludge  in  both  the  primary  and  secondary
   clarifiers.  The excessive amount  of  sludge  in  the  clarifiers indicates
   that inadequate process control by the operator might be contributing to
   poor plant  performance.   However, if sludge is not  removed  adequately
   because  the  heated anaerobic  digesters  are  upset  every time  that more
   than a normal amount of sludge is added, a digester operation or loading
   problem  could  be  suspected.    Further  investigation revealed  that the
   boiler is  being  operated  manually and  just  during  the day  because the
   operator had tried unsuccessfully  to  fix the automatic  controls.   Thus,
   inadequate maintenance is in fact a cause of poor plant performance.

The  above  discussion  illustrates  how  a  maintenance-related  problem  can
initially be  identified  as something else  and  requires  careful  evaluation to
identify the  true  cause  of poor  plant  performance.   Often,  investigation of
maintenance  scheduling   records,  work  order  procedures,  and  spare  parts
inventories provides  an  adequate  assessment of maintenance problems  limiting
performance.   The  evaluator must, therefore, evaluate maintenance during  all
phases of the CPE and should not  expect  to  identify these  factors  solely in a
formal evaluation of maintenance procedures.
3.6  Performance Evaluation
The   plant  performance   evaluation   is  directed   toward  two   goals:   1)
establishing, or verifying, the magnitude of a POTW's performance problem; and
2)  projecting  the  level  of improved  treatment  that can  be expected  as  the
result of implementing a CCP.
     3.6.1  Magnitude of the Performance Problem
During  the  CPE, the  evaluator  should  develop  a clear  understanding of  the
performance problem associated with the subject POTW.  As a first step of this
assessment, recorded historical  performance data can be  used.   These  data are
                                      56

-------
available from copies of NPDES permit  reports  in  small  POTWs and from monthly
monitoring summary sheets in larger POTWs.

Once historical data are reviewedi the evaluator  should  attempt  to  verify the
accuracy of  the  reported plant  performance.   It should be  stressed  that the
purpose is not to blame the individual responsible,  but rather to assist in
identifying and substantiating the; true cause(s)  of poor plant performance.

The  evaluator can indirectly  collect  data to  establish authenticity of the
monitoring results throughout the;CPE.  For example,  major  unit  processes are
assessed for  their capability to; achieve desired performance.  If a POTW is
rated a Type  3 plant (inadequate major process capability),  recorded excellent
effluent quality  should be  suspect.   If recorded performance  is  consistent
with the results  of  the overall  evaluation.,  the validity and  accuracy of the
data are  reinforced.   Limitations  of  these  comparisons are their  subjective
nature.                           !

Fortunately,   recorded   monitoring   data  accurately   represent  the   true
performance in many  plants.   Small  activated  sludge plants  have been shown to
have the most variance  between historical  records and actual performance.

In  small activated sludge  pi ants i-  such  as  package  extended  aeration plants
and  contact stabilization plants and oxidation ditches - several  days' or even
an entire week's  sludge production^ can be lost as the result of sludge bulking
in  a single  afternoon.   Effluent SS may be less than 10 mg/1 before  and  after
bulking occurs,  but may reach 1,000-2,000 mg/1  while bulking.  Yet  there is
sufficient time between bulking periods to collect more than enough samples to
meet permit  monitoring  requirements and  show  a  good effluent quality.   This
situation is  frequently revealed during the evaluation of major unit  processes
when expected sludge production  is compared  to  actual  sludge wasted or when
bulking is actually  observed durirtg the CPE.

Another  sampling  procedure  that  can result in nonrepresentative monitoring is
sometimes   seen   in   fixed   film   facilities  where   performance  degrades
significantly during peak daytime loads.   Samples collected from 6 a.m.  to 10
a.m. may meet the required compositing criteria (e.g., three samples  at 2-hour
increments"), but would probably indicate better than overall  average effluent
quality.  Likewise,  samples collected  from Noon to  4 p.m.  may indicate  worse
than actual  average  effluent quality.

Occasionally, errors in laboratory  procedures  will  cause a  discrepancy between
reported  and actual  effluent  quality.    A  quick  review by  an   evaluator
experienced   in laboratory  procedures  may identify  a problem and  assist the
analyst as well as provide the evaluator  insight into what  the true analytical
results  should be.  Major  test  parameters critical  for completion of the CPE
are  influent BOOs and  flow.   The  evaluator  can roughly check  both  BODs and
flow data by calculating a  per capita  BOD5  contribution.   Per  capita  BOD5
contributions are usually  0.07-OJ09 kg (0.15-0.20  lb)/d  for typical  domestic
wastewater.    When estimating  BODs loads to  a plant without  actual  data, or
checking  reasonableness  of   existing  plant  data,  loads  from   significant
industrial contributors must be  abided  to  the calculated per capita  loads.
                                       57

-------
     3.6.2  Projected Improved Performance with a CCP
The plant  performance  that  is achievable through  implementation  of a CCP  is
initially estimated by evaluating the capability of major  unit  processes.   If
major unit processes are deficient  in capacity,  secondary  treatment cannot  be
achieved  with a  CCP  and  the existing  POTW  is  incapable  of  achieving the
desired performance; i.e.,  it is  a Type  3 plant.

If the evaluation of major  unit processes shows that the major facilities  have
adequate  capacity,  the CCP approach is  applicable and can likely  be  used  to
achieve improved POTW performance; i.e.,  it is a Type 1 or Type 2 plant.  For
plants of this type, all other performance-limiting  factors  are considered  as
possible to correct with adequate training of  the  appropriate POTW  personnel.
The training  is addressed  toward the  operational  staff for improvements  in
plant  process control  and  maintenance;   toward  the  POTW  administration for
improvements  in  administrative  policies  and  budget  limitations;   and  toward
both  operators  and  administrators  to   achieve  minor  design  modifications.
"Training" as used in this  context describes  activities whereby  information  is
provided to facilitate understanding and encourage implementation of  the CCP
approach.

Once  the  plant's major unit  process capability  has been  established  and the
performance-limiting  factors  have  been  identified   and   prioritized,  the
evaluator  is  in  a position  to assess  the potential  for improved performance
with  implementation of a CCP.  During, this effort, the  evaluator must assess
the   practicability  and  potential   time  frame  necessary  to   address  each
identified factor.  Additionally, it is  necessary to project  levels  of effort,
activities, time frame, and  costs associated with  the  CCP  implementation.   On
occasion,  for  Type  1  and  Type  2 plants,  the  approach  to   addressing   a
performance-limiting  factor  may  be  so  unreasonable  as  to   discourage   a
recommendation to implement a CCP;  i.e.,  the number  and/or magnitude of minor
modifications exceeds the POTW's  funding  capability.
3.7  Presentation to POTW Administrators and Staff
Once the  evaluator  has  completed the fieldwork for  the CPE, a  meeting  should
be held with the POTW administrators and staff.   A presentation  of preliminary
CPE results should include brief descriptions of the following:

     - Evaluation of major unit processes (Type  1, 2, or 3)
     - Prioritized performance-limiting factors
     - Performance potential  with a CCP

If  a  CCP  appears   warranted,   the  evaluator  should  discuss   the  specific
performance-limiting  factors  that  the CCP  will   address  and   ask  for  local
officials'  support  on  how the  identified  factors  can be  eliminated.    The
attitude of the staff is critical  to the  success of the CCP, particularly  in
borderline cases where the evaluator feels a CCP can definitely  help.but  where
process control has to be precise  and requires full  cooperation  from  the POTW
                                      58

-------
operating staff.   If  the staff is not  behind  the CCP approach, the CCP  will
take longer, require more qualified  leadership,  and may have to  include  some
POTW personnel  changes  to be  successful.   The administrators  should  realize
these requirements before deciding on a course  of action.
                                  i
In general , it is desirable to present  all  findings  at  the  meeting  with local
officials.   This approach eliminates surprises  when the CPE  report is received
and  begins  the  cooperative approach  necessary  for implementing  a CCP.  In
situations where administrative or; staff factors are difficult to present, the
evaluator must  use  good judgment ;in presenting  the results.   Throughout the
discussions,  the  evaluator must  (remember  that the  purpose of  the  CPE  is to
identify and  describe facts to be, used to  improve  the  current  situation, not
to place blame for any past or current problems.

It  should  be made  clear that, dijring  conduct  of the CCP,   other  factors are
often  identified  and must  be  addressed to achieve the  desired performance.
The  CCP  approach  targets plant performance as  the  end point, and any factors
that  interfere  with achieving  this  goal must  be addressed  whether  they  were
identified during the CPE or not.  This understanding is often missed by local
officials, and efforts may  be  developed to  address only the items prioritized
during the  CPE.   The evaluator  should  stress  that a local  commitment must be
made  to  achieving  the  desired  -improved   performance,  not  to addressing  a
"laundry list" of currently identified  problems.


3.8  CPE Report                   j


The   objective  of  a  CPE  report   is  to  summarize   the   CPE  findings  and
conclusions.   It is particularly important that  the report  be  kept brief so
that the maximum amount of resources  are  used for  the evaluation rather  than
for  preparing  an  all-inclusive! report.    The  report  should present  the
important  CPE conclusions necessary to allow  the decisionmaking officials to
progress  toward achieving desired performance  from their  facility.   Eight to
twelve typed pages  are generally isufficient for the text of a  CPE report.  An
example  CPE  report  is presented  in Appendix C.  Typical contents are:
                                  i
      - Introduction              j
      - Facility background
      - Major unit process evaluation
      - Performance-limiting factors
      - Projected  impact of  a CCP i
      - CCP costs                 '

The CPE  report  should  be  distributed' to  POTW  administrators  and key  plant
personnel,  as a  minimum.   Further  distribution  of the report,  e.g.,  to the
design engineer  or regulatory agencies, depends  on the. circumstances of the
CPE but should  be done  at the  ;direction, or  with the awareness, of  local
administrators.                  ,
                                       59

-------
     3.8.1  Introduction
The  introduction  of the CPE  report  should be brief  and cover the  following
topics:

     - Reason(s) for the CPE
     - Objectives of the CPE
     - Plant effluent performance requirements


     3.8.2  Facility Background


This section should include general information about the POTW that will  serve
as  the  reference  basis for  the  remainder of  the  report.    The  following
information should be included as a minimum:

     - POTW description (oxidation ditch, RBC,  etc.)
     - Design and current flows
     - Age of plant and dates of upgrades
     - Service population
     - Significant industrial  wastes
     - Significant infiltration/inflow
     - Unit process and/or flow diagram
     - Staff number and plant coverage


     3.8.3  Major Unit Process Evaluation


This section should include a description of the plant type (Type  1,  2,  or  3)
and  a  summary  of  data sources for calculating current loading.   For example,
"current  loadings  were   calculated   using  plant  laboratory   results  for
concentrations and plant flow records lowered by  10 percent to adjust for high
calibration of flow recording equipment."

Results  should  be  presented for each  major unit process  (aerator,  secondary
clarifier, sludge  handling  capability).   The evaluator may choose  to  present
capacities of other unit  processes if these data  are pertinent  to  assessing
the POTW's treatment capability.


     3.8.4  Performance-Limiting  Factors


Factors  limiting  performance  that were  identified during  the  CPE should  be
listed.   Generally, the  more serious  factors  (those  receiving   "A"  or "B"
ratings)  are  listed in order  of priority  and short, two- or  three-sentence
explanations of each are included.
                                      60

-------
     3.8.5  Projected Impact of a
The expected impact of  a  CCP on
reference  to  treatment  requirements
reduction  in  energy  consumption
indicated.
     CCP
     plant performance is  discussed  briefly with
              Any  additional   benefits,  such  as
        improved  safety,   etc.,  should  also  be
     3.8.6  CCP Costs
Costs  associated  with a  CCP  should be  projected  as accurately as  possible.
Ranges  of costs  can  be   used  if  an   evaluator does  not  feel   comfortable
projecting specific  dollar  amounts.   Each cost  projected  should be  indicated
as a "one-time" or "annual" cost.I  Costs for a CCP  facilitator (consultant)  or
for a  piping modification  are examples  of "one-time"  costs.   Increased sludge
handling and electrical or chemical  costs are examples of "annual"  costs.
                                 i
                                 i
3.9  Example CPE                 I


A  4,500  m3/d  (1.2  mgd)   oxidation  ditch   serves  a  primarily  residential
community with a population of 8,500.   The wastewater is mainly domestic.   The
city  council  was  notified by  the  State  health department  that  a  district
engineer's field  inspection report  has confirmed data  provided  in  the city's
self-monitoring reports that improved POTW performance is required  to meet the
city's  NPDES  permit  requirements  of  30 mg/1  (30-day  maximum)  for  BODs  and
TSS.                             i
                                 i
After  researching  several  alternatives,  the  public  works  director  recommended
to  the city  council that a CPE be  conducted to determine the causes of their
performance problem  and provide Direction in selecting  corrective  actions.   A
consultant who  specializes  in conducting CPEs and  CCPs  was subsequently hired
to conduct the CPE.              I
       * 9.1  PI ant Data
 A  flow diagram is  presented  in  Figure  3-3.   The following data were extracted
 from  the completed data collection forms as presented in Appendix D.
DESIGN DATA

Design Flow:

Hydraulic  Capacity:

Organic  Loading:
4,500 m3/d (1.2 mgd)

11,300 m3/d (3.0 mgd)

900 l|g (2,000 Ib) BOD5/d
900 kg (2,000 Ib) TSS/d
                                      61

-------
                     FIGURE 3-3

       FLOW DIAGRAM OF POTW  IN  EXAMPLE CPE


   Raw Wastewater
       Mechanical Bar
          Screen
         Aerated Grit
          Chamber
Waste
                  Return
                           Aerobic
                           Digester
                                             Sludge Drying Beds
        Oxidation
          Ditch
   V-Notch
     Weir
                                    C)   OO
                          Sludge
                          Pumps
                                            Dewatered Sludge
                                            Haul to Landfill
T
          Chlorine
          Contact
                         62

-------
Preliminary Treatment:

Flow Measurement:


Oxidation Ditch:




Final Clarifiers:
Disinfection:
Sludge Return:
 Aerobic  Digester:
 Sludge Drying  Beds:
 CURRENT LOADING

 Flow:

 Influent BOD5:

 Influent TSS:
Mechanical Bar Screen, Aerated Grit Chamber

Parshall Flume, Sonic Level Sensor, Strip Chart
Recorder

Volume: - 4,500 m3 (160,000 cu ft)
02 Transfer - 1,800 kg (4,000 lb)/d
  @ 36° C (100° F) with 2.0 mg/1 residual
  DO brush rotors

Number of Clarifiers - 2
Diameter - 10.7 m (35.0 ft)
Area -i 90 nf  (962 sq ft) each
Sidewajter Depth - 2.7 m (9.0 ft)
Center Depth  - 3.1 m (10.5 ft)
Center Feed and Peripheral Weirs

Numberj of Chlorinators - 2
Capacity  - 113 kg (250 lb)/d each
Contact Basin - 142 m3 (37,500  gal)

Clarifier Scraper to Center Hopper
Number of Vortex  Pumps -2
Flow Control  - 1.9-5.7 m6  (500-1,500 gal)/min
Measurement - 90° V-notch  Weir  w/o Recording
Sampling  - Manual @ Weir

Volume  - 680  m3  (180,000 gal)
Sludge  Removal -  Bottom Pipe to Drying  Beds
Supernatant Removal - Mulipie-port Drawoff to
  Oxidation Ditch

Number  of Beds -  8
Size f  15.2 m x 45.0 m  (50 ft x 150  ft)
Dried; Sludge  Buried to 0.5 m  (1.5  ft)
Summer  Drying Time -  3 weeks
Winter  Drying Eliminated December-March
Subnatant Returned to  Head of Plant
            (0.95 mgd)

 190 mg/1  or 680 kg (1,500 lb)/d
      i

 205 mg/1  or 740 kg (1,600 lb)/d
                                       63

-------
     3.9.2  Major Unit Process Evaluation

AERATOR
Hydraulic Detention Time:  [(160,000 cu ft x 7.5)7(950,000 gpd)]  x 24  =30  hr
                       From Table 3-2, Score = 10 points
Organic Loading: [(1,500 lb/d)/(160,000 cu ft)] x 1,000 = 9.4  lb/d/1,000  cu ft
                       From Table 3-2. Score = 10 points
Oxygen Availability:   (4,000 Ib 02/d)/(1,500 kg BOD5/d)
                      = 2.6 Ib Oa/lb BOD5
                       From Table 3-2, Score = 10 points
                  Aerator Subtotals 10 + 10 + 10 =  30 points

SECONDARY CLARIFIER
Configuration:  Circular with Weirs  on Wall
                       From Table 3-4, Score = 7 points
Surface Overflow Rate:   (950,000 gpd)/(1924 sq ft) = 494 gpd/sq ft
                       From Table 3-4, Score = 10 points
Depth at Weirs:  9.0 ft
                       From Table 3-4, Score = -3 points
Return Sludge Removal:   Scraped to Center Hopper
                       From Table 3-4, Score = 8 points
Return SIudge Control:
 From Table 3-5, Typical  Range is 50-100% of Raw Wastewater  Flow.
 Desired Range = (50%  x 0.95 mgd) to (100% x 0.95 mgd)
               = 0.47-0.95 mgd
 Actual  Range  = (500  gpm x 1,440 x  10-6) to (1,500  gpm x 1,440 x  10~6)
               = 0.72-2.16 mgd
 Actual  Return Sludge  Control  is 50% (0.72 to 0.95 mgd)  of Desired  Range.

-------
 Return Sludge Measurement Provided.
                       From Table 3-4,  Score = 5  points
                                 [
         Secondary Clarifier Subtotal  = 7  + 10 -  3 + 8 + 5  =  27  points

SLUDGE HANDLING CAPABILITY
Controllability:  Waste Volume Manually Calculated
                  Waste Stream Manually Sampled
                       From Table 3-6,  Score = 2  points
                                 i
Capacity:                        i
 a.  Expected Sludge Production . j
     Unit Sludge Production, From Table 3-7:  0.65 Ib TSS/lb  BOD5  removed
     BOD5 Removed = (Influent 6005 - Effluent BOD5 Achievable*)  x  Flow
                    = (190 mg/1 -i 15 mg/1) x (0.95 mgd)  x (8.34)
                    = 1,385 Ib/d!
     Expected Sludge Mass = (0.65 Ib TSS/lb BOD5) x (1,385  Ib BOD5/d)
                          = 900 Ib TSS/d
     Expected Sludge Concentration, From Table 3-8:  7,500  .mg/1
     Expected Sludge Volume = (900 lb/d)/(7,500 mg/1 x 8.34 x 10'6)
                            = 14,400 gpd
 b.  Percentage of Expected Sludge Production Each Process  Can Handle
     1.  Aerobic Digester
         From Table 3-9, standard for evaluating  aerobic digesters is a
         hydraulic detention time of 15 days.
         Sludge Volume Existing Digester Can Handle = (180,000 gal)/{15  days)
                                                    = 12,000  gpd
         Percentage of Expected Sludge Production = (12,000 gpd)/(14,4000  gpd)
                                                  = 83 percent
*Assumed value for a well  operated oxidation ditch facility.
                                      65

-------
2.  Drying Beds

    From Table 3-9, the standard for evaluating drying beds is the worst
    season turnover time as demonstrated by past experience.
    Essentially, no drying is experienced from December through March so
    that beds operate only as storage during that period.   Storage volume
    required must first be calculated.

    Digester Hydraulic Detention Time = Digester Volume/Sludge Volume
                                  HOT = (180,000 gal)/(14,400 gpd)
                                      = 12 days

    From Table 3-10, for HOT = 12 days, total  solids reduction of 14% and
    output solids concentration of about 13,000 mg/1  is expected.

    Sludge to Drying Beds = (900 Ib TSS/d) x (1.00 - 0.14) = 774 Ib/d

    Sludge Volume = (774 lb/d)/(13sOOO mg/1 x 8.34 x 1Q-6) = 7,140 gpd

    Storage Capacity of Existing Beds = (8) x (50 ft x 150 ft x 1.5 ft)
                                      = 90,000 cu ft

    Storage Capacity Available = (90,000 cu ft x 7.5)/(7,140 gpd)
                               = 94 days

    Storage Capacity Required =  31 (December)
                                 31 (January)
                                 28 (February)
                                 30 (March)
                              = Hi: days

    Drying bed capacity is available for 8 months of the year, but only
    78% (94/121) of required storage capacity is available during the
    winter 4 months.

    Existing Drying Bed Adequacy = [(4/12) x (78)] + [(8/12) x (100)]
                                 = 26 + 67 = 93 percent

3.  Hauling

    From discussions with the POTW staff and administrators, "Hauling
    dried sludge is not a problem.   If we have to, we can  get the street
    crew down to the plant to help out."

    Hauling Adequacy = 100 percent

4.  Landfill

    From discussions with the POTW staff and administrators, "If we can
    get it through the beds, we can get rid of it at the landfill."

    Landfill Adequacy = 100 percent
                                 66

-------
From the capacity evaluation,  the aerobic  digester  is  the  "weakest  link"  at 83
percent capacity.   ,             ;

                       From Table 3-6,  Score =  3  points

            Sludge Handling Capability  Subtotal =2+3=5  points  ^

Scores for each major unit process are  presented  in Table  3-22.
                                i


                                |  TABLE 3-22

            SUSPENDED GROWTH MAJOR UNIT PROCESS CAPACITY EVALUATION
                                FOR EXAMPLE CPE
  Aeration Basin
  Secondary Clarifier
  Sludge Handling Capability

    Total
Points Scored

  !    30
  !    27
  !  '   5
  i    62
                                                  	Points Required
                                                  Type 1Type 2Type  3
13-30
25-55
10-30
0-12
0-24
0- 9
60-115    20-59
 <0
 <0
 <0

<20
The data  in  Table 3-22  indicate  that the  aerator,  secondary clarifier,  and
total   points scored  for the  example  POTW are  sufficient to  rate  a Type  1
plant.   However,  the points  scored  for sludge  handling  capability are  only
sufficient for a Type 2 rating, jherefore,  the overall  plant rating is  Type 2.
This rating  indicates that a CCP  is  generally  applicable  and  that improvement
in  plant  performance is  likely,1  but that  improvement in performance to  the
desired  level  without  any  upgrade  of  major  processes  cannot be  determined
until  a CCP is implemented.     \
     3.9.3  Performance-Limiting) Factors
The  following performance-limitijng factors were  identified  during  the  CPE  and
given rankings of "A" or "B."  Further ranking of these identified  factors  was
also completed as indicated by the number assigned to each factor.

  1. Operator Application of Concepts and Testing to Process Control  ("A")
                                I
     Less  sludge was  wasted  than was  produced  on  a  routine basis.   Excess
     sludge  periodically bulked!  from  the  final  clarifiers.   Mixed  liquor
     concentrations  were  monitored  routinely, but the  concept  of  controlling
     total sludge mass at a  desired  level  was not implemented.  Operation of
                                      67

-------
     return  sludge flow  rates  at excessively  high rates, typically  150-200
     percent of wastewater flow, contributed to solids loss.

  2. Sludge Wasting Capability ("B")

     An  undersized digester,  and  drying  beds  that do  not  provide  adequate
     sludge  disposal   capability  during  winter months  result in  inadequate
     sludge wasting capacity.

  3. Improper Technical Guidance ("B")

     The  above  process  control   and   inadequate   sludge  disposal   situation
     continued   despite   annual   plant   inspections  by  the   State  district
     engineer.   "Periodic solids  loss" was  given  the  same  emphasis in  the
     annual  inspection  reports  as  plant housekeeping,  timely submittal  of
     monitoring  reports,  leveling  and  cleaning of  clarifier weirs,  and  other
     items  far  removed  from  the  true  performance-limiting  problems  and
     potential solutions.

  4. Clarifier ("B")

     The final clarifiers have sidewater  depths of  only  2.7 m  (9.0  ft).   This
     shallow  depth promises loss  of sludge  solids and makes  precise  sludge
     mass and return control mandatory.

  5. Performance Monitoring ("B")

     Performance monitoring  samples  were collected only during periods  when
     clarifiers were not bulking sludge to conceal performance problems.

  6. Familiarity with Plant Needs ("B")

     Administrators were  not familiar enough with  the  plant  requirements for
     performance and operations  to recog'nize that  a performance problem  even
     existed.

  7. Process Controllability ("B")

     Oversized  return  activated  sludge  pumps  were  provided in  the  plant
     design.  This  promoted  poor  operation  with excessively  high  return  flows
     and would require a modification to  improve process control.
     3.9.4  Potential Impact of a CCP
The most  serious of the performance-limiting factors  identified  were process
control oriented.  The evaluation of major unit processes resulted in a Type 2
rating  because  of marginal,  but not  drastically deficient,  sludge handling
capability.   The  POTW  appears  to  be  a  good  candidate  for  a  CCP.    This
recommendation  should  be presented  to  the  city council.  Performance  of the
POTW can  be improved  with  a CCP.   Continual  compliance  will  depend  on  the
                                      68

-------
ability to  dispose  of adequate quantities of  waste  sludge.  Documentation of
improved performance may be  difficult because  existing monitoring data do not
reflect true past effluent quality:
3.10  CPE Results
The   success   of  conducting   CPE'  activities   can   be  measured   by  POTW
administrators  selecting  an approach  and  implementing  activities  to achieve
the  required  performance  from  their  wastewater treatment  facility.    If
definite followup activities are not initiated within a reasonable time frame,
the objectives of conducting a CPE 'cannot be achieved.
3.11  CPE Worksheets
Worksheets  that  can be used  for evaluating POTW  capability are presented in
Appendices L through 0.  These worksheets are used to evaluate the capacity of
existing major unit processes,  i.ej.,  aerator,  secondary clarifier, and sludge
handling system, and determine whether the POTW is a Type 1, Type 2, or Type 3
plant.                             :
3.12  References
When an NTIS number is cited in a rfeference, that reference is available from:

         National Technical Information Service
         5285 Port Royal Road      ;
         Springfield, VA 22161     j
         (703) 487-4650            j

 1.  Hegg9  B. A., K.  L.  Rakness,  and J.  R. Schultz.   Evaluation of Operation
     and Maintenance Factors  Limi'ting Municipal  Wastewater  Treatment Plant
     Performance.   EPA-600/2-79-034, NTIS  No.  PB-300331,  U.S.  Environmental
     Protection   Agency,   Municipal   Environmental   Research   Laboratory,
     Cincinnati, OH, 1979.

 2.  Gray,  A. C., Jr., P. E. Paul, and H.  D. Roberts.  Evaluation of Operation
     and Maintenance Factors  Limiting  Biological  Wastewater  Treatment Plant
     Performance.   EPA-600/2-79-08;7, NTIS  No.  PB-297491,  U.S.  Environmental
     Protection   Agency,   Municipal   Environmental   Research   Laboratory,
     Cincinnati, OH, 1979.        J

 3.  Hegg,  B. A., K.  L.  Rakness,  afid J.  R. Schultz.   A  Demonstrated Approach
     for  Improving  Performance  and  Reliability  of  Biological  Wastewater
     Treatment   Plants.      EPA-600/2-79-035,   NTIS  No.   PB-300476,   U.S.
     Environmental   Protection  Agency,   Municipal    Environmental   Research
     Laboratory, Cincinnati, OH, 1979.
                                      69

-------
 4.
 5.
Hegg, B. A., K.  L.  Rakness,  J.  R.  Schultz, and L. D. Demers.  Evaluation
of  Operation  and  Maintenance  Factors  Limiting  Municipal  Wastewater
Treatment  Plant  Performance -  Phase  II.    EPA-600/2-80-129,  NTIS  No.
PB-81-112864,    U.S.    Environmental    Protection    Agency,   Municipal
Environmental Research Laboratory, Cincinnati, OH, 1980.
Schultz,  J.  R.,   B.  A.  Hegg,
Production for Activated Sludge
54(10):1355-1360,  1982.
 and K.  L.  Rakness.
Plants Without Primary
 Realistic  Sludge
Clarifiers.  JWPCF
 6.   Process Design Manual, Wastewater  Treatment Facilities for Sewered Small
     Communities.    EPA-625/I-77-009.    U.S.  Environmental   Protection  Agency,
     Center for Environmental  Research Information, Cincinnati, OH, 1977.

 7.   Brenner, R.  C.,  J.  A. Heidman,  E. J.  Opatken,  and A. C.  Petrasek,  Jr.
     Design Information on Rotating Biological  Contactors.   EPA-600/2-84-106,
     NTIS  No.  PB-84-199561,  U.S.  Environmental Protection  Agency,  Municipal
     Environmental Research Laboratory,  Cincinnati, OH, 1984.

 8.   Rakness, K.  L.,   J.  R.  Schultz,  B.   A.  Hegg, "J.  C.   Cranor,  and  R.  A.
     Nisbet.    Full  Scale  Evaluation  of  Activated  Bio-Filter  Wastewater
     Treatment  Process.     EPA  600/2-82-057,  NTIS  No.  PB-82-227505,  U.S.
     Environmental  Protection  Agency,   Municipal    Environmental   Research
     Laboratory, Cincinnati,  OH, 1982.

 9.   A Guide to the Selection  of  Cost-Effective Wastewater Treatment Systems.
     EPA-430/9-75-002,   NTIS    Report  No.   PB-244417,   U.S.   Environmental
     Protection Agency,  Office of Water  Program  Operations,  Washington,  DC,
     1975.

10.   Process Design Manual, Sludge Treatment and Disposal.  EPA-625/1-79-011,
     U.S.  Environmental  Protection Agency, Center  for Environmental  Research
     Information, Cincinnati, OH,  1979.

11.   Schultz, J. R.  Activated Sludge - Troubleshooting Techniques.  Presented
     at Rocky Mountain Water and  Wastewater  Plant Operator's School,  Boulder,
     CO, 1983.

12.   West,  A.  W.   Operational  Control  Procedures  for the Activated  Sludge
     Process - Part IIIA, Calculation Procedures.  EPA-330/9-74-001C, NTIS No.
     PB-231598, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Cincinnati, OH, 1973.

13.   Palm,  J.  C.,  D.  Jenkins, and  D.  S. Parker.   The  Relationship Betv/een
     Organic Loading,  Dissolved Oxygen Concentration, and Sludge Settleability
     in the Completely-Mixed Activated  Sludge Process.  Presented at the 51st
     Annual  Conference,   Water  Pollution  Control  Federation,  Anaheim,  CA,
     1978.
                                      70

-------
                                   CHAPTER 4

             APPROACH TO CONDUCTING COMPOSITE CORRECTION PROGRAMS
4.1  Objective
The overall  objective  of a Composite  Correction  Program (CCP) is to  improve
the performance of  an  existing POTW (1).   If  the  results of a  Comprehensive
Performance  Evaluation  (CPE)  indicate  a POTW  is a  Type 1 plant (see  Figure
2-1),  then  the  existing major  ^init  processes  have  been  determined  to  be
adequate to  meet  current treatment requirements.   For Type  1  facilities,  the
CCP  focuses on  systematically  eliminating performance-limiting  factors  to
achieve  the desired effluent  quality.   This  can be  done without  long-term
planning or major plant modifications (2).
                                 i
For Type 2  plants, the  existing  major unit processes have been  determined
be marginal  but improved performance  is  likely  through the  use of a  CCP  and
the POTW may meet  performance  objectives  without a major plant  upgrade.   For
these  plants,  the  CCP focuses on  clearly defining the  optimum  capability  of
existing facilities.            . i
                                                                           to
                                                                          and
                                                                          For
A  factor that  influences the  conduct  of  a  CCP at  Type  2 plants  is  the
projected future growth in the service area.  In an area with little projected
growth,  there is generally more  incentive to  make existing facilities  perform
adequately  to meet  long-term needs.    Also,  implementation  time  is  not  as
important in low- or no-growth areas.  A CCP of 12 months'  duration  that leads
to  long-term  adequate  performance with   existing  facilities is generally well
worth the time.  Even if
and some construction is
any such construction is
                         the CCP does  not achieve  the  desired effluent quality
                         indicated,  plant administrators  can be  confident  that
                         indeed necessary.
 In  a growth  situation,  implementation of  a CCP  for  a Type  2 plant  should
 closely  parallel   analysis  of  future treatment  needs.    The  POTW  should  be
 planning expansion while the  existing plant capability  is  being verified by a
 CCP.   This  parallel  effort will  allow  administrators to  make knowledgeable
 short-term decisions that will be compatible with long-term needs.
For Type 3  plants,  major construction is  indicated  and a more  comprehensive
study  is  warranted  rather  than ja CCP.
long-term needs, treatment alternatives,
mechanisms, and other factors beyond the
                                          A study  of this type would  look at
                                         potential location changes, financing
                                         scope of a CCP.
                                      71

-------
4.2  Methodol ogy
The methodology  for conducting a CCP  is a  combination  of implementation  of
activities that  support process requirements  and  systematic  training of  the
staff and administrators responsible for wastewater treatment  (2-4).
     4.2.1  CPE Results
The basis for  implementation  and  training  efforts is the prioritized list  of
performance-limiting factors  that was  developed  during  the CPE  (see  Section
2.2.3).  For example, if  all  of the prioritized  factors were  process  control
oriented (highly unlikely), the initial  CCP effort would  naturally be directed
toward operator training  in process control.  More commonly,  a combination  of
performance-limiting factors is identified during the CPE and a combination  of
implementation/training  activities  is  therefore  required.     In  addition,
performance-limiting factors  not  identified  in  a CPE  often  become  apparent
during conduct of the CCP and must be  addressed to  achieve the  desired  level
of treatment (3).
     4.2.2  Process Control Basis
The  areas in  which  performance-limiting  factors have  been broadly  grouped
(administration, design, operation, and maintenance)  are all  important in that
a  factor  in  any one  of these areas can individually cause  poor performance.
Although  no   one  area  is  more  important  than  any  other,  it  helps  when
implementing a CCP to understand the relationship of these areas to each other
and the the goal of achieving a good, economical  effluent.

Administration,  design,  and maintenance   activities  all  lead  to  a  plant
physically capable of achieving  desired  performance.   It is  the operation,  or
more specifically  the process control, that takes a physically capable plant
and produces adequately treated wastewater, as indicated by Figure 4-1.

A  CCP continually  focuses toward the  goal  of achieving  desired plant effluent
quality.   It  often   becomes  difficult to  prioritize  the changes needed  to
achieve  this  performance  level,  -due  to   the  typical  multiple  performance-
limiting  factors  that  exist.   However,  by  focusing  on the  needs  of  the
biological treatment  process, as established through  process control  efforts,
priorities for changes to achieve improved performance can be developed.

For  example,  if  good performance  in  an  extended  aeration   activated  sludge
plant cannot  be maintained  because bulky  sludge  has developed  as  a result of
inadequate oxygen  transfer capability, better performance requires meeting the
oxygen  .deficiency.   Limitations  in  meeting  process  needs (inadequate  DO)
establish the  need for design  changes.    The  plant must  be improved  to  the
point  where   it is capable  of  providing   an  adequate  level  of DO to  allow
desired performance to be achieved.
                                      72

-------
                      FIGURE 4-1

     RELATIONSHIP OF PERFORMANCE-LIMITING FACTORS
            TO ACHIEVING A PERFORMANCE GOAL
Administration
                   Goojd, Economical
                       i Effluent
                       |Operation
                    (Process Control)
                     Capable Plant
Design
Maintenance
                           73

-------
On  the  other  hand,  a  plant may  exhibit extensive  limitations in  grounds
maintenance  and housekeeping.   If  these limitations  do  not  interfere  with
meeting  the  needs of  the  biological   treatment  process,  low priority  for
addressing these limitations is indicated.

Figure 4-1 and  the  above  example illustrate  how the  process control  basis can
be   used   to   prioritize   improvements   in  physical   facilities.     Proposed
improvements must alleviate a deficiency  in the existing "incapable plant," as
identified  by process  requirements,  so  that progress  toward  the  performance
goal  can be  pursued.    In  this  way  the most direct  approach  to  improved
performance  is  implemented.   Nonperformance-related  improvements  can properly
be delayed until the  plant has  achieved the treatment  objective  for which it
is intended.
     4.2.3  Long-Term Involvement
Implementation of  a  CCP is a long-term  effort,  typically  involving one year,
for several reasons:

     - Inherently  long  response  times associated with making  changes  and
       achieving  stability in  biological  systems.Biologicalsystems
       typically respond slowly to process control  adjustments that affect
       the  environment  in  which the microorganism population  lives.   New
       environmental   conditions  eventually  result  in   changes  in  the
       relative  numbers  of  different  microorganisms.     Although  some
       changes can be  accomplished  for  activated sludge  systems  in  the
       period of three  to  five MCRTs,  it is not uncommon for some changes
       to   take   weeks  and   even   months   before   desired  shifts   in
       microorganism populations are accomplished (6).

     - Time  required to make  physical  and procedural changes.    This  is
       especially  true  for those changes  requiring  financial  expenditures
       where governing  board or council approval is necessary.

     - Greater effectiveness of
        _  	repetitive training techniques.   Operator
and  administrator  training  can  be  conducted  under  a variety  of
actual operating and administrative experiences.

Time  required  for  identification  and elimination of any additional
performance-limiting  factors that  may befoundduringtfieCCP.
4.3  Personnel Capabilities for Conducting CCPs
Persons  responsible   for  conducting  a  CCP   must  have  a   comprehensive
understanding of wastewater  treatment (see Section 2.3) as well  as  extensive
hands-on experience in  biological  wastewater  treatment operations and  strong
capabilities  in  personnel motivation.   Authoritative  understanding of,  and
experience  in,  biological  wastewater  processes  are  necessary  because  the
                                      74

-------
current  state-of-the-art  in  biological   treatment   leaves   room   for  much
individual   judgment  in  both  design  and  process  control.     For  example,
references can  be  found to support  the  use of a variety of  activated  sludge
process control  strategies.    Tho?e  responsible for  implementing  a CCP  must
have  sufficient process  experience  to  determine which  of these  is  most
applicable to the  POTW  in questiojn.    Leadership  and motivational  skills  are
required  to  implement  changes required.   These  individuals must  implement
changes,  direct  activities,  provide   training,   set   priorities,   exercise
judgment, and,  in  general,  facilitate those  functions that  lead to  improved
performance.   The term  "facilitator" will therefore be  used to describe those
individuals responsible for implementing a CCP.

Individuals who  routinely work in! the area of improving wastewater treatment
plant performance will likely be best qualified to be CCP facilitators.   These
persons are, typically, engineersjo.r  operators who  have focused their careers
on  wastewater  treatment plant troubleshooting  and  have gained  experience  in
correcting deficiencies at  severa)  plants of  various  types.   It is important
that  CCP  facilitators  have  experience  in  a  variety of  plants because  the
ability to  recognize  true causes jof limited  performance is a skill developed
only  through  experience.    Similarly,  the  successful  implementation  of  a
cost-effective CCP is greatly enhanced by experience.
                                  i
By  the very nature of the CCP approach, the CCP facilitator must often address
improved operation, maintenance, a|nd minor design modifications with personnel
already responsible  for these  wastewater treatment functions.   A "worst case
situation"  is   one  in  which  the j POTW  staff  is  trying to  prove  that  "the
facilitator can't  make  it work either."  The  CCP  facilitator must  be able to
get all  parties involved  to  focus  on  the common  goal  of achieving  desired
plant performance.

A  CCP facilitator must be  able  to conduct training  in  both  formal classroom
and on-the-job  situations.  Training  capabilities  must also be broadly based,
i.e.,  effective  with  both  the ; operating  as well   as  the  administrative
personnel.   When  addressing  process  control   limitations,  training must  be
geared  to   the  specific   process  control   decisionmakers.     Some  may  be
inexperienced  and  uncertified;  others may  have  considerable  experience and
credentials.  Administrative "training"  is often a matter of  clearly providing
information   to  justify   or   support   CCP   activities.      Although  many
administrators  are competent,  successful, and experienced, some may not know
what  their  facilities  require inj terms  of manpoweri  minor modifications, or
specific funding needs.           i

CCP facilitators can be either consultants or utility employees.  When local
administrators  decide to  use a  consultant  to  implement the  CCP,  they should
conduct interviews and  check references  thoroughly.   Nearly every CCP involves
correction  of  some administrative; factors,  actual  expenses  to  the POTW, and
could involve  a  substantial  construction cost if  the CCP is  not  capable of
bringing  the   POTW   to the   des-jred  level   of  treatment.    As  such,  the
administrators  should  have complete  confidence in  the abilities  of  the CCP
facilitator.   An important attribute of  a consultant  providing CCP  services is
the ability to explain problems  and  potential solutions clearly to a  variety
of audiences, both  technical and  hontechnical.
                                      75

-------
When  local  administrators  decide  to  conduct  a CCP  without  the  services  of
outside  personnel,  they  should recognize  that  some  inherent  problems may
exist.   The  individuals  implementing  the CCP,  for example,  often find  it
difficult to provide an unbiased assessment of the area  in which they normally
work:    operating  personnel  tend  to  look at design  and administration  as
problem areas; administrators typically feel  the operating personnel  should  be
able to do better with what they have; the engineer who  designed a facility  is
often  reluctant  to admit  design  limitations,  etc.   These  biases  should  be
recognized  and  discussed  before  personnel  closely  associated  with the  POTW
initiate a CCP.
4.4  Estimating CCP Costs
CCP costs  vary  widely depending on the  size  and  complexity of the  facility,
who implements the CCP, the number and nature of performance-limiting factors,
and  the capability  and cooperation  available from  the  POTW  technical  and
administrative staff.  The cost of a CCP falls into two main areas:  1) cost of
a consultant to implement the  CCP;  and 2) cost of  implementing activities  to
support  the  CCP  effort,  such  as  minor  plant  modifications,   additional
staffing,  more  testing equipment,  and  certain  process  changes.    Estimated
costs for using a CCP consultant are presented in  Table 4-1.
                                   TABLE 4-1

                     TYPICAL COSTS FOR CONDUCTING A CCPa
             Facility
        Suspended Growth:b
          <800 m3/d (0.2 mgd)
          800-8,000 mV
-------
Wide  ranges  are  presented  in  [Table  4-1  because  the  performance-limiting
factors generally vary widely frpm  plant  to  plant and require different types
and amounts of training before they can be eliminated.
                                 i
The  costs  of  implementing  activities  to  support  the  CCP  effort and  for
operating  the  POTW  at  a   higher   level  of  performance  are  difficult  to
generalize.  They must be developed on an individual POTW basis since they are
more dependent on the particular jperformance-limiting factors than the size or
type of  facility.   In most  CCPs  [these costs equal  or exceed the typical costs
of a CCP consultant, as presented in Table 4-1.
4.5  References
When an NTIS number is cited in a reference, that reference is available from:

         National Technical Information Service
         5285 Port Royal Road
         Springfield, VA 22161
         (703) 487-4650
                                 I
 1.  Hegg, B. A.,  K.  L.  Rakness,| and J. R.  Schultz.   Evaluation of Operation
     and  Maintenance Factors  Limiting  Municipal  Wastewater  Treatment Plant
     Performance.   EPA-600/2-79-j034,  NTIS  No. PB-300331,  U.S.  Environmental
     Protection    Agency,   Municipal    Environmental   Research   Laboratory,
     Cincinnati, OH, 1979.       j
                                 i
 2.  Hegg, B. A.,  K. L.  Rakness^  and J. R.  Schultz.   The CCP  Way  to Better
     Effluents.  Water Engineering and Management, 129(10):40-43,  1982.
                                 i
 3.  Hegg, B. A.,  K. L.  Raknessi  and J. R. Schultz.  A Demonstrated Approach
     for  Improving  Performance,  and  Reliability  of  Biological  Wastewater
     Treatment   Plants.      EPA-600/2-7 9-035,   NTIS   No.   PB-300476,   U.S.
     Environmental   Protection  !Agency,  Municipal    Environmental   Research
     Laboratory, Cincinnati, OH, j 1979.

 4.  Gray, A. C.,  Jr., P. E. Paul, and H. D.  Roberts.  Evaluation  of Operation
     and  Maintenance Factors  Limiting  Biological  Wastewater  Treatment Plant
     Performance.    EPA-600/2-79f087, .NTIS   No. PB-297491,  U.S.  Environmental
     Protection    Agency,   Municipal    Environmental   Research   Laboratory,
     Cincinnati, OH, 1979.       |
                                 i
                                 I
 5.  Palm,  J.  C.,  D.  Jenkins,  and  D.  S.  Parker.    The  Relationship Between
     Organic Loading, Dissolved Oxygen Concentration, and  Sludge Settleability
     in  the  Completely-Mixed Activated Sludge Process.   Presented at the 51st
     Annual  Conference,   Water  Pollution  Control   Federation,  Anaheim,  CA,
     1978.                       |

 6.  Jenkins, D. and W.  E. Garrison.   Control  of Activated Sludge  by Mean Cell
     Residence Time.  JWPCF 40 (ll): 1905-1919,  1968.
                                       77

-------
                                   CHAPTER 5

                 HOW TO CONDUCT COMPOSITE CORRECTION PROGRAMS
5.1  Introduction
This  chapter  presents techniques,  schedules,  and  guidelines  that have  been
successfully  used  in implementing Composite Correction Programs  (CCPs).   The
methods  presented  should not  be  taken  as  the only  workable methods,  since
experience  has shown  that  no  single  approach  will work  at every POTW  (1).
When  implementing a CCP, it must  be  remembered  that the concept  of correcting
performance-limiting  factors  until   the  desired POTW  performance  is  achieved
must  remain the controlling  guidance,  with  the  specifics  left  to  the  CCP
facilitator.
5.2  CCP Activities
A CCP  facilitator should schedule periods of  onsite  involvement  interspersed
with off site limited involvement.  During the  onsite  periods,  the  facilitator
assumes  a  leadership  role  in  making  process  control  decisions,  assigning
responsibilities,  training  POTW  staff,  and  checking  progress.    When  not
onsite,  POTW  personnel   are  responsible  for  this   leadership  and  the  CCP
facilitator  monitors  their  progress  as  well  as the  process  control  arid
performance of the plant.

The CCP should be scheduled and implemented using the  following tools,  keeping
their advantages and limitations in mind:

     - Telephone calls,  because  of convenience and low cost,  for  routine
       monitoring  6T~ CCP  progress.    Use  of  the   telephone  promotes
       acceptance by POTW personnel of responsibility for making critical
       plant observations,  interpreting data,  and summarizing  important
       indicators and conclusions.   The  effectiveness of telephone  calls
       is limited in that the  CCP facilitator must rely  on observations of
       the  POTW  personnel  rather than  his/her own.   To  ensure common
       understanding of  the  telephone conversations,  the CCP  facilitator
       should always summarize important points, decisions that have been
       reached, and actions to be taken subsequent to the call.  Both  the
       CCP facilitator  and POTW personnel  should keep  written phone logs.
                                      78

-------
     - Site
visits  to
   control
                       verify  or I clarify  plant  status,  indicate  major
      process control  changes,  j:est completed  facility  modifications,
      provide  onsite  operator  training,  and  report progress  to  POTW
      administrators.  Specific, dates for site visits should be scheduled
      as indicated by the plant status and training requirements.
                                 i
      Written  reports  to  promote  clarity and  continuity.   Because  the
      cost  of  written  reports  'depletes  funds  available  for  action-
      oriented work by both  the  POTW  staff and the CCP facilitator, only
      concise, quarterly status  reports  are recommended.   Short (1-page)
      written  summaries  should i also  be  prepared  for  each  facility
      modification.    Initially,!  these  may  be  prepared  by  the  CCP
      facilitator,   but
      transferred to the
                           this   responsibility  should   ultimately   be
                          POTW staff.
     - Final   CCP  report  to
       recommendations  should
       Current  status  of  the
       presented.
                   summarize   activities,   since  all  major
                    have   been   implemented   during   the  CCP.
                   POTW  performance  and  capacity  should  be
The approach  of  interspersing onsite with off site  involvement  is  illustrated
in Figure 5-1.  As the CCP  progresses,  fewer site visits and telephone  calls
should be used.   This is in  linejwith  the transfer  of responsibility back to
the  permanent  POTW  staff.    Typical   levels  of  effort  required  by  CCP
facilitators  are  presented  in Tab|le 5-1.  For  any  particular POTW,  the  level
of effort is dependent on the specific performance-limiting factors.
5.3  Initial Site Visit
The  initial  site  visit  is used to establish the  working  relationship between
the  CCP facilitator  and  the POTV^ staff  and  administration.   A  good working
relationship  -  based on  mutual  respect,  communication, and  understanding  of
the  CCP - greatly enhances the potential for a successful  CCP.
      5.3.1  CPE Results
                                                    CPE,  25-50 percent  of
                                                   re-create  or  confirm
                                                               the
                                                               the
If  the  CCP facilitator  was not; involved in  the
initial   site  visit  time  may  be  required  to
conclusions of the CPE.          |

A CCP is often  implemented  by  individuals more experienced  in identifying and
correcting factors limiting POTW performance  than those who  conducted the CPE.
During the  initial  site  visit, the CCP facilitator  should  schedule time with
key  plant  personnel  and key  administrators  to  discuss confirmation  and/or
modification  of the original  performance-limiting  factors  identified  in the
CPE.  This  discussion  should also  address the Type  1 or Type 2  status  of the
POTW and  the  improvement in plant performance and/or  capacity  expected from
implementation of a CCP.         j
                                       79

-------
                                  FIGURE 5-1

             TYPICAL SCHEDULING OF OMSITE AND  OFFSITE  INVOLVEMENT




                             123456   7  8  9  10  11  12
             Telephone
             Consultation
             Onsite
             Consultation
D
D
                                  Months of Involvement
                                 :TABLE 5-1

                     TYPICAL CCP FACILITATOR INVOLVEMENT
Facility Size and Type*


Suspended Growth:
3,800 mf/d (1 mgd)
38,000 nrYd (10 mgd)
Fixed Film:
3,800 nwd (1 mgd)
38,000 m3/d (10 mgd)
Initial Site
Visit
days


3- 5
4-10

2- 5
4-10
Telephone
Consultation
no.
initial

2-6
3-8

1-3
2-3
/wk
end

2-4
2-4

1-4
1-4
Additional
Site Visits
no./yr


4-12
6-20

3- 8
5-12
Suspended growth facilities have greater process control flexibility
and typically require a greater level  of effort by the CCP facilitator.
                                    80

-------
The  initial  site visit should  also  be used  to  begin the elimination  of all
major performance-limiting factors (rated "A"  or "B"  in the CPE)  and  as many
other factors  as  possible.   It is usually most  advantageous  to  first  work on
improving  process  control.     Existing  process  control  testing  should  be
reviewed  and modified  so that all   necessary process  control  elements  are
adequately monitored.  Sampling frequency and location, collection procedures,
and  laboratory  analyses  should!  be  standardized  so   that  subsequent  data
collected by POTW personnel  and reviewed by the CCP facilitator can be used to
evaluate  the results  of  CCP  activities  and  represent the  complete  process
control monitoring  needs  of  the POTW.  New  or modified  sampling  or analyses
procedures should be demonstrated, by the CCP facilitator and then performed by
plant personnel under the supervision of the CCP facilitator.
     5.3.2  Monitoring Equipment j
                                 i

Any  needed  sampling  or   testing!  equipment  should  be  obtained.    The  CCP
facilitator  should  assist  the j POTW  personnel   in   obtaining   any  required
administrative approvals.        |
                                 I
                                 i
     5.3.3  Process  Control Summaries


The CCP  facilitator  should, with  the  help of plant personnel, draft a precise
weekly  summary form for process control parameters and performance monitoring
results.    Monthly  records  are [often  available,  but monthly  data  are  too
infrequent  to  allow  timely process control  adjustments.   POTW personnel  should
provide  the weekly summaries to tihe CCP  facilitator throughout the CCP.

In  some  small  plants, process dontrol  and monitoring  results  can  often be
recorded on a single page.  An example  process control form used both for in-
plant records  and  as a summary sent  to the CCP facilitator is shown in  Figure
5-2.                             i
      5.3.4  Process  Control  Adjustments
 The CCP  facilitator should,  as! much  as  possible,  initiate  process  control
 adjustments during the  initial  site visit.   Where  process controls  are  grossly
 out  of  line,  e.g.,  300  percent  estimated  return sludge  flows,  the  CCP
 facilitator should initiate adjustments toward more reasonable values at  the
 earliest possible  time.   Fine tjuning' of  process  control and training of  the
 POTW staff cannot  legitimately  progress  until  this  first level  of effort is
 initiated.                       j
 During major  process  control  adjustments,  every effort  should  be  made  to
 minimize  adverse  impact  on the iPOTW  operators'  morale.    Recommendations  for
 process control  changes should be explained in terms  of attempting to  optimize
 plant capabilities through  process  adjustments  with  both the CCP facilitator
                                       81

-------
                                  I
                   *
                    >w
~   ~  !"• O  O  fl  E  O)
                                                                      —  L.   I.  (A

                                                §§fefe§§w.2.25



                          
-------
and POTW operators  involved in all aspects.   Even with this approach, a  CCP
                                  obtain
facilitator should not  expect  to
personnel   on  all  changes.   A  response  such as
see" is often  the  best  that
only the degree of consensus
work, but we can try it."
                             can be expected.
                             expressed by  the
immediate complete support from  POTW
       "well,  let's  try it then  and
       Some changes may be made  with
      statement:  "I don't  think  it'll
     5.3.5  Minor Design Changes !
Any minor design changes identifjed as  necessary  by the CPE and confirmed  by
the CCP facilitator should be  initiated during the  initial  site  visit.   Minor
design  changes  often  require  significant  amounts of  time  for   approvals,
delivery of parts or equipment, or construction.   It  is  necessary,  therefore,
to start the process as soon  as needs  are  identified so that the  effect  of any
changes can be evaluated during the majority of the CCP.
5.4  Improving Design Performance-Limiting Factors
                                 i
                                 i          -                 '
The performance  of Type 1 and  Type  2 POTWs  can  often be  improved  by  making
minor modifications or  additions! to  the  original  design.    Examples  of  design
limitations  identified  in a  CPE are  included in  Appendix H.   Examples  of
common minor modifications implemented during CCPs are:
      i                           I
     - Return sludge flow measurement in  small activated sludge POTWs
                                 i
     - Sample taps on sludge dratyoff lines
                                 (
     - Piping to operate in alternative activated sludge modes  (plug flow,
       contact stabilization,  etc.)

     - Piping to provide recircutation without overloading clarifiers
                                 I
                                • i
     - Time clocks on waste and Return sludge pumps
                                 i
     - Bypasses on "polishing" pqnds

     - Supplemental air in aeration basins

     - Supplemental sludge disposal  -  usually land application capability
                                 I                                ;

     5.4.1  Identification and Justification

                                 i

The CCP  facilitator  and POTW  personnel must  be  able  to justify each proposed
modification  based on  the  resulting  increased  capacity  or operability  the
modification  will  provide.   The degree  of  justification  required for  each
modification  usually varies  witih the associated  costs  and  specific  plant
                                      83

-------
circumstances.  For example, little justification may be  required  to  convince
a superintendent to add a sampling tap in a sludge line  if the necessary  staff
and tools  to  do the job  are already available.   The  same tap would  require
more justification if a part-time operator would have to buy or rent tools  and
complete  the  installation  on  his/her own  time or  obtain authorization  for
additional paid time.


     5.4.2  Implementation


The CCP facilitator  should ensure  that  each  minor design  modification  or
addition  is  formally  documented  in  writing.    This   documentation  is more
valuable  in terms  of  training  and  commitment  if  it  is  completed  by  POTW
personnel.  It should include:

     - Purpose of the proposed change
                                   i

     - Detailed description of the change

     - Quantitative  criteria for  evaluating success  or  failure  of  the
       change

     - Individual(s) responsible for completing  the change

     - Cost estimate

     - Anticipated improvement in plant performance

     - Schedule

Another  role  of  the  CCP  facilitator   is  to   assist   POTW personnel   in
understanding   and   implementing  their   responsiblity   in   regard   to   the
modification.     Ideally,   the   CCP  facilitator  should  be  a  technical   and
managerial  reference  throughout the  implementation  of  the modification,  and
the POTW  staff should  have, or develop,  the technical  expertise,  available
time,  and motivation to complete the modification.   If there is a  breakdown in
completing  assigned  responsibilities, the CCP  facilitator must  become more
aggressive in assuring completion of the  modification.


     5.4.3  Assessment


Following  completion   of  a  minor modification,  the CCP facilitator  should
perform an evaluation of the improved POTW capability.   This assessment should
compare  the  quantitative  criteria   established   for  the  project  with  the
capability of the actual modification.  A one-page summary is  often helpful  in
informing, and maintaining support from,  POTW personnel  and administrators.
                                      84

-------
5.5  Improving Maintenance Performance-Limiting Factors
Plant maintenance can generally bejimproved  in  nearly  all  POTWs, but it  is  a
serious performance-limiting factor in only  a small  percentage  of  them  (2-4).
Nevertheless, adequate maintenance jis  essential  to achieve  consistent effluent
quality.   As such,  a CCP  facilitator  may  end  up  improving the  maintenance
program during a CCP to ensure that' improved performance achieved during a CCP
is maintained afterwards.          ;

The first step in addressing maintenance  factors  that  limit plant  performance
is to  review  any undesirable  resuljts  of  the current maintenance effort.   If
plant  performance is  degraded  as  a result of equipment breakdowns  that could
have been  avoided with better preventive maintenance, the problem  is  easily
documented.   Likewise,  if high  jcost  of  major corrective  maintenance  is
experienced, a need for  improved  preventive  maintenance is  easily  recognized.
                  should  have  been (identified during the CPE when  filling out
                  form   in   Appendjix   D  and   identifying   and  prioritizing
performance-limiting  factors.   However,  many  POTWs lacking good  maintenance
programs  do  not  have  such  obvjous   evidence  directly   correlating  poor
maintenance  practices with poor  performance.   For these  POTWs,  maintenance
would  not have been identified as a; significant factor limiting performance.
These situations
the  appropriate
Once the  need for  improved  preventive maintenance  is  established, the  next
step  is  to  gain   the. commitment! of  the  plant  operating  staff.    Simply
formalizing recordkeeping will  generally  improve maintenance practices to  an
acceptable level  in many POTWs, par|ticularly smaller ones.
                                   I
A  suggested four-step  procedure  f,or  developing  a maintenance  recordkeeping
system is  to:  1)  list all equipment;  2)  gather manufacturers'  literature  on
all  equipment;  3)  complete  equipment  information  summary sheets  for  all
equipment; and 4) develop time-based preventive maintenance schedules.

A list of equipment can most easil^ be developed by touring  the  POTW.   As new
equipment  is  purchased  it can be added to  the  list.   Existing  manufacturers'
literature  should  be  inventoried  jto  identify  missing  but  needed  materials.
Maintenance literature  can be obtained from the  factory  (usually  a source is
identified   on   the   equipment  ! nameplate)   or   from   local    equipment
representatives.                   j

An  equipment  information  sheet isjpresented  in Appendix G.  Once  sheets are
completed for each piece of equipment, a time-based schedule can be developed.
This   schedule  typically   includes   daily,   weekly,    monthly,   quarterly,
semiannualj  and  annual  checkoff lists  of  required  maintenance  tasks.    An
example of this scheduling system is also presented in Appendix 6.
                                   I
In  many  small  POTWs,  the  number: of pieces of equipment  is  so   small  that
scheduling  is  not  critical.    ijn  larger  plants,  preventive  maintenance
activities  should  be  spaced  to provide an  even workload  throughout the year.
Similarly,  all  monthly  maintenance  activities   should  be   scheduled   for
accomplishment over the entire 4-week period.
                                      85

-------
The above  system for  developing  a  maintenance recordkeeping system has worked
successfully  at  several  small  POTWs.   However,  there  are  many other  good
maintenance references  available  for use by  CCP facilitators  and POTW staffs
(5-7).
5.6  Improving Administrative Performance-Limiting Factors
Frequently encountered administrative factors that limit plant performance are
administrators who  are unfamiliar with  plant needs and policies that conflict
with  plant  needs.   For  example,  such  items as minor  modifications,  testing
equipment,  expanded  operator coverage,  or  increased  utility  costs may  be
recognized by  plant operating personnel  as performance-limiting  factors but
changes cannot be  pursued due to lack  of appreciation of their importance by
nontechnical administrators.   Nearly all  POTW  administrators want  to provide
adequate  treatment  capacity  and  performance.  Their support and understanding
is  essential   to  the  successful   implementation   of  a CCP.    The  following
techniques have pr.oven useful in overcoming  administrative limitations:

      - Involve  plant  administrators from  the  start  of  the  CCP.    The
       initial site visit should include time  with key administrators at
       the  plant  to  increase  their understanding of  plant  processes and
       problems.

      - Educate administrators in the fundamentals  of biological  wastewater
       treatment  and  in the  specific  needs   of  the  plant's  processes.
       AdministratorsmayBereluctanttopursuecorrective  actions
       because  of   lack  of understanding  of treatment processes  and the
       role the desired change plays in improving  such processes.

      - Listen carefully to the concerns of administrators so that they can
       be addressed during  the CCP.  Some  of  their concerns or ideas may
       be  technically  unimportant,  but  must  be  addressed  to  ensure
       continued progress of the CCP.
     - Use   technical   data   based
on
__^	process   needs   to   persuade
administrators55takeappropriateactions;do  not  rely  on
"authority."   Alternatives  should  be  presented,  when possible, and
the administrators left with the decision.
5.7  Improving Operational Performance-Limiting Factors
Improvement of POTW  operations  during  a CCP is achieved by providing training
while  improved process control  procedures,  tailored for the particular plant,
are  developed  and  implemented.    The  initial   training   efforts  should  be
directed at the key  process control decisionmakers.  In most plants with flows
less  than  1,900  nr/d (0.5 mgd),  one  person  typically makes  and  implements
all major  process control  decisions.   In  these  cases, on-the-job training is
usually more  effective than classroom  training  and is recommended.    As  the
                                      86

-------
number of operators to be  trained  Increases  with plant size, the need for and
effectiveness of  combining classroom training  with on-the-job  training  also
increases.                      !
                                i
As discussed in Chapter 4, process control is the primary goal in implementing
a CCP because  it  represents the i essential step  that enables a  capable  plant
to  achieve  the ultimate  goal  of  cost-effectively  producing a  good   quality
effluent.  A detailed  discussion^  of process control for  suspended  growth and
fixed film facilities is therefore presented.
     5.7.1  Suspended Growth Process Control
Process control of suspended growth facilities can be achieved through control
of the following important parameters associated with the process:
                                i
     - Activated sludge mass    !
     - Return  sludge flow       1
     - Aeration basin DO        !
•These items can be utilized to apply "pressure" to the biological environment.
If  a  particular  pressure  is held  for  an  adequate  length of  time  to  get
biological   system   response,  ja   desired   change   in    activated   sludge
characteristics  -  such  as   settling  velocity  - will  result.   The  inter-
relationships   between   sludge | characteristics,   pressure,  and   time   for
biological  system  response to oi:cur  relative  to sludge mass  control,  return
sludge control, and DO control are discussed in the  following sections.
         5.7.1.1  Activated Sludge Characteristics
The  primary  objective of activated  sludge  process control  is  achieving good
performance  by maintaining  proper  sludge  character.    Sludge  character  is
defined  as those  physical  and [biological  characteristics  of  a  sludge that
determine  its ability to remove prganic material from wastewater.  Good  sludge
character  requires  filamentous ajnd  zoogleal  bacteria  to be in proper balance.
Enough filaments  should  be present  to  form a skeleton for the floe particles,
but the filaments should not extend significantly beyond the floe.

More  filaments  tend  to  produce ja  slower settling,  larger  sludge  floe that
produces a clearer  supernatant. I Too many filaments, however, produce a  sludge
that  will  not  adequately  settle  and  thicken  in  the final   clarifier,  often
causing sludge  to be carried over the clarifier weirs.  Having fewer filaments
produces a more rapid settling ;sludge but also  leaves more turbidity.   The
faster  settling,  small  sludge floe exhibits discrete settling  and produces
"pin  floe" or "straggler floe" as well  as higher turbidities.

A  representation  of a microscopic  view of this  desirable type  of  sludge  is
shown in Figure 5-3.            ]
                                      87

-------
                     FIGURE 5-3

     REPRESENTATIONS OF ACTIVATED SLUDGE FLOC
          Desirable Activated Sludge Floe
                                        Filament
                                        Backbone
  Undesirable Slow-Settling Activated Sludge Floe
Filament
Backbone
                                          Extended
                                          Filament
   Undesirable Fast-Settling Activated Sludge Floe
                                            Dispersed
                                            Particle
                         88

-------
It is  desirable to obtain  good  sol [ids/liquid and  the  good  sludge thickening
characteristics  of a  faster  settling  sludge  along  with  the  high  quality
effluent produced by a slower settling sludge.  This is achieved by control of
the sludge  character  to obtain  the
characteristics.
best balance  of fast-  and  siow-settling
Settling tests  can  be used  to  moniftor the sludge conditions  shown  in Figure
5-3.                                !
         5.7.1.2  Activated Sludge Mass Control
Activated  sludge  mass is  controlled to  achieve  and maintain  desired sludge
character  and, .as  such, represents  a critical  aspect of good process control.
There are  several ways to control slludge mass in a POTW.  These variations put
emphasis  on  different calculations  or different control parameters,  but the
basic objective of each is to obtain the desired mass of microorganisms in the
system.                             j

Some mass  control  techniques, are ba^ed on the assumption that sludge can best
handle diurnal  and day-to-day variations in  influent wastewater  strength and
the  cyclic nature of  sludge  growth' rates by maintaining  relatively constant
MLVSS  concentration.   Another  technique  attempts  to  adjust  sludge  mass  to
produce a  desired  food to  microorganism ratio (F/M).  Yet another attempts to
maintain a consistent  average age ofi the activated sludge in the system, i.e.,
mean cell  residence time (MCRT).   'l

Mass  control  by  monitoring  only  the  MLSS or  MLVSS  concentration  in  the
aeration  basin  and wasting sludge  jto maintain  a  desired level  assumes  that
variations   in   the   amount  of   sludge  in  the   secondary   clarifiers  is
insignificant.   A  preferred  approaph includes  secondary  sludge in  the  mass
control monitoring program.

The  F/M method  of sludge mass  conjtrol  is  difficult  to implement  because   a
method to  quickly  and  accurately monitor the food portion of this parameter is
not  commonly available.   Typically,! BODs or chemical  oxygen demand (COD) are
used to  indicate  the   amount of  food  available.   The 8005  test requires  five
days to complete and is therefore unsatisfactory for process control purposes.
Although  the COD  test can be  completed in only  several  hours, it requires
equipment  and  laboratory  capabilities   that are  not  usually  available  in
smaller plants.
                                    1
Mass control using the MCRT  approafch can be  set up  to include the  mass  of
sludge in  the aeration basin  and the secondary clarifier (10).  A variation of
this  technique  is  to  select a  desfired level  of total  mass  for  the system
(i.e., both  the  aeration  basin  and  (secondary clarifier) and adjust the amount
of sludge  wasted to approach  the  selected  total  mass.   It is recommended that
one  of these  two  strategies be  selected for  controlling  sludge mass.   The
following  discussion identifies the |differences between the two strategies.
                                      89

-------
Activated sludge mass control using  the  MCRT approach requires that the total
sludge mass be measured each day and that total  be divided by the target MCRT.
This  calculated mass  is  then   attempted  to  be  wasted.    Actual  MCRTs  are
calculated  by dividing the  total   sludge  mass  in  the  system  by the  actual
sludge mass wasted.   Actual data  for a 3-week perio'd of  sludge mass control
using the  MCRT approach  are shown  in  Figure  5-4.    During  this period  the
target MCRT was  kept constant at  10  days.   The data  in Figure  5-4  show that
fairly constant MCRT can be maintained.  An  advantage of mass control  by this
method is that it requires daily wasting.

Sludge mass control  using  the total  mass in  the system approach requires that
wasting  be  varied depending on  increases or decreases in  the  total  sludge
mass.  For  example, if the total  sludge mass was increasing above the selected
target level,  wasting  would be  increased  until the  desired sludge  mass  was
again achieved.  Actual data for a 3-week  period of sludge mass control using
the  target  total  mass  approach  are shown  in  Figure 5-5.    An  important
observation  from  Figure 5-5 is  that total  mass was  held  relatively constant
despite  individual MCRTs  ranging from 10  to infinity (no wasting  that day).
Control   of  total  sludge  mass   can  be  a  useful  process  control  parameter,
especially  in activated sludge plants where wasting is not done every day.
         5.7.1.3  Return Sludge Flow Rate Control
The return sludge flow  rate  determines  the  distribution  of sludge between the
aeration basin  and  secondary clarifier.  In  general,  return  sludge flow rate
control should  be used  to  maximize the sludge mass  and  sludge  detention time
in  the  aeration basin and minimize the  sludge  mass and  sludge detention time
in the final  clarifier.  This  represents  the  optimum condition  for an aerobic
biological treatment system and  can  be  summarized  as maximizing  the  sludge
distribution ratio (aerator sludge mass divided by clarifier sludge mass).

A  general  misconception concerning the  use of return  sludge flow  rates for
process  control  is  that  increasing the  flow of return  sludge  decreases the
sludge  blanket  level   in  the   secondary   clarifier.     This   is   not  as
straightforward as it first appears.  Within the normal range of operation for
sludge  settling characteristics,  increasing the  return  rate  will  remove the
sludge mass  from  the clarifier faster.   However,  the return sludge ultimately
contributes  to the total hydraulic  load  to  the  clarifier and  therefore to the
total solids load on the clarifier  from the aeration basin (see Figure 5-6).

Depending  on the  sludge settling  characteristics,  increased solids loading on
the  clarifier  may or may  not  increase  the solids  mass  in the  clarifier in
conjunction  with  the  faster  solids  removal   rate.    Although  the  sludge
detention  time  in1 the clarifier may go  down,  the  sludge  mass  in the clarifier
may  go  up.  When the mass of  sludge  in  the clarifier is increased along with
the   rate  of   sludge  removal,  the  objective   of  maximizing  the  sludge
distribution  ratio  is  obviously  not  achieved.    The positive  aspect  of  a
decreased detention time in the clarifier must be weighed against the negative
aspect  of  a  decreased sludge ! distribution  ratio  and  a decreased  sludge
detention  time  in the aerator.
                                      90

-------
                                                       sAep
                                                         oo   co
                                                                         CvJ
CD
      o
      2:

      CD

      i—i
      OO
      o
      QL
      OO
      OO
      CD
      oo
      o
      o
                                                                                  CM
                                                                                  CM
                                                                                  CM


                                                                                  8

                                                                                  05


                                                                                  co
                                                                                  co
oo


CM
O)


co


N-



co


If)


•*t


CO


CM
        CO

        £
       Q
                                                     91

-------
If)

in

UJ
    CD
    oo
    C£3
    CD
CD   O
I-H   O
    oo
    UJ
    CD
    O
    o
    UJ
    £
             8
                Opca^CMOcocD^CM
                CM  CM   CM   CM
            ©
            ©
             ©
©
©
©

©
©
©
                                                                 CO
                                        I   I    I    I    I   I    I    1
                                           ©
                                       ©
                            LJJ
                                                              ©
                                                           CM


                                                           8

                                                           CD
                                             ©        —



                                                ©     —
                                                                       CD
CO
£
0
                                             ©        —
                                                          ©
                                                                       00
                            o   ccf  co"

                            eBpnis
                                      92

-------
                                 ;FIGURE 5-6

                  SIMPLIFIED ACTIVATED SLUDGE PROCESS DIAGRAM
Q
T
                   Aeration
                     Basin
                                       Q+R
^j  Clarifier
                        R
                        R
 Q
 R
               Wastewater Flow j
               Return Sludge Flow
                                                                  Waste
Two levels  of improved sludge  return  control  are typically  encountered  when
implementing  a CCP:  gross adjustments  to  bring  the  operation into  normal
operating ranges  followed  by  fine  tuning  to optimize  performance.   Thus,  a
grossly out of line return rate should first be adjusted to fall  in  the  middle
of the appropriate range presented in Table 3-5.

Most activated  sludge  plants  with  flows  less  than 7,500  m3/d (2.0 mgd)  are
designed  conservatively  enough that,  at wastewater  flows less than  design,
gross adjustments to bring the  sludge return rate within  normal ranges often
provide  sufficiently  improved  control.   Furthermore,  most plants that  have
been  determined  to be  Type   1  (major  unit  processes  are  adequate)   are
conservatively enough  loaded  that  such gross  adjustments  may be all that is
necessary for current loadings.   The applicability and results of gross  sludge
return adjustments are illustrated by the  following discussion:

   An activated  s]udge plant wasi experiencing almost  continuous  problems
   with   sludge  bulking in  the final  clarifier.    This continued  despite
   repeated efforts by the plant ^superintendent to  control  the filamentous
   nature of the sludge.   The  superintendent had chlorinated and  dumped  the
   entire  activated sludge  massj to  polishing  ponds  twice   and  was  now
   considering adding clay  as  a settling aid.
                                      93

-------
   Review of  plant operation indicated  that the return  sludge  flow rates
   were  about 150  percent of  the  raw  wastewater  flow  rate.    After  a
   discussion of the  advantages of  a  lower return rate, the superintendent
   reduced the return sludge rate to about 50 percent of the raw wastewater
   flow.  Solids loss from the clarifiers stopped in about 3 hours.

   This  gross  return  rate  adjustment  did  not solve  all  of  the  plant
   problems,  but   it  did  significantly  improve  process   control   and
   performance.  At the  higher  return rate,  hydraulic  loading to the final
   clarifier  had  been  2.5  times  the   raw  wastewater  flow.    After  the
   adjustment,  the hydraulic  loading was  reduced  to 1.5  times  the  raw
   wastewater flow.   Although  overflow rates were not affected, detention
   time  in  the  clarifier  for  settling  was increased  by  67 percent  and
   solids loading to the clarifier was reduced by 40 percent.  This greatly
   enhanced the solids/liquid separation  function of the clarifier.

Most Type 2 plants (major unit processes are marginal)  or plants  where gross
return sludge flow adjustments do not produce the desired results will  require
a  higher level  of return  sludge flow  control,  such  as  diurnal  adjustments
based on variations in wastewater flow and sludge character that occurs due to
variations in POTW loadings over  a 24-hour period.

Fine  tuning return sludge flow rates is an area in  which  several  differing
philosophies  exist within  the technical  community.   A  complete explanation of
each  is beyond  the  scope of  this Handbook.   The selection of a specific
technique,  and  evaluation  of  the  results,   is  best  left to  the  skill  and
judgment of an experienced CCP facilitator.
         5.7.1.4  Aeration Basin DO Control
Oxygen levels in an aeration basin can be used to promote or hinder the growth
rates of  filamentous  organisms  in  the activated  sludge  process  (8-11).   DO
control   can  therefore  be  used  to  promote  the  desired  balance  between
filamentous and zoogleal microorganisms, control sludge character, and improve
plant performance.

In most  activated  sludge plants, regardless of  size,,  the greatest single use
of energy is for aeration and mixing in the aeration basin.  The desire to cut
energy  and  associated  costs  while maintaining good  performance makes  the
decision as  to  how much oxygen  to use a critical  one.   Some  guidelines  and
tests that  have  been  used to aid  in making  this decision in other plants are
presented below.

Oxygen supply in an aeration basin can be thought of as satisfying two needs:
oxygen  demand  and residual  DO.    Typically,  these   are  satisfied  without
differentiation, but  an  understanding  of both may  be  helpful  when evaluating
oxygen needs.   Oxygen demand is  the mass of oxygen required to  meet BOD  and
nitrification  demand  and maintain a  viable microorganism  population.    The
required residual  DO  is  that mass of oxygen needed to provide the environment
that  produces  good sludge  character.   The  residual DO,  which  exists  in  an
                                      94

-------
aeration basin  when  the oxygen  demand  is satisfied, varies with  the  type of
process.   Generally, the  higher the organic  loading  rate  on the  activated
sludge  system,  the  higher  the resiidual  DO will be when  the  demand is  met.  A
general guideline for residual bulk DO is shown in Figure  3-1.   Higher oxygen
rates  are,  in  general,  associated with  activated  sludge systems that  have
higher organic loadings.           :
                                   i
                                   i
Operating experience  has  shown th^t  DO  becomes a growth-limiting  factor  for
zoogleal-type microorganisms before becoming a limiting factor for filamentous
microorganisms.  Do control at  low; levels in an aeration  basin  can  therefore
be  used to  apply  pressure  to  shift  sludge  characteristics  toward  slower
settling.   Conversely,  higher  DO  levels can  be  used  to  apply pressure  for
faster settling.                   !

If  a  decision  is  made to  lower  DO  by  reducing  aeration,  proper tesing is
essential as it is  a necessity to |recognize when  too little oxygen is  being
transferred.  Tests that will  be mpst beneficial  are residual  DO measurements
and oxygen uptake rate  tests  (12).:  Residual  DO measurements  should be  taken
initially  at several  locations throughout  the aeration  basin and  verified
periodically to determine a sample ipoint that can  be  considered "average."

When determining  residual  DO,  it  ;is important to  take measurements  several
times  during the day  to be  coincident  with  diurnal  flow  variations,  since
residual DO  demand  typically  varies  with loadings.   Where 24-hour  operator
coverage  or  in-basin  DO  meters: with  recorders   are  available,   diurnal
fluctuations should be obtainable as often as needed.   In  other  plants,  a  few
"special  DO  tests"  in  the  middle  of  the night  may  be  sufficient.    The
importance of getting DO readings for all major plant load conditions  is that
anoxic,  or  DO-deficient,  conditions   promote  the  growth  of  filamentous
organisms leading to bulky sludge character.

In general,, plants operating  at low DO levels  during peak loading may  still
provide  good  treatment  if considerably higher  DO  residuals exist before  the
day's  peak  loading  is  received,  i  For   example,  a  plant  may  operate  very
successfully with a  DO  of  0.4-0.6img/l  during the  day if the morning  DO is
1.0-1.5 mg/1.  This daily fluctuation  in  DO  levels  can produce  the desired mix
of zoog'leal  and filamentous organisms.

The oxygen  uptake  test can also  bie  used as a  measure of adequacy of oxygen
transfer (13).   For example,  if  the  oxygen uptake  test indicates an  oxygen
demand  significantly  greater  than; 0.65  kg 02/kg  BOD5 removed  plus  0.1  kg
02/kg total  sludge in an activated'sludge system,  the test  may  be indicative
of  an  inadequate  oxygen   supply.!   This  analysis  is  illustrated  by  the
following.                          j

   An activated sludge  facility was removing approximately 240  kg  (530 Ib)
   BODs/d with  a total  sludge mass  in   the  aeration basin and  secondary
   clarifier of about 2,000 kg (4,5pO  Ib).  The calculated  oxygen demand  is
   [(240 kg BOD5/d)  x  (0.65  kg , Oo/kg  BOD5)]  +  [(2,000  kg  sludge)   x
   (0.1  kg  02/kg  sludge/d)], or  356 kg  (783  Ib)   02/d.    However,  the
   measured  oxygen uptake  in  the 760 m3  (200,000 gal)  aeration  basin was
   30 mg/l/hr,  or 550  kg  (1,200 Ib) 02/d,  or 150  percent of  calculated
                                      95

-------
   oxygen  demand.   This  indicated  that the realistic  oxygen  requirements
   are not being met with the current residual  DO  of  0.5-0.8 mg/1.   Oxygen
   supply was increased, turbidity of the  effluent dropped,  and the oxygen
   demand measured by  the oxygen uptake rate  decreased to 110  percent of
   the calculated demand.


The above  illustrates  the use  of  a  successful  troubleshooting  technique  for
identifying and  correcting  a DO deficiency.   Like  return  sludge control,  the
capability  to  use DO  control  to fine  tune activated  sludge  processes is  a
function of the experience and technical judgment of the CCP facilitator.
         5.7.1.5  Process Control Pressure
As  discussed  in  Section  5.7.1.1,  overall  activated  sludge  plant  treatment
performance is primarily a function of  the sludge character.   Process control
tests and  adjustments  should  be  made  with the purpose  of achieving changes in
the direction  of desirable sludge character.   The specific  process  controls
discussed  earlier  (sludge mass,  sludge returns,  and  aeration basin  DO)  are
used  to  apply  a  "pressure"  to  change  sludge  character  by  changing  the
environment for the sludge mass.

When  a  change in  sludge character is  desired, a combination  of operational
adjustments  may  be  necessary  to provide enough  pressure  to   achieve  that
desired  range.   For example,  if  sludge  settling has  slowed to an undesirable
level  and a  wet weather  season (which  will  cause higher  average  and  peak
clarifier  hydraulic  loadings)  is approaching,  it would  be  advantageous  to
expedite  efforts to  increase  the settling  rate.   Simultaneous  adjustments of
several   process control  parameters could provide more  pressure in the desired
direction  than making  a change in only  one control.   In general, a  raise  in
the sludge inventory,  a raise in aeration basin DO, and more frequent return
rate  adjustments  to minimize  sludge  mass  and  sludge  detention  time  in  the
clarifier  would  all  be  appropriate  to  achieve  faster  settling and  better
clarifier  performance  in  a minimal  time  under  the higher  hydraulic loading
conditions.
         5.7.1.6  Time for Biological System Response
When adjusting process  control  at activated sludge plants,  it is important to
realize  that changes  in  sludge  character develop  slowly  and  time must  be
allowed  for  the  biological   system  to  respond  to  the  pressures  applied.
Adjustments  may  change  the  environment of  the  activated  sludge  very quickly,
but  a  considerably  longer period  of  time may  be  required  before  sludge
character changes to reflect the new environment.  For example, if low DO in a
diffused air aeration basin is believed to  be a cause of slow-settling sludge,
it would be  appropriate to  increase the  oxygen  transfer  by  increasing  blower
output.   Two changes  should  be  monitored, one immediate and one long-term.
Mixed liquor DO measurements a few hours  after  the change as  well  as the next
                                      96

-------
 day   should  indicate  whether  the  increased  blower  output   selected  was
 sufficient  to change  the  environment (DO level) in the aeration  basin, but  it
 may  take  several  weeks  of  sludge  settling  tests  to  determine  if  that new
 environment applied  enough  pressure  to  cause  the  sludge  to  settle  more
 rapidly.

 There  is  a tendency  to   return  ito  status quo  if  a  desired  result  is not
 achieved  quickly.   In  the above | example,  a person  using a  trial  and error
 approach may decide after 3 days f  higher  DO that  additional  aeration was the
 wrong  adjustment and a waste  of jenergy.   However, a person  directing  a CCP
 must  have  enough experience and confidence to  hold the changed  environmental
 conditions  long  enough  to producej the desired  result.   If the desired change
 in sludge character has not started  to  take place in  a length  of  time equal  to
 two  or three  MCRTs,  additional  pressure  should  be applied.    As  a general
 reference,  a  time equal  to  three to  five  MCRTs may be  necessary to produce
 changes in  sludge character due tp process  control  adjustments.

 An appreciation  for  the  time required  for  a biological  system  to respond  to
 new  pressures  should be  a major  training objective  of  the CCP  effort  to
 improve process  control.   Graphing monitoring  results to produce  trend charts
 can enhance this appreciation.    |
         5.7.1.7  Activated Sludge Testing
Activated  sludge plant monitoring for  effective  process control  must include
sludge character, sludge mass,  return  sludge,  and DO.   Several references are
available  for  selecting tests  and] their frequency for activated sludge plants
The tests  and  schedule shown in table  5-2,  developed for a  190  m3/d (50,000
gpd) plant operating  under highly} variable conditions  due  to drastic climate
changes  and wide  seasonal  population  fluctuations,  are  applicable  to  many
small   activated  sludge  plants.  I  The  concept  of  providing  two  different
frequency  schedules is a compromise between the  desirable  higher frequencies
and the  minimum operator time  typically allocated to  this  function in  small
facilities.   Under normal  operating  conditions,  with  little  stress on  the
processes,  the  "routine"  frequency is  adequate.   When the system  is  under
stress,  the  "critical"  frequency  is   appropriate.     This  occurs  during
transitions  to  higher loadings,  j during peak  seasonal  populations,  and  can
occur unpredictably if bulky sludge character develops or equipment fails.

Even in  small  activated sludge plants  a concentrated  process  control  effort
based  on  reliable  testing  and . j understanding  of   process  fundamentals  is
necessary,  as  illustrated  by  the  process  control  testing  schedule  and
recording  sheet developed  for  aj950  nr/d  (0.25  mgd)   contact stabilization
plant and shown in Figure 5-7.  (ijlote: When the CCP  was initiated, monitoring
of aeration basin  DO  was not included because  the  testing  capability was  not
available at the time.)
                                      97

-------
                             TABLE 5-2

                  PROCESS CONTROL MONITORING AT A
                   SMALL ACTIVATED SLUDGE PLANT
                                                     Frequency
Test, Parameter, or Evaluation                 Routine      Critical

Flow Equalization:

  Water Level                                   Daily        2/day
  Pump Setting vs. Daily Flow, DO               3/week       Daily

Activated Sludge:

  Control Tests                                 3/week       Daily
    Centrifuge Spins (Aeration Tank Cone./
    Return Sludge Conc./Clarifier Core Sample
    Cone.), Settleometer Test, Depth to Blanket,
    Aeration Basin DO

  Control Calculations                          3/week       Daily
    Total Sludge Mass, Aerator Sludge Mass,
    Clarifier Sludge Mass, Return Sludge
    Percentage, Sludge Distribution Ratio,
    Clarifier Solids Loading, MCRT

  Control Plots                                 3/week       Daily
    Graph 1: Settling Results, Return Sludge
      Cone., MCRT, DO, Aerator Cone.
    Graph 2: Total Sludge Mass (Aerator and
      Clarifier), Wasted Sludge Mass

  Wasting                                       3/week       Daily
    Volume,  Concentration, Mass

Digester:

  DO, Concentration, Temperature, pH            Weekly       2/week
  Waste  Activated Sludge, Digested Sludge       Monthly      2/month
    Volatile  Solids Percentage, Volatile
    Solids Reduction

Chlorine Residual:                              5/week       Daily
 *"Critical"  refers to  periods  of  transition  to  higher loadings and
  during peak loadings  and  periods of  stressed operation, i.e., bulky
  sludge, process out of service,  or major  change  in process control.
                                 98

-------
                                       •FIGURE  5-7

                        PROCESS  CONTROL  TESTING AT  A 950  m3/d
                               CONTACT STABILIZATION POTW*
                          Week of
                          through
 MO/DAY/YR
 DAY OF WEEK

 CENTRIFUGE TEST
   CTC
   RTC
   RSC
   DC

 DSU

 SLUDGE BLANKET TEST
   DTB

 RSFP

 SLUDGE INVENTORY
   CTSU
   RTSU
   CSU
   TSU

 SLUDGE SETTLING TEST

    0 min
    5 min
   30 min
   60 min

 SLUDGE WASTING

   centimeters
   cubic meters
   WSC
   WSU

 SLUDGE HAULING
   loads
   cubic meters
   SC
   SU
             l*=i
                     mg/l
                                            Weekly
                                           Average
SSV
TOCO
SSC  SSV
     TOQO
!  SSC  SSV
j	  TQOO
SSC  SSV
     TDDQ
SSC  SSV
     TOOK)
SSC
SSV
TOGO
SSC
                                                            Weekly
                                                            Total
 WEEKLY CALCULATIONS

   Avg. Waste = Total WSU
   Sludge Age = Avg. TSU * Avg. Waste =
                                                          BODs
                                                          TSS
                                            Avg. Flow

                                              INFLUENT
                                                         m3/d
                                                    EFFLUENT
*Acronyms  for test parameters are; defined on the following  page.
                                            99

-------
                          FIGURE 5-7 (continued)
                       ACRONYMS FOR TEST PARAMETERS
CTC      Contact Tank Concentration
RTC      Reaeration Tank Concentration
RSC      Return Sludge Concentration
DC       Digester Sludge Concentration
DSU=     Digester Sludge Units (mass of sludge)
DTB      Depth to (Sludge) Blanket (in final clarifier)
RSFP     Return Sludge Flow  Percentage (of wastewater flow)
CTSU     Contact Tank Sludge Units (mass of sludge)
RTSU     Reaeration  Tank Sludge  Units (mass of sludge)
CSU      Clarifier Sludge  Units  (mass of sludge)
TSU      Total  Sludge Units  (mass  of  sludge in contact  tank,  reaeration
              tank, and  clarifier)
SSV     Settled  Sludge  Volume (volume of  settled  sludge  in  a settleometer
              jar  after  the indicated  number of minutes)
SSC     Settled  Sludge' Concentration (calculated  concentration  of sludge
              in the  settled  sludge  volume  in  the  settleometer  jar  after
              the  indicated number of  minutes)
 WSC      Waste Sludge Concentration
 WSU      Waste Sludge Units (mass of  sludge wasted)
 SC       Sludge Concentration
 SU       Sludge Units (mass of digested sludge hauled out)
                                     100

-------
Larger activated  sludge  POTWs  require that the  same  parameters  be monitored,
but these plants  are often  designed 'less  conservatively and therefore require
more frequent monitoring  and process  adjustments.    For example,  at a 21,000
nr/d (5.5 mgd)  activated  sludge plant, settling and mass control  tests  were
conducted  once   per  8-hour   shift,!   7   days   per  week.    At  the  contact
stabilization plant mentioned  abovej  sludge settling  and mass  control  tests
were conducted only once per day, 5 days per week.
To  improve  process  control,   all  [activated
monitoring for at least the following:
       SI udge sett! ing
       Total sludge mass control
       Sludge wasting
       Return sludge concentration
       Aeration basin DO control
            sludge  plants  should  include
and flow control
Appendix  I  contains  an  example  process  control  daily data  sheet that  has
proven  to  be  useful  in monitoringj activated  sludge POTWs.   However,  the
specific  tests  and  sampling  frequency  must be  selected for  each  individual
POTW.                                !
     5.7.2  Fixed Film Process Control
The  performance of  fixed film  (trickling  filter  and  RBC) POTWs  is  not  as
critically  affected  by  process  control  adjustments  as  suspended  growth
facilities  (1)(3).   There  are only!a  limited  number of  process  controls  in
fixed  film  systems that can  be  optimized by  a  CCP,  and  the  resulting
improvement in  effluent  quality  is  accordingly  less.   Two areas of fixed film
process control that can be  optimized are return process  stream  loadings and
clarifier performance.
         5.7.2.1  Reducing Return Process Stream Loadings
The  CCP facilitator  should  strive! to  reduce the  organic loading  returned
through  the  plant  from  anaerobic! digestion  and  from  sludge  dewatering
operations.  Disposal of all digested supernatant with the digested sludge can
significantly reduce plant  organic loadings.   This  has  been  implemented most
frequently in smaller POTWs  where  sljudge disposal  is by liquid haul to nearby
farmland.  Another way  to  achieve  organic load reduction is by  filtering the
digester supernatant through a dryinq bed.
                                     !
When  dewatering  digester   sludge  with  a  belt  press,  vacuum  filter,  or
centrifuge, chemical dosages are often optimized to lower costs.   If a low, or
relatively low, solids capture is being accomplished, increased chemical usage
to  increase  capture  and  reduce  return flow  through  the plant  should  be
considered.
                                      101

-------
Since  land disposal  of  anaerobic digester supernatant  or  increased chemical
usage  to  improve  dewatering  capture  can  result  in  significantly  higher
operating  costs,  a  short-term  (e.g.,  one  month)   trial   period   should  be
conducted  before advocating a permanent change in these controls.
         5.7.2.2  Optimizing Clarifier Operation
Optimizing primary clarifier  process  control  will  decrease organic loading on
subsequent  fixed  film  processes.    Optimizing  secondary clarifier  process
control  will   improve  overall  organic  removal  for  any  fixed  film  system.
Organic  removals  in  both primary and  secondary clarifiers can be optimized by
minimizing overflow rates and controlling sludge quantities in the clarifiers.

Overflow  rates  can  be minimized  by eliminating any  unnecessary  flow  through
the  clarifiers.   The  most  common situation  that can  be  addressed by  process
control  occurs  when  trickling  filter  recycle also  goes through  either  the
primary  or  secondary clarifier.   At  normal  organic  loadings  associated with
domestic  secondary  treatment  facilities,  recirculation  does  not  provide
significantly improved organic removals in  fixed film processes (16).  This is
especially true  if  the recirculation  results  in increased  clarifier overflow
rates.    If recirculation does  in  fact increase  soluble BOD removal   in  the
fixed film process and the  existing recirculation  flow pattern is through the
primary   or   secondary   clarifier,  a   facility   modification   to  provide
recirculation  only   through the  fixed  film  process  may  be  justified  (see
Section 5.4).

Keeping  sludge  blankets  and  sludge detention  times  low in both  primary  and
secondary clarifiers also tends  to  optimize organic  removals.   This can often
be accomplished  by  increasing sludge  pumping, but must  not be carried to the
extreme  that  removed  sludge is  so  thin   that  it  adversely  affects  sludge
treatment processes.   Experience; and  judgment of the  CCP facilitator  must be
used to achieve the best compromise.
         5.7.2.3  Fixed Film Testing
Process control monitoring for fixed film facilities is generally simpler than
for suspended growth systems.  It is normally comprised of process loading and
performance monitoring.  The  performance  of  the  primary clarifier,  fixed film
reactor, and  final  clarifier  should  be  monitored on a  routine  basis.   Fixed
film  reactor  performance  can best  be monitored by  measuring   soluble  BOD5
removals.   The  soluble BOD test more  directly addresses the primary function
of  the biological  reactor,  to convert  dissolved  and  colloidal organics  to
microorganism solids.   Measuring soluble 6005  across the fixed  film  reactor
monitors this conversion process.

An  example  process control  summary  sheet  developed  for  a  7,500  m3/d  (2.0
mgd) RBC POTW during a CCP is presented in Appendix J.
                                      102

-------
     5o7.3  ABF Process Control
The  ABF  design contains  elements of  both  suspended  growth  and  fixed  film
facilities as  does ABF process  control.   Sludge character  (settling  rates,
compaction capability,  appearance,  etc.)  is  more like  that  of  fixed  film
sludge in  that wide fluctuations fare  not  common and are not  as dependent on
process control adjustments.   Consequently, overall  sludge return rates  and
diurnal  adjustments are  not  as  critical  in the ABF  system as in  activated
sludge.  The same is true for aerajtion basin DO.  DO must be provided to meet
the  demand in  an ABF system without  special  consideration  for the  residual DO
and its effect on sludge character! (17).   A DO residual  of  2-3 mg/1  is usually
sufficient.                       !
                                  I

The  process  control in an ABF system  that is  similar to an activated sludge
system and  slightly more susceptible  to problems is suspended  growth  sludge
mass control.  Mass control  is vory  critical in an ABF system because a large
fraction of the mass,  usually onej-quarter  to one-half, is  wasted daily.   Any
error  in wasting has a significant effect because the MCRT is usually only 2-4
days.                             j
Process  control  parameters monitored  in  two  ABF  POTWs
Appendix K.                       |
are  presented   in
5.8  Example CCP
An  example  CCP is  difficult  to! present  because many  of  the  performance-
limiting factors are addressed through training, interpersonnel relationships,
weekly data  review, phone consultations, and other activities conducted over a
long  period  of time.   These  activities  do  not lend themselves readily  to an
abbreviated  discussion (18).  As  such, an overview of a CCP is presented based
on the example  CPE presented  in Section 3.9.
     5.8.1  Addressing Performance-Limiting Factors
 The  most  serious  performance-limiting  factors  identified  in  the  CPE  were
 process  control  oriented.    The jmajor  emphasis,  therefore,  of  the  initial
 portion  of  the  CCP  was directed  at  improving  plant  operations  (process
 control).                         i
                                  1
      1.  Operation  (Process Control)
                                  i
      - Process control  testing  to  monitor  sludge  settling, sludge  mass,
       sludge  wasting, sludge return concentration  and flow, and  aeration
       basin DO was  initiated using  the  guidelines  in  Table  5-2.

      - A  process  control   summajry  was  developed and  process   control
       calculations  were implemented as  shown  in  Appendix  I.
                                  I                       '
                                       103

-------
     -Trend  graphs  were  initiated  to   monitor  activated  sludge  mass
       inventory  and  wasting,  and  activated  sludge character  and  return
       concentrations.

     - On-the-job  training  was  provided  in  the  areas  of  biological
       treatment  fundamentals   and   specific  process  control  tasks  and
       monitoring requirements (see Section 5.7)

     - Effluent TSS was monitored closely to detect excess  sludge  losses
       and provide justification for adequate sludge disposal  capability.
Results  of the  improved
sequence of events:
process  control  activities  led  to  the  following
       Operational  tests  showed  that actual  sludge production  averaged
       0.81 kg TSS  produced/kg  BOD5 removed.   It was estimated that  the
       amount of  sludge produced that was  discharged  as  effluent  SS would
       decrease from 40 percent to  10 percent  if  adequate  sludge  disposal
       facilities were  available  and used  properly.   New  sludge  wasting
       requirements  were 0.73 kg  TSS/kg  BOD5 removed.   This  actual  value
       was higher than  the  projected sludge production of  0.65 kg  TSS/kg
       BOD5 removed used  in  the  CPE  example,   further  aggravating  the
       capacity limitation of the  anaerobic digester.

       POTW  administrators  were   presented  with the  sludge  production
       values   and  existing  plant  capabilities   by  using  the  following
       explanation:   "Your  POTW  treats  about  350  million  gallons   of
       wastewater.a year  which results  in about  5.5  million gallons  of
       sludge.  This  sludge must be  disposed  of properly.   The  existing
       aerobic digester' is too small to  handle the  total  sludge  produced.
       This one deficiency negates  a  significant  portion of the  pollution
       control already accomplished in the  rest of the plant.   If you want
       to bring your  plant into compliance  and  obtain  full  benefit from
       the rest   of .the  plant,  additional   acceptable   sludge   handling
       capacity will have  to be  provided."

       After  considering various  options,  including construction, it  was
       decided to  utilize  a contract hauler to  dispose of liquid  sludge  in
       a nearby large  POTW  at a  charge of $15.85/m3  ($0.06/gal).
       The  first  month of  contract,  hauling  resulted  in  a
       sludge   disposal  cost   of   $4,500   and   all   involved
       significant effort to  reduce  this  cost was
       was  made to  increase the concentration  of
       digester by thickening  the  sludge in an old
       the  plant site.   Polymer was used to aid in
       After  several trial tests,  a  polymer was found that"significantly
       improved waste sludge  concentrations from the  "thickening tank."
       The  concentration  fed   to   the  digester was  increased  about 250
       percent  by  adding  20-25 Ib  polymer/ton sludge  solids.    The net
       effect  was  to decrease  supplemental sludge  disposal  cost  by 56
       percent  from the  $4,500/month initially  incurred.
                                   supplemental
                                    believed   a
                         justified.   An  effort
                        the  sludge  fed to the
                         clarifier  available  on
                         the  sludge  thickening.
                                      104

-------
     2.  Design                     I

     - Minor piping changes and  a  polymer feed system had to be  provided
       to use the available tankage|at the plant as a  "thickener."  Major
       design  changes,   such  as  enlarging  the  aerobic  digester,  were
       avoided as a result of  the CCP  efforts.
                                   i
     3.  Maintenance                j
                                   i
     - Suggested  preventive  maintenance  forms  (similar  to  those   in
      Appendix 6) were provided the  plant superintendent during  the CCP.
       However, the lack  of a  documented preventive maintenance  program
       had not been a significant  performance-limiting problem  before  the
       CCP was implemented and did hot become  significant during  the CCP.
       Consequently, emphasis  was placed  on  factors more  directly related
       to performance.              ;

     4.  Administration              >
                                   i

     - Administrators'  familiarity  frith  plant  needs  and  their  ability  to
       make appropriate  decisions regarding the plant was  increased during
       the CCP by explaining procesjs  fundamentals at the  plant, providing
       oral status reports., and  involving them in  correction  of  the sludge
       capacity deficiency.
     5.8.2  Plant Performance
Plant performance was improved dramatically by implementation of the  CCP.
results are summarized below:      J
                                   i
                                                        Eff1uent
                                                          TSS
                                                                           The
              Before CCP
                Reported
                Estimated Actual

              After CCP
                Actual
                                           14
                                           44
                                           14
                                                          mg/1
15
75
17
The reported values prior to the  CCP were collected only during  periods  when
the clarifiers were not bulking sludge.   The estimated actual  effluent quality
was projected by comparing sludge wasted  prior  to the CCP with  sludge  wasted
after the CCP was  initiated.   The difference  in  these values  was projected to
have  been  consistently lost  from rthe  system in  the  plant  effluent  during
periods  of  bulking sludge.   Actual  results  are  based on proper  testing  and
represent a true picture of plant performance after the CCP  was initiated.
                                      105

-------
     5.8.3  CCP Costs
The costs for  the  example CPE and CCP described  in  Sections  3.9 and 5.8  are
summarized below:
           CPE Consultant
           CCP Consultant
           Test Equipment
           Polymer Addition Equipment
           Sludge Disposal
           Polymer

           Total
                      $ 3,500 (one-time)
                       12,000 (one-time)
                          700 (one-time)
                          550 (one-time)
                       26,500 (annual)
                        2,500 (annual)

                      $45,750 (first year)
                      $29,000 (ongoing annual costs)
     5.8.4  Summary
This  example illustrates  several  important  points of  the  CCP approach  and
-includes  several   problems and  associated  solutions  that  occur  frequently
during CCP implementation.  These are:

     - The  primary objective of a CCP  is  attaining adequate performance.
       The  second is minimizing  costs  within  the  framework of  adequate
       treatment.

     - Some  potential performance-limiting factors  identified during a CPE
       are  later  found  to be incorrect or  less significant  when  actually
       eliminating problems with a  CCP.    This was true  of the  digester
       design limitations  in this plant.

     - The  degree  of administrative  support  is  sometimes  difficult  to
       assess during  a CPE but often  becomes  a  major concern during a CCP.
       This  was true when the  administrators  were faced  with  supporting
       dramatically increased sludge  handling costs in the example CCP.
        A Type  2
        upgrade.
POTW was  brought into  compliance  without a major  plant
 5.9  CCP Results

                                  i
 The success of conducting  CCP  activities  can  often  be measured by a variety of
 parameters,  such  as  improved  operator  capability,  cost  savings,  improved
 maintenance, etc.    However,  the true  success  of a CCP  should  be documented
 improved performance  to  the  degree  that the  plant  has achieved compliance.
 Given this measure, the results  of a successful CCP effort  should  be easily
 depicted in  graphical  form.   Results  from  an  actual  CCP  are  presented in
 Figure 5-8.  It is desirable to present CCP results in this format.
                                       106

-------
     Q-
     O
     O
     OO
     OO
     UJ
     O
     O
     ra
     oo
     O
     o:
     o;
     CD
CO
LD   LU
     Q_
CD
     O

     a.

     i—i

     U_
     O


     O
     i—i

     •=c
      oo
      LU
      Q.
      •=c
      n;
      CD
                                                                                               o>
                                         l/Blli 'UOHBJ1.U90UOO
                                                 107

-------
5.10  References

When an NTIS number is cited in a reference, that reference is available from:

         National Technical Information Service
         5285 Port Royal Road
         Springfield, VA 22161
         (703) 487-4650

 1.  Schultz,  J.  R.,   B.  A.  Hegg,  and  C.   S.  Zickefoose.    Colorado  CCP
     Demonstration  and  Development  of Areawide  Compliance  Strategy.   Draft
     Report,  U.S.  Environmental  Protection  Agency,  Municipal  Environmental
     Research Laboratory, Cincinnati, OH, 1984.

 2.  Hegg, B.  A.,  K.  L. Rakness, and  J.  R.  Schultz.   Evaluation of Operation
     and Maintenance  Factors  Limiting Municipal  Wastewater  Treatment  Plant
     Performance.   EPA-600/2-79-0.34,  NTIS  No. PB-300331, U.S.  Environmental
     Protection   Agency,   Municipal   Environmental    Research   Laboratory,
     Cincinnati, OH, 1979.

 3.  Hegg, B. A., K. L.  Rakness,  J.  R. Schultz, and L.  D. Demers.  Evaluation
     of  Operation  and  Maintenance  Factors  Limiting  Municipal  Wastewater
     Treatment  Plant Performance  -  Phase  II.    EPA-600/2-80-129,   NTIS  No.
     PB-81-112864,   U.S.    Environmental   Protection    Agency,    Municipal
     Environmental Research Laboratory, Cincinnati, OH,  1980.

 4.  Gray, A. C., Jr.,  P. E. Paul, and H. D. Roberts.   Evaluation of Operation
     and Maintenance  Factors Limiting  Biological  Wastewater  Treatment  Plant
     Performance.   EPA-600/2-79-087,  NTIS  No. PB-297491, U.S.  Environmental
     Protection   Agency,   Municipal   Environmental    Research   Laboratory,
     Cincinnati, OH, 1979.

 5.  Maintenance  Management  Systems  for  Municipal   Wastewater  Facilities.
     EPA-430/9-74-004,   NTIS  No.  PB-256611,  U.S..  Environmental  Protection
     Agency, Office of Water Program Operations, Washington,  DC, 1973.

 6.  Plant  Maintenance  Program.   Manual  of  Practice  OM-3,  Water  Pollution
     Control Federation, Washington, DC, 1982.

 7.  Roberts, H. D., A.  C. Gray, Jr., and P. E. Paul.   Model  Protocol for the
     Comprehensive  Evaluation  of Publicly  Owned  Treatment  Works Performance
     and   Operation.      EPA-600/2-82-015,   NTIS  No.   PB-82-180480,   U.S.
     Environmental   Protection  Agency,   Municipal   Environmental   Research
     Laboratory, Cincinnati, OH, 1981.

 8.  Jenkins,  D.,  M.   Sezgin,   and   D0   S.  Parker.    A  Unified  Theory  of
     Filamentous  Activated  Sludge  Bulking.    Presented  at  the 49th  Annual
     Conference, Water Pollution Control Federation, Minneapolis, MN,  1976.

 9.  Updated Summary of  the  Operational  Control Procedures for  the  Activated
     Sludge  Process.     EW006973,   U.S.   Environmental   Protection  -Agency,
     Instructional Resources Center,  Columbus, OH.
                                      108

-------
10.   Jenkins, D. and W. E. Garrison.  Control of Activated Sludge by Mean Cell
     Residence Time.  JWPCF 40(11)11905-1919, 1968.

11.   Palm J.  C., D.  Jenkins, and D.  S.  Parker.   The  Relationship  Between
     Organic Loading, Dissolved Oxygen Concentration, and Sludge Settleabil ity
     in the Completely-Mixed Activated Sludge Process.  Paper presented at the
     51st Annual Conference,  Water Pollution Control  Federation, Anaheim, CA,
     1978.                         |
                                   i
                                   i
12.   Wooley, J.  F.   Oxygen  Uptake1:  Operational  Control  Tests  for Wastewater
     Treatment  Facilities.    EW008446,  U.S.  Environmental  Protection  Agency,
     Instructional  Resources Center, Columbus, OH, 1981.
                   i                i
13.   McKinney,  R.  E.    Testing  Aeration  Equipment in  Conventional  Activated
     Sludge Plants.  JWPCF 53(l):4p-58, 1981.

14.   Process  Control  Manual  forj Aerobic  Biological  Wastewater  Treatment
     Facilities.   EPA-430/9-77-006,  NTIS No.  PB-279474,  U.S.  Environmental
     Protection  Agency,  Office of| Water Program  Operations,  Washington, DC,
     1977.                         i
                                   i
15.   Gulp, G. L..and N. F. Helm.   [Field Manual  for Performance Evaluation and
     Troubleshooting    at   Municipal    Wastewater    Treatment   Facilities.
     EPA-430/9-78-001,  NTIS  No.  PB-279448,  U.S.  Environmental  Protection
     Agency, Office of Water Program Operations, Washington, DC, 1978.

16.   Germain, J.  E.   Economic Treatment of Domestic  Waste by Plastic-Medium
     Trickling Filters.  JWPCF 38{£):192-203, 1966.
                                   i
                                   i
17.   Rakness,  K.  L.,  J.  R.  Schultz,  B.  A.  Hegg,  J.  C.  Cranor, and  R.  A.
     Nisbet.    Full  Scale  Evaluation  of  Activated  Bio-Filter  Wastewater
     Treatment  Process.    EPA  6J)0/2-82-057,  NTIS  No.   PB-82-227505,  U.S.
     Environmental   Protection  Agency,   Municipal    Environmental   Research
     Laboratory, Cincinnati, OH,  1J382.

18.   Hegg, B. A., K.  L.  Rakness,  and J. R.  Schultz.   A Demonstrated Approach
     for  Improving  Performance   and  Reliability  of  Biological  Wastewater
     Treatment   Plants.     EPA-600/2-79-035,   NTIS   No.   PB-300476,   U.S.
     Environmental   Protection  Algency,   Municipal    Environmental   Research
     Laboratory, Cincinnati, OH,  1J979.
                                       109

-------
                     APPENDIX A
CPE CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM,  CHECKLIST, AND GUIDELINES
          FOR PERFORMANCE-LIMITING  FACTORS
                        no

-------
 CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM FOR PRIORITIZING PERFORMANCE-LIMITING FACTORS
Rating
  Adverse Effect of Factor on Plant Performance
  A
'  B
Major effect!on a long-term repetitive basis
Minimum effect on  a routine basis or  major effect on
a periodic basis
Minor effect!
                                 Ill

-------
CHECKLIST OF PERFORMANCE-LIMITING FACTORS
Factor 1
A. ADMINISTRATION
1. Plant Administrators
a. Policies
b. Familiarity with
Plant Needs
2. Plant Staff
a. Manpower
1) Number
2) Plant Coverage
b. Morale i
1) Motivation
2) Pay
3) Supervision
4) Working Conditions
c. Productivity
d. Personnel Turnover
3. Financial
a. Insufficient Funding
b. Unnecessary Expenditures
c. Bond Indebtedness
B. MAINTENANCE
1. General
a. Housekeeping
b. Equipment Age >
Rating























Comments























                   112

-------
CHECKLIST OF PERFORMANCE-LIMITING FACTORS (continued)
Factor \
i
c. Scheduling & Recording
d. Manpower !
2. Preventive
a. Lack of Program
b. References Available
c. Spare Parts Inventory
d. Workload Distribution
3. Emergency
a. Staff Expertise
b. Critical Parts
Procurement
c. Technical Guidance
C. DESIGN
1. Plant Loading
a. Organic
b. Hydraulic
c. Industrial
d. Toxic i
e. Seasonal Variation
f. Infiltration/ Inflow
g. Return Process Streams
2. Unit Design Adequacy
a. Preliminary
i
b. Primary
c. Secondary
Rating
























Comments









-














                         113

-------
CHECKLIST OF PERFORMANCE-LIMITING FACTORS (continued)
Factor
1) Process Flexibility
2) Process
Controllability
3) "Aerator"
4) Clarifier
d. Advanced Waste Treatment
1)
2)
3)
4)
e. Disinfection
f. Sludge Wasting
Capability
g. Sludge Treatment
h. Ultimate Sludge
Disposal
3. Miscellaneous
a. Plant Location
b. Unit Process Layout
c. Lack of Unit Bypass
d. Hydraulic Profile
1) Flow Backup
2) Submerged Weirs
3) Flow Proportioning
to Units
e. Alarm Systems
f. Alternate Power Source
g. Process Automation
Rating










-













Comments
























                         114

-------
CHECKLIST OF PERFORMANCE-LIMITING FACTORS (continued)
Factor
1) Monitoring
2) Control
h. Lack of Standby Units
for Key Equipment •
i . Laboratory Space and
Equipment
j. Process Accessibility
for Samplinq
k. Equipment Accessibility
for Maintenance i
1. Plant Inoperability Due
To Weather 1
m.
i
n.
D. OPERATION
1. Staff Qualifications
i
a. Ability :
1) Aptitude
2) Level of Education i
b. Certification
1) Level of
Certification
2) Training
c. Sewage Treatment
Understanding '
d. Insufficient Time on
the Job (Green Crew)
2. Testing
i
a. Performance Monitoring
b. Process Control Testing
3. Process Control Adjustments
Rating























Comments























                         115

-------
CHECKLIST OF PERFORMANCE-LIMITING FACTORS (continued)
Factor
a. Operator Application of
Concepts and Testing to
Process Control
b. Technical Guidance
4. O&M Manual
a. Adequacy
b. Use by Operators
5. Miscellaneous ;
a. Equipment Malfunction
b. Shift Staffing Adequacy ;
(Operations)
c.
d.
e.
f.
g-
h.
i.
Rating















Comments















                         116

-------
          GUIDELINES FOR INTERPRETING PERFORMANCE-LIMITING FACTORS
         Category
             Explanation
A. ADMINISTRATION

   1. Plant Administrators

      a. Policies
      b. Familiarity with
         Plant Needs
   2. Plant Staff

      a. Manpower

         1) Number
         2) Plant Coverage
jDo  the  appropriate  staff  members  have
the authority  to  make required decisions
regarding operation (e.g., adjust valve),
.maintenance  (e.g.,   hire  electrician),
iand/or   administration   (e.g.,  purchase
;cr1t1cal  piece of  equipment)  decisions,
or   do   the   administration   policies
require  a strict  adherence  to  a  "chain
of  command"  (which  has  caused  critical
decisions to  be delayed  and  in  turn has
[affected     plant    performance     and
'reliability)?    Does   any   established
jadminl strati ve    policy   limit   plant
[performance?

JDo the administrators have  a  first-hand
(knowledge  of   plant  needs through  plant
jvisits, discussions with operators, etc.?
If  not,  has this  been  a cause of  poor
jplant    performance    and    reliability
•through poor budget decisions, poor staff
morale,  poor   operation and  maintenance
procedures, poor design decisions,  etc.?
i
;Does a limited number  of  people  employed
have a detrimental  effect on plant oper-
ations (e.g.,  not getting  the necessary
Work done)?

'Does the  time  period  of  plant operation
icause  unnecessary   operational   adjust-
ments  to  be made  or  inefficient  use of
[the number  of  people on the staff (e.g.,
^operators getting in each other's way)?
                                    117

-------
  b. Morale

     1) Motivation



     2) Pay
      3) Supervision




      4) Working  Conditions



   c.  Productivity




   d.  Personnel  Turnover




3. Financial

   a.  Insufficient Funding
   b. Unnecessary
      Expenditures
   c. Bond Indebtedness
Does the  plant  staff want to  do a good
job   because   they   are  motivated   by
self-satisfaction?

Does  a   low  payscale   discourage  more
highly  qualified  persons  from  applying
for   operator    positions    or   cause
operators   to   leave   after  they   are
trained?

Does  the  working  relationship  of  the
plant   superintendent   and  operator  or
supervisor  and  operator  cause  adverse
operator  incentive?

Does a  poor working  environment  create  a
condition  for more  "sloppy  work habits"
and lower operator morale?

Does  the plant  staff conduct  the daily
operation  and  maintenance  tasks  in  an
efficient  manner?   Is   time  used  effi-
ciently?

Does  a  high  personnel  turnover  rate
cause    operation   and/or   maintenance
problems  that affect process  performance
or reliability?
 Does  the  lack  of  available  funds  cause
 poor    salary   schedules,    insufficient
 stock  of   spare  parts  that  results  in
 delays  1n  equipment  repair,  insufficient
 capital outlay  for  improvements,  etc.?

 Does  the manner in  which  available funds
 are dispersed cause problems  in  obtaining
 needed  equipment,  staff, etc.?   Are funds
 spent  on  lower   priority   items   while
 needed,   higher   priority   items  are
 unfunded?

 Does  the  annual  bond debt payment  limit
 the  amount  of  funds available  for other
 needed   items  such  as   equipment,  staff,
 etc.?
                                 118

-------
B. MAINTENANCE

   1.  General
      a. Housekeeping
      b. Equipment Age
      c. Scheduling and
         Recording
      d. Manpower
   2. Preventive

      a.  Lack of Program
      b.  References Available
      c.  Spare Parts Inventory
      d.  Workload Distribution
Does   a   lack   of   good   housekeeping
procedures  (e.g.,  grit  channel cleaning;
bar screen  cleaning;  unkempt,  untidy, or
cluttered  working environment)  cause an
excessive equipment failure rate?

Does the age or  outdatedness of  critical
pieces   of  equipment   cause   excessive
equipment   downtime   and/or  Inefficient
process  performance  and reliability  (due
to unavailability of replacement parts)?

Does the absence  or lack of an effective
maintenance   scheduling  and   recording
procedure   create  a  condition   for  an
erratic  preventive  maintenance  program
that  results  in  unnecessary  equipment
failure?

Does  the  lack  of  adequate  maintenance
manpower   result  in   preventive   main-
tenance  functions (to  prevent equipment
breakdown)  not  being  completed  or  in
emergency    equipment    repairs    being
delayed?
Does the absence or  lack  of  an  effective
maintenance  program  cause   unnecessary
equipment failures or excessive downtime
that  results  in  plant  performance  or
reliability?

Does the absence or  lack of good equip-
ment reference  sources  cause unnecessary
equipment  failure  and/or  downtime  for
repairs (includes maintenance  portion of
O&M manual)?

Does  a  critically  low  or  nonexistent
spare  parts  Inventory  cause  unnecessary
long  delays  1n  equipment  repairs  that
result 1n degraded process performance?

Does  uneven distribution  of  preventive
maintenance tasks cause  neglect of  other
important duties at  certain  times  of the
month or year?
                                    119

-------
   3.  Emergency

      a.  Staff Expertise
      b.  Critical  Parts
         Procurement
      c. Technical Guidance




C. DESIGN

   1. Plant Loading
      a. Organic

      b. Hydraulic

      c. Industrial

      d. Toxic

      e. Seasonal Variation

      f. Infiltration/Inflow
      g. Return Process
         Streams
   2. Unit Design Adequacy

      a.  Preliminary
Does the  plant  staff have the  necessary
expertise   to    keep   the    equipment
operating and  to make  smaller  equipment
repairs when necessary?

Do delays  1n  getting  replacement parts
cause   extended   periods  of   equipment
downtime?

If  technical  guidance  for repairing  or
Installing  equipment   is   necessary  to
decrease   equipment   downtime,    is   it
^available and retained?
iDoes  the  presence  of  "shock"  loading
^characteristics  over and above  what the
iplant  was  designed  for,  or  over  and
above  what 1s  thought  to  be  tolerable,
cause  degraded  process  performance  by
one or  more  of the loadings (a-e) listed
below?
IDoes   excessive   infiltration  or   inflow
 cause    degraded   process   performance
 because   the  plant  cannot  handle  the
 extra  flow?

 Does   excessive   volume  and/or  a  highly
iorganic   or   toxic   return  process  flow
 stream cause adverse  effects  on process
 performance,.equipment problems, etc.?
 Do the  design features  of  any  prelim-
 inary  treatment   unit   cause  upsets   in
 downstream equipment wear  and tear that
 has  led to degraded  plant performance?
                                     120

-------
b. Primary
c. Secondary

   1) Process
      Flexibility
   2) Process
      Controllability
   3) "Aerator"
   4) Clarifier
d. Advanced Waste
   Treatment
Does  the shape  or  location of  the unit
contribute  to  its accomplishing the task
;of  primary  treatment?   Does  the  unit
ihave  any design  problem area  within   it
that  has caused  it to perform poorly?
jDoes   the    unavailability  of  adequate
valves,   piping,   etc.,    limit   plant
performance  and  reliability  when  other
modes  of  operation of the existing plant
ican  be utilized  to  improve  performance
;(e.g., operate  activated sludge plant in
jplug,  step,   or  contact   stabilization
imode;   operate   trickling   filter  with
constant   hydraulic   loading  or  recir-
culation  ratio;  discharge good secondary
i treatment   effluent   as  opposed   to  a
degraded  "polishing pond" effluent)?

iDo  the existing process control features
Iprovide adequate adjustment  and measure-
!ment  over  the  appropriate  flows  (e.g.,
jreturn sludge)  in  the range necessary to
(optimize  process  performance,  or  1s the
iflow  difficult  to adjust,  variable once
adjusted,  not measured  and   recorded, not
jeasily measurable, etc.?
jDoes  the type, size,  shape,  or location
of    the    "aerator"    (aeration   basin,
'trickling  filter,  RBC,  etc.)  hinder  its
'ability  to  adequately treat  the sewage
and   provide  for  stable  operation?    Is
I oxygen transfer capacity  inadequate?

Does   a   deficient   design   cause   poor
; sedimentation  due to  the size, type,  or
|depth of   the  clarifier;  placement  or
length    of   the    weirs;    or   other
'miscellaneous problems?
I
! Advanced  waste  treatment is any process
;of  wastewater  treatment that  upgrades
water quality to  meet specific effluent
i limits  that  cannot  be  met   by  conven-
|tional  primary  and  secondary treatment
jprocesses   (I.e.,  nitrification  towers,
'chemical       treatment,      multimedia
,f liters).   (Space  1s  available   in   the
'Checklist    to    accommodate   advanced
processes encountered  during the CPE.)
                              121

-------
   e.  Disinfection
   f.  Sludge Wasting
      Capability
   g.  Sludge Treatment
   h. Ultimate Sludge
      Disposal
3. Miscellaneous
   a. Plant Location
   b. Unit Process Layout
Does the  shape or  location  of the  unit
contribute  to  its  accomplishing  disin-
fection of  the wastewater  (i.e.,  proper
mixing,   detention   time,   feed   rates,
feeding   rates   proportional  to   flow,
etc.)?

Does the plant have sludge wasting facil-
ities?   If  so,  can  desired  volume  of
sludge be wasted?   Can  sludge wasting be
adequately    controlled?     Can    sludge
wasted   be   sampled   without   extreme
difficulty?

Does  the  type or  size  of  the   sludge
treatment     process     hinder    sludge
stabilization   (once   sludge  has   been
removed  from  the  wastewater  treatment
system),    thereby    causing    process
operation problems  (e.g.,  odors,  limited
sludge wasting, etc.)?

Is the ultimate sludge  disposal  program,
including  facilities  and  disposal  area,
of sufficient size and type to adequately
handle  the  sludge  production  from  the
plant?   Are  there  any  specific  areas
that limit  ultimate  sludge disposal  such
as  seasonal  weather  variations  or  crop
harvesting?

The   design   "miscellaneous"   category
covers  areas  of  design   inadequacy  not
specified    in    the    previous    design
categories.   (Space  is available  in the
Checklist   to   accommodate   additional
items not listed.)

Does a poor plant location or poor roads
leading  into  the  plant  cause  it to be
inaccessible  during  certain periods  of
the  year  (e.g., winter)  for chemical or
equipment   delivery   or   for   routine
operation?

Does  the arrangement  of  the unit  pro-
cesses  cause inefficient  utilization of
operator's   time   for  checking   various
processes,   collecting   samples,   making
adjustments,  etc.?
                                 122

-------
r
               c.  Lack  of  Unit  Bypass
               d.  Hydraulic  Profile

                  1)  Flow Backup
                  2)  Submerged Weirs
                  3)  Flow Proportioning
                     to Units
               e.  Alarm Systems
               f. Alternate Power
                  Source
               g. Process Automation

                  1) Monitoring
i Does the lack of  a  unit bypass 1) cause
I plant upset and long-term  poor treatment
iwhen  a  short-term  bypass   could   have
jminimized   pollutional    load   to    the
i receiving  waters;  2)   cause  necessary
j preventive   or   emergency   maintenance
I items to be  cancelled  or delayed; or 3)
I cause more  than  one  unit to  be out  of
i service when maintaining only one unit?
 Does  an  insufficient  hydraulic  profile
 cause  ground  flooding  or  flooding  of
 upstream units,  except clarifiers?   Does
 periodic release of  backed-up  flow  cause
 hydraulic surge?

 Does  an  insufficient  hydraulic  profile
 cause  flooding  of   clarifiers  and  sub-
 merged clarifier weirs?

 Does  inadequate  flow  proportioning  or
 flow  splitting  to  duplicate units  cause
 problems or  partial  unit  overloads  that
 degrade   effluent    quality  or   hinder
 achievement     of      optimum     process
 performance?

 Does the absence or  inadequacy  of a  good
 alarm  system   for   critical   pieces  of
 equipment  cause   unnecessary   equipment
 failure  or  in  any  way  cause  degraded
 process performance?

 Does  the absence  of an alternate  power
 source cause problems  in  plant operation
 leading to degraded plant performance?
i Does   the  lack   of  needed   automatic
i monitoring  devices  (DO meter,  pH  meter,
 etc.)  cause excessive  operator time  to
i watch  for  slug  loads or  process upset to
 occur  because  of  slug  loads?   Does  the
i breakdown   or   improper   workings   of
, automated   process   monitoring  features
i cause  disruption  of  automated  control
 features  and   subsequent  degradation  of
 process performance?
                                             123

-------
         2) Control
      h. Lack of Standby
         Units for Key
         Equipment
      1.  Laboratory Space
         and Equipment
      j. Process
         Accessibility
         for Sampling
      k. Equipment
         Accessibility
         for Maintenance
      1. Plant InoperabiHty
         Due To Weather
D. OPERATION

   1. Staff Qualifications

      a. Ability

         1) Aptitude
Does  the  lack  of  a  needed  automatic
control   device    (time    clock,    flow
activated    controls,     etc.)     cause
excessive operator  time, to make  process
control  changes  or necessary changes  to
be  cancelled   or  delayed?    Does   the
breakdown  or  the  improper  workings  of
automatic    control    features    cause
degradation of process performance?

Does  the lack  of standby  units  for key
equipment  cause   degraded  process per-
formance  during  breakdown  or  necessary
preventive   maintenance   items   to   be
cancelled or delayed?

Does   the   absence  of   an  adequately
equipped    laboratory     limit     plant
performance  by the  lack  of  operational
testing and performance monitoring?

Does   the  inaccessibility   of  various
process   flow   streams  (e.g.,  recycle
streams)  for   sampling   prevent   needed
information from being obtained?

Does   the  inaccessibility   of  various
pieces  of   equipment   cause  extensive
downtime  or  difficulty in making  needed
repairs or adjustments?

Are certain  units in the plant extremely
vulnerable  to  weather   changes   (e.g.,
cold  temperatures)  and,  as such,  do  not
operate  at  all  or  do  not  operate  as
efficiently as  necessary  to  achieve  the
required performance?
Does the  lack of  capacity for  learning
or  understanding  new  ideas  by  critical
staff members  cause  poor  O&M  decisions
leading  to  poor  plant  performance  or
reliability?
                                    124

-------
      2) Level of
         Education
   b. Certification

      1) Level of
         Certification
      2) Training
   c. Sewage Treatment
      Understanding
   d. Insufficient Time
      on Job (Green Crew)
2. Testing

   a. Performance
      Monitoring
   b. Process Control
      Testing
3. Process Control
   Adjustments

   a. Operator Application
      of Concepts and
      Testing to Process
      Control
  Does  a low level  of  education   cause  poor
  O&M  decisions?   Does  a  high  level  of
  education   or   a   lack   of    process
  understanding cause  needed  training to
  be overlooked?
!  Does   the  lack   of   adequately certified
i  operators  cause  poor  process   control
|  decisions?
i
i
,  Does   the   operator's   inattendance   at
;  available  training  programs  cause  poor
i  process  control  decisions?

  Is the operator's  lack  of  understanding
  of  sewage  treatment,   in   general,   a
  factor in poor operational  decisions  and
  poor  plant performance or  reliability?

  Does   the short   time  on  the  job  cause
  improper process  control  adjustments  to
  be made  (e.g.,   opening  or   closing  a
  wrong valve,  turning  on or off a  wrong
  pump,  etc.)?
  Are  the   required   monitoring  tests  being
  completed   in   compliance   with   the
  discharge  permit   and  are   they   truly
  representative of  plant  performance?

  Does  the absence   or  wrong  type of pro-
  cess  control   testing   cause  improper
  operational  control decisions  to be  made?
  Is  the  operator deficient  in the applica-
  tion    of   his/her  knowledge  of  sewage
  treatment and  interpretation of process
  control   testing   to   process   control
  adjustments?
                                 125

-------
   b.  Technical  Guidance
4. O&M Manual

   a. Adequacy



   b. Use by the Operator




5. Miscellaneous
   a. Equipment
      Malfunction

   b. Shift Staffing
      Adequacy (Operations)
Does    false    operational    information
'received   from   a  technical  consultant
cause  improper  operational  decisions  to
;be  continued?  Does  a  technical  person
(e.g.,    design    engineer,    equipment
representative,    State    trainer    or
inspector)   fail   to   address   obvious
operational  deficiencies while  being  in
:a position to correct the problem?
 Does   a   poor  O&M  manual  used  by  the
 operator   result  in   poor  or   improper
 operational  decisions?

 Does  a good O&M manual  not used by  the
 operator  cause  poor  process  control and
 poor   treatment   that  could  have   been
 avoided?

 The  operation  "miscellaneous"   category
 deals  with   any  pertinent   operational
 information not  covered  in the  previous
 operational   sections.      (Space     is
 available  in  the  Checklist   to accom-
 modate additional items  not listed.)

 Does   malfunctioning   equipment cause de-
 teriorated process  performance?

 Does   the improper distribution  of  ade-
 quate manpower  prevent  process  controls
 from being  made  or made at inappropriate
 times,   resulting  in   poor   plant   per-
 formance?
                                  126

-------
                        APPENDIX B
CPE SUMMARY SHEET FOR RANKING PERFORMANCE-LIMITING FACTORS
                           127

-------
         CPE SUMMARY SHEET FOR RANKING PERFORMANCE-LIMITING FACTORS
Plant Name/Location
CPE Performed by	
Date
Plant Type:
Design Flow:
Actual Flow:
Year Plant Built:
Year of Most Recent Upgrade:
Plant Performance Summary:
RANKING TABLE
Ranking
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Performance-Limiting Factors



I


1
i
!
t





                                    128

-------
                          CPE SUMMARY SHEET TERMS
PLANT TYPE
DESIGN FLOW


ACTUAL FLOW





YEAR PLANT BUILT


YEAR OF MOST RECENT UPGRADE




PLANT PERFORMANCE SUMMARY




RANKING TABLE




RANKING




PERFORMANCE-LIMITING FACTORS
  Brief  but  specific  description  of type
  of   plant  (e.g.,   two-stage  trickling
  filter   with   anaerobic   digester   or
  extended  aeration activated  sludge with
  polishing   pond   and   without    sludge
  digestion).

  Plant design  flow rate  as  of  most recent
  upgrade.

  Wastewater    flow   rate   for   current
  operating   condition   (e.g.,   for  past
I  year).     Also,    significant    seasonal
  variation in  flows should be  noted.
  Year   initial
  operation.
units   were   put   into
  Year  last  additional  major  units  were
  put   into  operation   (e.g.,  digester,
  chlorine  contact chamber, etc.).

  Brief  description  of  plant  performance
  as  related  to  present  and  anticipated
  treatment requirements.

  In descending  order,  a  list of the major
  causes  of  decreased   plant  performance
  and reliability.

  Causes  of  decreased   plant  performance
  and  reliability,  with  the  most critical
  ones listed first.
  Categories   listed
  (Appendix A).
         the   Checklist
                                    129

-------
    APPENDIX C
EXAMPLE CPE REPORT
       130

-------
               RESULTS OF A CPE |AT THE SPRINGFIELD, KS, POTW
 FACILITY BACKGROUND             j
                                i
 The  Springfield  POTW is  a  rotating  biological  contactor  (RBC)  type of
 treatment  plant  designed  for an  average daily  wastewater flow  of 7,600
 mVd   (2.0   mgd).   The   plant j was  originally  completed  as  a   primary
 treatment plant in  1965  and upgraded for secondary treatment in 1980.  The
 plant  serves  the  City  of  Springfield  with  an  estimated population of
 9,000.   A  railcar  washing operation  is  thought  to  be the source  of the
 only significant  industrial waste,  but  sampling has not confirmed this.
                 i               i
 Plant  records  indicated  that wa;stewater  flows had been averaging close to
 design  flow;  however, flow calibration during the CPE indicated that  flow
 was  actually about  4,500 m3/d  (1.2 mgd),  or only  60 percent  of design
 flow.   Current  organic loading iwas estimated  to  also  be  about 60  percent
 of design.                      j

 The Springfield plant  consists of the following unit processes:

     - Vortex grit chamber
     - Mechanical bar  screen
     - 23-cm (9-in)  Parshall  flume
     - Lift station             j
     - One 18-m (60-ft) diameter primary  clarifier
     - Four-stage RBCs (12 shafts)
     - Two 6 x 33 m  (20 x 110 ft) secondary clarifiers
     - Two-cell chlorine contact chamber
     - Two 11-m (35-ft) diameter! anaerobic digesters (Note; During
       the CPE, the  second-stage digester was not  in service.)
     - 2,800 m2 (30,000 sq ft) drying beds

 The  Springfield  plant is  required to meet  standard  secondary treatment
 effluent  requirements with  20,!000/40,000  fecal  coliform limits.   NPDES
 monitoring  data  indicate  performance  of  the  plant  has generally  been
 within  standards;, but individual   analyses  indicate  erratic  performance.
 During  the  CPE,  sludge  was  bulking from both  the primary and secondary
 clarifiers.
MAJOR UNIT PROCESS EVALUATION   i

Major  plant  processes  were  evaluated  for  their  capacity to  adequately
treat current loadings  and the (general  applicability of a  CCP  to improve
performance.   Current  hydraulic  loadings were  estimated  with  flow  data
measured  during  the CPE.   Organic  loading  on  the  RBC  as  measured  by
•soluble  BODs was  estimated  usftng 30  percent total  BOD  removal in  the
primary  clarifier and  50  percent  of the  primary effluent  total BOD  as
soluble BOD.                    !
                                    131

-------
The ability  to  handle current  loads  was  assessed using a  numerical  point
system, which resulted in the plant's  being  categorized  Type  1,  2,  or 3 as
described below:                  ;
                                  i
     - Type 1.   Loadings  are conservatively  low,  but  performance problems
       could   be   alleviated   with    training    and/or   minor   facility
       modifications.

     - Type 2.   Loadings  are not conservatively  low but also not  so high
       as to preclude improved performance from existing facilities.

     - Type  3.   Loadings  are so high  in  relation to  capacity that  it is
       not  considered reasonably  possible  to  consistently  meet effluent
       requirements without a major facility upgrade.
                                  !
The results of the major process evaluation are shown in Table C-l.
                                 TABLE C-l

            SPRINGFIELD, KS, POTW MAJOR UNIT PROCESS EVALUATION

                                         Points             Assessed Type
  Aerator
  Secondary Clar1f1er
  Sludge Handling Capability
  Total of Major Processes
26
18
_5
49
1
1
2
1
 As  shown 1n Table C-l,  the  aerator,  secondary clarifier, and the total of
 major processes  all  received  sufficient  points  to  receive   a  Type  1
 classification.    Sludge    handling    capability    received   a   Type   2
 classification.    The  major  limitation  regarding  sludge  handling  was
 ultimate sludge disposal capability  in  winter.

 The evaluation of major unit processes indicates that sludge handling will
 likely require supplemental  capacity,  but the  other major processes have
 adequate capacity.   In general,! the  CCP  approach  appears  applicable if
 additional  ultimate  sludge disposal  capacity  can be  provided.

 The potential  capacity of major unit processes  in the Springfield plant is
 Illustrated 1n Table  C-2.   The horizontal bar  graph associated with each
 major process  depicts the  potential  capacity  of  that process.

 Primary  clarlflers,   secondary  clarlflers,  and anaerobic digesters are all
 believed to have capacities  a  little greater than design capacities.  The
 chlorine contact basin  has  capacity sufficient  for design flows; however,
                                     132

-------
            -i!SI
            — o   8
                                  £   5D
                                            o
£•8
-8.=
                                                        2
                                                         ,
                                          l
                                          1
                                        «
                                      8 jj
    o
    OL
—I   O
00   ol
    co
85


oTCJ
              «CJ
               « CM




              § £
              8
                00
                *

                o
                                                      
                       1-

                       -8
                                                       2
                                                       s.
           ID




           1^

           I/I <0







           **
                               133

-------
1t appears that  the  RBCs may not have quite  enough  capacity to adequately
treat design loadings.   RBC  capacity  should be  evaluated  as  flows approach
design.

The  ultimate  sludge disposal  capability  as  represented  by  the  sludge
drying beds  appears  to  be the only major  process  that  will  be  limiting at
current  flows.   The  limitation 1n  ultimate  sludge disposal   1s  during the
winter when the drying beds freeze and do not dry.


PERFORMANCE-LIMITING FACTORS   :

During the  CPE,  the plant's  performance-limiting  factors In the areas of
design,  administration,  operation,  and maintenance were Identified.  These
factors  are listed below and the most significant ones briefly discussed.

     1.  Sewage   Treatment   Understanding   (Operation).    A   lack   of
         understanding  of  biological  treatment  process  fundamentals and
         operational  requirements  and  goals  significantly  limit  plant
         performance.   This  limitation  could  be  addressed with  onsite
         training  over  a .period  of  months  or  by periodic  attendance at
         seminars, schools,  etc., over a period of many years.

     2.  Process  Control  Testing  (Operation).  An almost complete lack of
         process  control  testing existed  prior  to  the  CPE.    Base-level
         testing  was   initiated   during  the  CPE.    Onsite  training  is
         required  to optimize  process  control  testing  and to  teach the
         operational  staff to properly  apply the test  results to process
         controls.

     3.  Return  Process  Streams  (Design).   Secondary sludge  being  returned
         to  the  primary  clarifier was  causing primary clarifier  "bulking,,"
         Anaerobic  digester supernatant return will  also adversely impact
         plant  performance.   The  capability to minimize the  adverse impact
         of  return  process  streams   can  be  acquired  through  long-term,
         onsite  training.

     4.  Equipment  Malfunction (Maintenance).   The  waste gas  burner, the
         digester  gas   mixing  system,  the  heat  exchanger   temperature
         control  system,  and the  primary  sludge  pump  were  all  out of
         service during  the CPE.   A significant safety problem,  as well as
         operational  problems,  had developed.  Administrative and  operator
         training are needed.

      5.  Improper Training  Guidance   (Operation).   Current  operation and
         equipment  problems  have been  existing  for years  despite formal
         grant-supported startup  of  the expanded  facilities and  periodic
         State  inspections.

      6.  Administrative   Familiarity   With  Plant  Needs   (Administration).
         Through past poor communication and improper operation,  the  plant
         administrators  have been misled regarding plant  needs.   Increased
                                     134

-------
     9.
familiarity in the areas  of  treatment  fundamentals,  operation and
maintenance requirements,  funding needs,  and safety  concerns  is
needed.                i
                       I

Process   Controllability   (Design).    Existing   flow-splitting
capability  to   the   RBCs   is   inadequate.    Correction  of  this
deficiency will likely'require minor design modifications.
                       i
Ultimate  Sludge  Disposal   (Design).    Existing  drying  beds  are
inadequate  for  needed  year-round   sludge  disposal.   Additional
beds may be a  long-term  solution.   Liquid  sludge haul  to farmland
may  be  a workable  interim solution.  Documentation for  the need
and administrative trajning are necessary.

Performance   Monitoring   (Operation).     Improved   sampling   to
represent  actual  performance   and   flow  discharge  is  needed.
Onsite  training  coupled  with administrative  support to eliminate
problems are required.:
    10.  Insufficient
                 Funding
(Administration).
          	       Administrative
         unfamiliarity  with  plant  needs,  inadequate technical  guidance,
         and  improper  past  operation  and  maintenance  have all  led  to
         insufficient funding,  jAdministrative training is needed.
                              • i
Other  factors  that  contribute^!  to  limited  performance,  but  in  a  less
significant way,  include:   an !inadequate  spare  parts  inventory,  limited
staff expertise in  handling  emergency maintenance, a  lack  of an alternate
power  source,  a  marginally equipped laboratory,  poor accessibility  for
maintenance in  part .of  the pl|ant,  a lack  of needed  sample taps, and  a
relatively "green" staff.      I
PROJECTED IMPACT OF A CCP

Improved  effluent quality,  toj  within NPDES  permit  limits,  and  overall
operational stability,  safety, I and  administrative  ability to protect  the
existing  capital  investment and  provide for  future wastewater  treatment
needs, are expected if a CCP is|implemented.
CCP COSTS

Costs associated with  a
facilitator   and   for
                12-monlth  CCP at Springfield would be  for the CCP
                equipment   repairs,   minor  modifications,   and
                                    135

-------
supplemental winter sludge disposal
at Springfield are listed below:
estimated costs for conducting a CCP
     CCP Facilitator
     City Costs
       Minor Modifications
       Lab Equipment
       Supplemental Sludge Disposal
     Total CCP Costs
    $ 9,500  (one-time)

      1,000  (one-time)
        400  (one-time)
     18.000  (annual)
    $19,400

    $28.900

-------
                  APPENDIX 0
DATA COLLECTION FORMS USED IN CONDUCTING CPEs
   Form

   D-l
   D-2
   0-3
   D-4
   D-5
   D-6
:      Title
i
general POTW Information
Administration Data
Design Data
Operations Data
Maintenance Data
Performance Data
                     137

-------
                                  FORM D-1
                          GENERAL POTW INFORMATION
A,  NAME AND LOCATION:
    Name of Facility
    Type of Facility
    Owner    	
    Administrative Office:
      Mailing Address  	
      Primary Contact
      Title
      Telephone No.

    Treatment Plant:
      Mailing Address
      Primary Contact
      Title  	
      Telephone No.
    Directions to Plant
B.  RECEIVING STREAM AND CLASSIFICATION:
    Receiving Water	
    Tributary to	
    Major River Basin	
Comments:
                                    138

-------
                            FORM D-l (continued)

                          GENERAL IPOTW INFORMATION
C.  PERMIT INFORMATION:
    Plant Classification Assigned |by State.
    Discharge Permit Requirements,from Permit Number

    Date Permit Issued 	i	

    Date Permit Expires 	|	
    Effluent Limits and Monitoring Requirements:
    Parameter

     Flow, mgd

     BODs, mg/1

     TSS, mg/1

     Fecal Coliform,
        no./100 ml

     Chlorine Residual,
        mg/1

     pH, units

     Ammonia, mg/T

     Oil & Grease, mg/1

     Others
Maximum
Monthly
Average
Maximum
Weekly
Average
Monitoring    Sample
Frequency      Type
Required     Required
     Compliance Schedule:
                                    139

-------
                            FORM D-l  (continued)

                          GENERAL POTW INFORMATION
D.  MAJOR PROCESS TYPE
E.  DESIGN FLOW:

    Present Design Flow
mgd x 3,785 =
m3/d
F.  UPGRADING  AND/OR   EXPANSION  HISTORY  (original   construction,   date
    completed, plant upgrade, date completed):
G.  PROPOSED UPGRADES:
H.  SERVICE AREA:

    Number of Taps
    General   Description  (residential,   approximate  commercial   and/or
    industrial contribution, etc.):
                                    140

-------
                            FORM D-1  (continued)
                          GENERAL POTW INFORMATION
I.   PLANT FLOW DIAGRAM:
                                    141

-------
                                  FORM 0-2
                            ADMINISTRATION DATA
A.  ORGANIZATION:
    Governing Body 	!
    Scheduled Meeting Dates and Times
    Authority and Responsibility:
     Members' Names (notes on leadership, funding preferences, knowledge
     of plant needs, etc.)-
      Chain of Command  (from governing body through major in-plant
      decisionmakers):
                                     142

-------
                            FORM D-2 (continued)

                            ADMINISTRATION DATA
B.  PLANT PERSONNEL:
    Personnel Classification
    No.   Title
Certification   Pay Scale
C.  PLANT COVERAGE:
    Weekdays
    Weekends & Holidays
 Fraction of Time Spent
with Mastewater Treatment
                                    143

-------
                            FORM D-2 (continued)
                            ADMINISTRATION DATA

D. PLANT BUDGET  (Attach copy of actual budget if available)

                         (Budget Year 	)
                                    144

-------
                            FORM D-2 (continued)

                            ADMINISTRATION DATA
E.  BOND RETIREMENT:
Bond Type    . Year Issued    Duration
Interest
  Rate
Project Financed
Comments:
                                    145

-------
                            FORM D-2 (continued)
                            ADMINISTRATION DATA
F.  REVENUE:

    Type of Tap
Tap Fee
User Fee
Other Sources of Revenue:
 Comments:

-------
                            FORM D-2 (continued)

                            ADMINISTRATION DATA
G.  DISCUSSION OF EXPENDITURES:!

                               i
        Budget for:


            Salaries (incl. fringes)

            Utilities          j  . •
                               I
            Training           !
            Other              ;
                Operations Subtbtal

            Capital Outlay     ;
            (incl. bond debt   ;
             retirement and
             capital replacement)

                Total          ;
                     Dollar Amount
                  Percent of Total
                                               100
Operational Cost Per Thousand Gallons (Operations Subtotal $ * Yearly Flow)
$.
Mgal/yr * 10 h
tf/1,000 gal x 0.264
Approximate Annual Cost Per Tap (Total $ -5- No. of Taps)
                               i
                               I
$	* 	taps = $	/tap
Comments:
                                     147

-------
                            FORM D-2 (continued)
                            ADMINISTRATION DATA
H.  POLICY, SUPPORT, AND ATTITUDE:

    Owner Responsibility:
        - Attitude toward staff?  f
        - Attitude toward regulatory agency?
        - Self-sustaining facility attitude?
        - Attitude toward consultants?
        - Future plans?           ;
        - Policies?
    Performance Goal:             !
        - Is plant 1n compliance? '
            o If yes, what's making 1t that way?
            o If no, why not?     ;
        - Is regulatory pressure felt for performance?
        - What are performance requirements?
    Administrative Support:
        - Budget
            o Within range of other plants?
            o Covers capital Improvements?
            o "Drained" to general fund?
            o Unnecessary expenditures?
            o Sufficient?
                                    148

-------
                       FORM 0-2 (continued)
                       ADMINISTRATION"DATA
     Personnel
       o Within range of othei" plants?
       o Allows adequate time?
       o Motivation, pay, supervision, working conditions?
       o Productivity?       !
       o Turnover?           r ai
     Involvement             |
       o Visits to treatment plant?
       o Awareness of facility performance?
       o Request status reports (performance and cost-related)?
       o Familiarity with plajit needs?
Attitude Assessment:

   Excellent:

   Normal:
   Poor:
Reliability  provides  adequate  treatment  at  lowest
reasonable cost.
Provide  as  [good  a treatment  as  possible with  the
money available.
Spend as little as possible with  no correlation made
to achieving plant performance.
                               149

-------
I.  ENERGY CONSUMPTION:
                            FORM D-2 (continued)

                            ADMINISTRATION DATA
                                Electricity
    Source of Information
    Base Cost 	
£/kWh (Attach rate schedule If available)
        Days in   Energy    Energy
Month/  Billing   Usage     Demand    ECA*      Base     Total     Flow
Year    Period    (kWh)     Cost      Cost      Cost     Cost     (Hgal)
Total
                                                Total Flow (Mgal)
         kWh/d
         kWh/1,000 gal x 0.264 =
         $/d
         rf/1,000 gal x 0.264 = _
                kWh/m3
*ECA » Energy Cost Adjustment, which is the pass-through cost allowed to
 public service companies for increased fuel cost to generate electricity.
                                    150

-------
                            FORM;0-2 (continued)
                                I

                            ADMINISTRATION DATA
0.  ENERGY CONSUMPTION:
                                Natural Gas
    Source of Information
    Unit Cost	
                       (Attach rate schedule 1f available)
Month/Year
Total

Average
Days 1n Billing!
    Period     I
 Usage
(cu ft)
Cost
                Miscellaneous (Fuel 011. Digester Gas, etc.)
                                    151

-------
                                  FORM D-3



                                DESIGN DATA
A.  INFLUENT CHARACTERISTICS:
    Average Daily Flow:
    Maximum Monthly Flow:
    Maximum Hourly Flow:
    Average Dally BOD5:
    Average Dally TSS:
    Infiltration/Inflow:
    Seasonal Variations:
    Major Industrial Wastes:
    Collection System:
Deslqn
Current
Desiqn
Current
Deslqn
Current
i
Deslqn
Current
i
Deslqn
Current
mqd x 3.785 =
mqd x 3.785 =
mqd x 3.785 =
mqd x 3.785 =
mqd x 3.785 =
mqd x 3.785 =
Ib x 0.454 =
Ib X 0.454 =
Ib x 0.454 =
Ib x 0.454 =
m3/d
m37d
m3/d
m3/d
m3/d
m3/d
kg
kq
kq
kq
    Comments:

-------
                            FORM D-3 (continued)
                                DESIGN DATA
B.  UNIT PROCESSES:
                              Flow Measurement
                   (Form for eachjflow measuring device)
    Flow Stream Measured
    Control Section:
        Type and Size 	
        Location 	
        Comments (operational problems, maintenance problems, unique
        features, preventive maintenance procedures, etc.):
    Recorder:
        Name
Model
Range ',
bration Frequency
of Last Calibration
tion
i


lizer i
        Comments (operation and design problems, unique features, etc.)
    Accuracy Check During CPE:
        Method of Check:
        Results:
                                    153

-------
                            FORM D-3 (continued)

                                DESIGN DATA
B.  UNIT PROCESSES:
                                  Pumping
                   (Complete as many forms as necessary)
Flow Stream
  Pumped       Type
No. of
Pumps     Name
Model    HP   Capacity    Head
Comments  (flow control,  suitability  of  installed  equipment,  results  of
capacity check during CPE, etc.):
Comments:
Comments:
                                    154

-------
8.   UNIT PROCESSES:
                            FORM j)-3 (continued)
                                DESIGN DATA
                           Pre 11 mil nary Treatment
     Mechanical Bar Screen:
        Name 	
        Model   '	
        Bar Screen Width
        Bar Spacing 	
      Horsepower	
        Inch  x  2.54
        Within Building? 	_!
        Description of Operation:;
 inch,  O.C.  x  2.54
	 Heated?	
      cm
cm, O.C.
     Hand-Cleaned Bar Screen:
        Bar Screen Width 	
        Bar Spacing 	
        Cleaning Frequency
        Within Building?	
        Screenings Volume:
              Normal
              Peak
     Screening Disposal:

     Comments:
        inch  x  2.54  =
 inch,  O.C.  x  2.54  =
                 Heated?
      cu  yd/d  x  0.75
      cu  yd/d  x  0.75
                                        cm
cm, O.C.
 m3/d
 m3/d
                                    155

-------
                            FORM D-3 (continued)
                                DESIGN DATA
B.  UNIT PROCESSES:
                           Preliminary Treatment
    Comminutor:
        Name 	
        Model
        Within Building?.
        Maintenance:
    Horsepower,
    Heated?
        Comments:
    Grit Removal:
        Description of Unit:
        Grit Volume:
            Normal _
            Peak
cu yd/d x 0.75
cu yd/d x 0.75
_m3/d
 m3/d
        Disposal  of Grit:
        Comments:
                                     56

-------
B.  UNIT PROCESSES:
                            FORM D-3 (continued)
                                DESIGN DATA
                             Primary Treatment
    Primary Clarifier(s):

        Number	
        Water Depth (Shallowest)
        Water Depth (Deepest)   ,
        Weir Location
        Weir Length 	;
        Total Surface Area
        Total Volume 	
        Flow (Design) 	
             (Operating)
        Weir Overflow Rate
              (Design) 	
              (Operating) 	
        Surface Settling Rate
              (Design) 	
              (Operating)
  Surface  Dimensions
       ft  x  0.3  =
       ft  x  0.3  =
       ft  x  0.3  =
       sq  ft  x  0.093  =
    cu  ft  x  0.028  =
   _ mgd  x  3,785  =
   _ mgd  x  3,785  =
     gpd/ft  x  0.012  =
     gpd/ft  x  0.012  =
_gpd/sq  ft  x  0.04  =
 gpd/sq  ft  x  0.04  =
        Hydraulic Detention Time (Design) 	
        Collector Mechanism Name 	
        Model 	,      Horsepower
        Scum Collection and Treatment:
              Scum Volume:      \
                      Normal:   :
                      Peak:     '
               hr (Operating)
      cu  ft/d  x  0.028 =
      cu  ft/d  x  0.028 =
      m
      m
      m
     m
  	m
   m3/d
   m3/d
 m /m/d
 m3/m/d
m3/m2/d
m3/m2/d
     hr
   m3/d
   m3/d
                                    157

-------
B.  UNIT PROCESSES
                            FORM D-3 (continued)
                                DESIGN DATA
                            Secondary Treatment
    Aeration Bas1n(s):
        No. of Basins
          Surface  Dimensions
Water Death
Total Volume
Flow (Design)
(Operating)
Sewage Detention Time
BODgLoading
(Design)
(Operating)
Covered?
Type of Aeration
Name

ft x 0.3 =
cu ft x 0.028 =
mgd x 3.785 =
mqd x 3.785 =
(Design
(Operating)
lb/d/1,000 cu ft x 0.16 =
lb/d/1.000 cu ft x 0.16 =

No. of Aerators
Model Horsepower

m
m3
m3/d
m3/d
hr
hr
kg/m3/d
kg/m3/d



    Modes of Operation (Current and Other Options):
    Types of Diffusers
        Model 	
          Manufacturer
_D.epth
ft x 0.3 =
    No. of Blowers
        Model 	
          Name
        Air Capacity (cfm)
         Horsepower
        	Location
    Oxygen Transfer Capacity
              Ib/d  x  0.454  =
m
                     kg/d
    Comments:
                                    158

-------
B.  UNIT PROCESSES:
                            FORM D-3 (continued)
                                DESIGN DATA
                            Secondary Treatment
    Contact Basin:
        Surface Dimension
        Water Depth	
        Volume 	
        Flow  (Design)
              (Operating)
        Sewage  Detention Time  (Design)
        Covered? 	i	
   ft x 0.3 =
 _cu ft x 0.028 =
 _ mgd x 3,785 =
 _ mgd x 3,785 =
       _min  (Operating)
	m
    3
	m
 m3/d
 m3/d
  min
         Comments:
     Reaeration Basin:
         Surface Dimensions
         Water Depth 	
         Volume 	
  ft x 0.3 =
    m
cu ft x 0.028 =
         Hydraulic Detention Time: at 100% Return
               (Design) 	_j	hr   (Operating) 	
         Flexibility to Operate a$ Conventional or Step Feed:
   m
                                   hr
         Covered?
         Comments:
                                     159

-------
B.  UNIT PROCESSES:
                            FORM D-3 (continued)
                                DESIGN DATA
                            Secondary Treatment
    Oxygen Transfer:
        Type of Aeration
        Model
        Capacity
        No.  of Blowers
        Horsepower 	
        Location
        Type of D1ffusers
        Model 	
          No. of Aerators
         	 Horsepower
           cfm x 0.028 =
           Ib/d x 0.454 =
      Name
Capacity
      Depth
     Model
             Name
cfm x 0.028 =
                   Manufacturer
                       m /min
                      _ kg/d
 3
m /m1n
        ft x 0.3 =
     Comments:
                                   160

-------
B.  UNIT PROCESSES:
    ,  FORM D-3
    DESIGN'DATA


Secondary Treatment
    Trickling Filter:
        No. of Filters
                    Covered?
        Surface Dimensions
        Media Type 	
              Specific Surface
        Media Depth 	-
        Surface Area 	.
        Media Volume 	
            sq ft/cu ft x 32.8 =_
            _ ft x 0.3 =	
             ft x 0.093 =
        Flow  (Design)	
              (Operating)
        Organic Loading
              (Design)	
          cu ft x 0.028 =
          _ mgd x 3,785 =
          _ mgd x 3,785 =
              (Operating).
        Hydraulic Loading
              (Design) 	
              (Operating).
    lb/d/1,000 cu ft x 0.016 =
    lb/d/1,000 cu ft x 0.016 =
         gpd/sq ft x 0.04 =
         gpd/sq ft x 0.04 =
        Recirculation (description, ranges, current operation):
        Mode of Operation:.
        Comments:
   m2/m3
      m
     m
    m3/d
    m3/d
_kg/m3/d
_kg/m3/d
 m3/m2/d
 nr/nr/d
                                    161

-------
                            FORM D-3 (continued)
                                DESIGN DATA
B.  UNIT PROCESSES:
                            Secondary Treatment
    Rotating Biological Contactor (RBC):
        No. of  Shafts      Length of Shafts
        ft  x  0.3  =
                            m
No. of Cells Cell
Volume
cu ft x 0.028 =
m3
Name
Disc Diameter
ft x 0.
3 =
m
RPM
Peripheral Velocity
Total Surface Area
Percent Submergence
Flow (Design)
(Operating)
Hydraulic Loading:
(Design)
(Operating)
Temperature (Design)
Organic Loading (Design)
ft/sec
sa ft

mad
mad
gpd/sq ft
gpd/sq ft
°C


x 0.3 =
x 0.093 =

x 3.785 =
x 3,785 =
x 0.04 =
x 0.04 =
(Operating)
Ib SBOD/d/1,000
=
m/sec
m2

m3/d
m3/d
m3/m2/d
3.2..
m /m /d
°C
sq ft x 4.88
g SBOD/m2/d
                        (Operating).
        Total  Detention Time (Design)  	
        Covered? 	  Heated?
 Ib  SBOD/d/1,000  sq  ft x 4.88
 =  	 g  SBOD/m2/d
. hr (Operating)  	hr
        Flexibility to Distribute Load to Stages;
        Comments:
                                    162

-------
B.  UNIT PROCESSES
                            FORM| D-3 (continued)
                                'DESIGN DATA
                            Secondary Treatment
    Activated Biofilter (ABF)
        Biocell: Model 	
                                No.  of Cells
        Surface Dimensions
        Total Surface Area
        Media Depth	
                               sq ft x 0.093
                                  ft x 0.3 =
        Total Media Volume
        Media Type	
                               cu ft x 0,028 =
                 m
                 m
                 m
                       Specific Surface
_sq  ft/cu  ft x  32.8
     	 m2/m3
             Loading
              (Design)
                       _ lb/1,000 cu ft/d x 0.016 = _
                       j_ lb/1,000 cu ft/d x 0.016 = _
Recirculation Tank:  Dimensions (LxWxD) _ ft =
              (Operating)
                             Volume
                                        cu ft x 0.028 =
        Aeration Basin: Surface;Dimensions
        Total Surface Area      !	
        Depth     •	
        Volume 	
                                   sq ft x 0.093 =
                            ft x 0.3 =
                       !cu ft x 0.028 =
        Hydraulic  Detention Time  (Design).
                                       _min  (Operating)
           _kg/m3/d
           _kg/m3/d
                  m
                 m
                 m
                  m
                 m
         Comments:
                                     163

-------
                            FORM D-3 (continued)
                                DESIGN DATA
B.  UNIT PROCESSES
                            Secondary Treatment
    Secondary Clarlfier(s):
        No. of Clarifiers
    Dimension(s)
        Water Depth (Shallowest)
                    (Deepest) 	
        Weir Location
           ft x 0.3 =
           ft x 0.3 =
        Percent of Clarification Developed by Launders
        Weir Length 	      '	ft x 0.3
              (Operating)
 god/sa ft x 0.04
        Hydraulic Detention Time
              (Design) 	
hr
(Operating)
                             m
                             m
                                      m
Surface Area
Vol ume
Flow (Design)
(Operating)
Weir Overflow Rate
(Design)
(Operating)
Surface Settling Rate
(Design)
! so: ft x 0.093 =
i cu ft x 0.028 =
mgd x 3.785
mgd x 3.785
i
1 god/ft x 0.012 =
god/ft x 0.012 =
god/so ft x 0,04 =
m2
m3
m3/d
m3/d
m3/m/d
m /m/d
m3/m2/d
                       nr/nT/d
hr
        Collector Mechanism Name
     Model
           Horsepower
        Return Sludge Collector Mechanism Type 	
        Scum Collection and Removal:
        Scum Volume:  (Normal)    !	gpd x 0.028 =
                      (Peak)      !	gpd x 0.028 =
        Comments:
                                 _m3/d
                                  m3/d
                                    164

-------
                            FORM D-3 (continued)
                                  i
                                DESIGN DATA
B.  UNIT PROCESSES:
                               Return Sludge
    Description of  Sludge  Movement (i.e., scrap to  clarifier  hopper,  pump
    to aeration basin inlet channel):
    Controllable Capacity Range:
        (Low) 	
        (High) 	
mgd x 3,785
mgd x 3,785
_m3/d
 m3/d
    Method of Control:
    Sampling Location:
    Comments:
                                Waste Sludge
    Description of Waste Procedure (i.e., variable-speed pump wastes
    from separate clarifier hopper, continuous or by timeclock):
    Method of Waste Volume Measurement:
    Sampling Location:            i
    Comments:                     !
                                    165

-------
B.  UNIT PROCESSES:
                            FORM D-3 (continued)
                                DESIGN DATA
                                Disinfection
    Contact Basln(s):
        No. of Separate Basins
        Surface Dlmenslon(s) _
        Channel Length-to-Width Ratio
        Water Depth 	
        Total Volume	
        Detention Time  (Design)_
        Drain Capability:
        Scum Removal Capability:
        Comments:
         ft  x  0.3  =
                        No.  of  Bends
       cu  ft  x  0.028
              min (Operating)
 	m
 _m3
 min
     Chlorinator(s):
         Name  	
         Capacity 	
         Type of Injection 	
         Feed Rate (Operating).
         Dosage (Operating) 	
         Chlorine Diffusion 	
         Comments:
No. of Chlorinators
  'L lb/d x 0.454
 kg/d
            Flow Proportioned?.
       Ib/d x 0.454 =
 kg/d
_mg/l
                                     166

-------
                            Form D-3 (continued)
                               !DESIGN DATA
B.  UNIT PROCESSES:

    Aerobic Digestion;
        No. of Basins
        Water Depth _
        Volume 	
Sludge Handling
      Surface Dimension(s)
      ft x 0.3 = 	L_
                             m
        Covered?
        Type of Aeration
     cu ft x 0.028 =
            Heated?
        Supernatant Capability
        No. of Aerators 	
        Model
               Name
        Horsepower
        Type of Diffusers
        Model 	.
 . Depth
Manufacturer
     ft x 0.3
m
        No. of Blowers
        Model 	
             Name
        Air Capacity 	 •
        Oxygen Transfer Capacity
        Location 	j_
        Horsepower
         cfm x 0.47
              Ib/d x 0.454 =
                         _kg/d
        Mode of Operation:
        Comments:
                                    167

-------
                            FORM D-3 (continued)
                                DESIGN DATA
B.  UNIT PROCESSES:
                              Sludge Handling
Anaerobic Digestion:
No. of Digesters
Sidewall Depth
Center Depth
Total Volume
Floating Cover?
Flow (Design)
(Operating)
Detention Time (Design)
Diameter ft x 0.3 =
ft x 0.3 =
ft x 0.3 =
cu ft x 0.028 =
i
mgd x 3.785 =
mgd x 3.785 =
days (Operating)
m
m
m
m3

m3/d
m3/d
days
        Heating:
        Mixing:
        Sampling Ports:
        Mode of Operation:
        Comments:
                                    168

-------
B.  UNIT PROCESSES:
    Sludge Drying Beds:
        No. of Beds 	
        Covered?
                            FORM D-3 (continued)
                             DESIGN INFORMATION
                              Sludge Handling
   Size of Beds
   Subnatant Drain To
        Dewatered Sludge Removal:
                                i
        Mode of Operation:      ,

        Comments:               i
    Other Dewatering Unlt(s):
        No. of Units	Type/of Unit(s)	Manufacturer.
        Model
Horsepower
Hr/Wk
        Loading Rate 	
        Polymer Used	
                      Ib/dry ton	
        Cake Solids	k Sol Ids
                                I
                                i
        Comments:               !
     Ib/hr x 0.454 =
                _kg/h
                  x 0.5 =
                _g/kg
                                    169

-------
                            FORM D-3 (continued)
                                DESIGN DATA
B.  UNIT PROCESSES:
    Item
                        Summary of Plant Horsepower
HP             Usage (%)
Weighted HP
                                    170

-------
                            FORM 0-3 (continued)

                                DESIGN DATA
C.   OTHER DESIGN INFORMATION:    ;

     Standby  Power  (description  of unit;  automatic activation?  capacity
     for which processes? frequendy of use, etc.):
     Alarm Systems (description of system, units covered, etc.):
     Miscellaneous:
                                     171

-------
                            FORM D-3 (continued)
                                DESIGN DATA
D.   PLANT  AUTOMATION  (description  of  any plant  automation  not  covered
     under more specific topics):
E.   LABORATORY CAPABILITY:
        Location 	
Floor Dimensions
                                  ft x 0.3 =
                 m  Hot Water?
                                          Desk?
Counter Space 	
File Cabinet? 	
Tests Performed by Whom? 	
Monitoring Tests Conducted (TSS, BOD, pH, Fecal Coliform, Others)
      According to Permit	
              Tests Conducted More Frequently 	
              Tests Conducted Less Frequently 	
              Tests with Suspected or Known Analytical Problems
        Operational Test Capability (Equipment/Chemicals)
        (Check if available)
                      DO meter
                      BOD5
                      Mallory-type settleometer
                      Graduated cylinder
                      Imhoff cone
                      Turbidity
                      Ammonia
                      Nitrate
                                    172

-------
                            FORM  0-3  (continued)
                               DESIGN  DATA
E.   LABORATORY CAPABILITY:
                                 f

        Operational Test Capability:   (Check 1f available)
                      Total Kjeldahl  nitrogen
                      Suspended solids
                      Volatile suspended solids
                      Sludge blanket depth measurement
                      Core sample; taker
                      Alkalinity
                      Volatile adds
                      pH meter
                      Centrifuge jsollds concentrations
                      Oxygen uptake rates
                                     173

-------
                                  FORM D-4
                              OPERATIONS DATA


A.  PROCESS CONTROLS:

    Who sets major process control strategies and decisions?


    Where is help sought when desired performance is not achieved?


    Are staff members asked their opinions?


B.  SPECIFIC PROCESS CONTROLS:
        Primary Clarification
              1.  Sludge Removal:

              2.  Performance Monitoring:

              3.  Other:

        Suspended Growth POTW Secondary Systems
              1.  Sludge Mass Control:

              2.  Return Sludge Control:

              3.  DO Control:

              4.  Clarifier Solids Loading:
                                  i
              5.  Other:
                                    174

-------
                           FORM D-4 (continued)


                             OPERATIONS DATA
        Fixed  Film  POTW Secondary
             1.  Secondary Clarifier Sludge Removal
              2.   Anaerobic  Sidestream Returns:
              3.   Other:
        Sludge  Handling

             1.   Purpose  Relative
Systems
 to Other Processes;
              2.   Sludge Stabilization:




              3.   Sludge Disposal:


                                *
                                i
              4.   Other:        :
C.   PROCESS CONTROL REFERENCES USED (Specifically note references that

     are  the  source  of  poor  process  control   decisions  or  strategies,

     suspected or definitely identified):
                                    175

-------
                                  FORM D-5

                              MAINTENANCE DATA
A.   EQUIPMENT OR  PROCESSES OUT  OF SERVICE  DUE TO  BREAKDOWNS   (Identify
     equipment or  process,  description of  problem,  length of time  out  of
     service, what has  been done,  what remains  to be done,  estimated time
     before repair, how 1t affects performance):
     DURING THE CPE (List and explain)
     DURING THE LAST 24 MONTHS (11st and explain):
                                    176

-------
                            FORM :D~5 (continued)

                              MAINTENANCE DATA



8,.  PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM:                                         ;
                                 J
        Method of Scheduling:    ;

        Method of Documenting Work Completed:
                                , i
        Adequacy of Resources Available:

              Lubricants:
                                 I
                                 i
                                 I
              Tools::             i



               Others:            i



 C.   EMERGENCY MAINTENANCE PROGRAM:
                                 i
         Small Spare Parts  (fuse?,  belts,  bearing,  packing dlffusers,  etc):



         Major Spare Parts  (largj* motors,  gear boxes, blowers, flowmeter, etc,,

         Manpower:                j


         Expertise:              ;

                                 i
         References:             |
                                 i
                                 i    '
               O&M Manual:

               Accurate As-Bullts:,

               Manufacturer's Literature:
                                     177

-------
                                  FORM D-5



                              MAINTENANCE DATA
D.   6ENERAL HOUSEKEEPING:
                                    178

-------
                               i   FORM D-6



                              PERFORMANCE DATA
A.  SOURCE OF DATA:
B.  REPORTED MONITORING DATA  FpR  PREVIOUS 12 MONTHS (flows  In  mgd;  others

    in mg/1, except as noted): :
                     Raw
Primary Effluent
Mo/Yr   Flow   BODC  TSS
                  o
TSS
AVG
                                    179

-------
                              FORM D-6 (continued)
                                PERFORMANCE DATA
B.  REPORTED MONITORING DATA FOR PREVIOUS 12 MONTHS (cont.)
                   Final Effluent	Other
Mo/Yr   Flow   BOD&  TSS
BOD>  TSS
   o
AVG
                                     180

-------
                             FORM D-6 (continued!)

                               PERFORMANCE DATA
C.   PERMIT PERFORMANCE VIOLATIONS WITHIN  LAST  12 MONTHS (30-day averages,,,
     7-day averages,  Instantaneous  violations,  effluent mass  violations,
     percent removal violations^
        No. of Mdnths Without a Violation

        No. of Months With a Violation
D.   REASONS  (if  any)  REPORTED  MONITORING  DATA  ARE  NOT  BELIEVED  TO
     REPRESENT   ACTUAL  EFFLUENT   QUALITY   (unrepresentative   sampling,
     improper   lab   analyses,  'unaccounted-for   sludge   loss,   selective
     reporting, etc.):
                                    181

-------
           APPENDIX E
GUIDELINES FOR FIELD ESTIMATING
     EQUIPMENT POWER USAGE
              182

-------
                   FIELD ESTIMATING EQUIPMENT POWER USAGE
The power  a  particular piece of  equipment 1s drawing can be  estimated  In
the field by measuring the current  being  drawn  by the motor.   The measured
power being drawn by a motor  (Inductive user)  1s  "apparent power" and must
be multiplied  by the  power  factor (PF)  to calculate actual  power.   Four
methods are available to arrive 'at a suitable power factor:

     1.  Assume a power factor:  ',

         Use 0.9  for  recently constructed plants that likely  included  use
         of capacitors  to adjust the  power factor  toward 1.0.   Use  0.75
         for old  and  small  pla;nts  where  it is  unlikely that  capacitors
         have been added.
                                j

     2.  Measure the  "plant  power factor"  using  an  ammeter and  the  plant
         kilbwatttiour meter and|assume the  power  factor  applies  for larger
         pieces  of  equipment.  !See  Table  E-l  for  calculation  worksheet.
         (WARNING: DO NOT USE THIS METHOD  UNLESS QUALIFIED.)

     3.  Ask the  electric company  to  measure the power factor  or  actual
         power usage of specific! equipment.

     4.  Rent an appropriate  Instrument and  measure  power factor or actual
         power usage.   (WARNING:; DO NOT USE THIS METHOD UNLESS  QUALIFIED.)

Once the PF has  been determined>  the following  calculations  can  be used  to
estimate power drawn by a particular piece of equipment:
     Measure:                   '

         Average Voltage (line-to-line) =
            \         '          i
         Average Amperage =     •	

     Calculate:         ,	
                                        Volts
                           Amps
         kVA =
               V x A x
                   1000

         kW  =  kVA x PF
               (3-phase power)
         whp =
 kW
0.746
                                    183

-------
                                 TABLE E-l

                 WORKSHEET FOR CALCULATION OF POWER FACTOR
Apparent Power

    L1ne-to-L1ne Voltage on Incoming Power:
        vl-2
         avg
                       Volts

                       Volts

                       Volts

                       Volts
    Amperage for Each Phase on Incoming Power:

        I-j   =	Amps
        I_   =	Amps

        I3   =	'      Amps
                	Amps
         avg
     kVA =
                 'x
                   1000
Actual Power
        CTR
                               watthours/revolution (from meter)
                                           ,b
                                PTR
TR   = CTR x PTR =

Disc Speed = 	
Seconds/
                                                      Revolution(s)
        kW = Kn x TR  x


Power Factor
                         Dlscev;   3600ec
                                          1 kW
                   Sec
     Hour
1000 Watts
        PF
      kW_
      KVA
aCTR (Current Transformer Ratio) - ratio of primary to secondary current.
 For current transformer rated 200:5,  ratio is 200/5 or 40/1.

bPTR (Potential Transformer Ratio) - ratio of primary to secondary volt-
 age.  For potential transformer rated 480:120,  ratio is 480/120 or 4/1.

CTR (Transformer  Ratio) - total ratio  of current and potential trans-
 formers.  For CTR = 200:5 and PTR = 480:120, TR = 40 x 4 = 160.
                                     184

-------
                  APPENDIX F
PROCEDURE FOR CONVERTING STANDARD OXYGENATION
      RATES TO ACTUAL OXYGENATION RATES
                     185

-------
               PROCEDURE FOR CONVERTING STANDARD OXY6ENATION
              RATES (SORs) TO ACTUAL OXYGENATION RATES (AORs)
      AOR = SOR (a)
                    [  BCSW - CL1
                                        - CL~I    (T-20)
                                               e
Where:
     AOR
     SOR

     a
     e
=   actual oxygen transfer rate, Ib 02/hp-hr
    standard  oxygen transfer  rate,  Ib Op/hp-hr  (from  Table
    3-3)
    relative rate of oxygen transfer  in  wastewater compared to
    water.  Estimate from Table F-l.
=   relative to oxygen saturation  value  in  wastewater compared
    to water.  Estimate fj = 0.95 for mixed  liquor.
    temperature correction constant, e = 1.024
=   oxygen  saturation   value   of   clean  water   at   standard
    conditions, Cs = 9.17 mg/1
=   oxygen saturation  value of  clean  water at  site  conditions
    of temperature and pressure, mg/1
                    'SW
     CL
     T
     C14.7
    mixed liquor DO concentrations, mg/1
    temperature of the liquid, °C
    oxygen saturation value of clean water at standard pressure
    of 14.7 psi and actual water temperature (see Table F-2).
    actual pressure at oxygen transfer point
    a) For  surface  aerators,  use  atmospheric  pressure  (see
       Figure F-l).
    b) For others,  use atmospheric  pressure  from  Figure  F-l,
       plus  the pressure  at mid-depth  of the  tank  from  the
       surface  to  the diffusers  (i.e., diffuser depth in'feet
       x 0.5 x 0.434 psi/ft).
                                    186

-------
                         iTABLE F-l
                         i
  TYPICAL VALUES OF ALPHA (a) USED FOR,ESTIMATING AOR/SOR
  Aeration Device

Course Bubble Diffusers
Fine Bubble Diffusers
Jet Aeration
Surface Mechanical Aerators
Submerged Turbines
Typical

  0.85
  0.50
  0.75
  0.90
  0.85
                            187

-------
                             TABLE  F-2

OXYGEN SATURATION AT STANDARD PRESSURE  AND  ACTUAL WATER TEMPERATURE
                  Temperature
                        0
                        1
                        2
                        3
                        4
                        5
                        6
                        7
                        8
                        9
                       10
                       11
                       12
                       13
                       14
                       15
                       16
                       17
                       18
                       19
                       20
                       21
                       22
                       23
                       24
                       25
                       26
                       27
                       28
                       29
                       30
Dissolved Oxygen
Saturation Level
    (mg/1)

    14.62
    14.23
    13.84
    13.48
    13.13
    12.80
    12.48
    12.17
    11.87
    11.59
    11.33
    11.09
    10.83
    10.60
    10.37
    10.15
     9.95
     9.74
     9.54
     9.35
     9.17
     8.99
     8.83
     8.68
     8.53
     8.38
     8.22
     8.07
     7.92
     7.77
     7.63
                               11)8

-------
                   o    o   oo    i^   CD;   m   ^|-    COCM
                   CO    CM '  CM    CM   CM    CM   CM    (MCM
     OO
     UJ
     oo

     o
     =c
UJ
o:   LU
ZD   o;

l—i   OO
u_   oo
     UJ
     C£
     Q-
     CO
     o




































































A
/
A
/
:>































y

/
\



/






















o
M—








-1
0
-1— 1
•o
CO
DC








1

)
f







/














o
>







,
/

/
'












i













i





1

i
i
|
1
!
j
i
|
i
1 ,
i /
|)
/
f\
\ •
1
1
!
i
i
i

i
!
i
1
i
1
1






























	 /
/
>
/




























i.
M-
M-
d
C
•c
n
a
DC











i
/


(










)
ji
J a
> S
'•S
IQ

















j '
5 I
5 1






y
/


1





























































/
r




















































































-

























































•>* CO CM •«- O
i
e.isd {8jnss0j^| ou9u.dsou4v
56 7 8 £
n thousands of feet

3
-* $
C/)
CD
O
co <
CD
TJ
•»-•
4"1
CM <
O
                                                  189

-------
                 APPENDIX G
EXAMPLE FORMS FOR ESTABLISHING A PREVENTIVE
    MAINTENANCE PROGRAM FOR SMALL POTWs
 Form

 G-l
 G-2
 6-3
 G-4
          Title

Equipment Information Sheet
Daljly Preventive Maintenance
Weekly Preventive Maintenance
Monthly Preventive Maintenance
                    190

-------
                                 1  FORM  6-1
                         EQUIPMENT  INFORMATION  SHEET
                                       Plant Equipment Number.
[EQUIPMENT!
 Location
                            Model
Manufacturer 	
Type 	R'ated Capacity _]
Additional Data _	i
_0riginal Installation Date
i	Serial No;
                                          Rated Pressure or Head
 DRIVE   Type
         Description
                                   Manufacturer
I MOTOR|   Manufacturer
         Frame 	
         Type ^___
         Rated Voltage 	
 SUPPLIER(S):
      Company Name & Address
                                                  HP
                              Enclosure Type
                              Rated Amperage
                                      Contact Person
                              RPM
                          S.F.
                           Telephone No.
 Additional Information and Comments:
                                     191

-------
                            FORM 6-1 (continued)
                        EQUIPMENT INFORMATION SHEET
RECOMMENDED PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE:
                                                           Frequency
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS:
     Part                  Lubricant Name & Description    Source
RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS:
     Part Description
Number
Quantity
                                    192

-------
                               !   FORM G-2
                               j

                        DAILY PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Inlet Building

    Check operation of grit pump, cyclone,       a.m..
    grit bin, pump seal water pressure           p.m..
    	(psi), leakage	_(drops/m1n).

    Check grit collector for unusual noise       a.m..
    or torque.                 ;                  p.m..

-   Check flow meter operation, chain, float,    a.m..
    stilling well.                               p.m/

    Check auto sampler operation and bottle      a.m..
    installation.                                p.m..
                               i
Grit Separator #2 Building     '
                               \
    Check for unusual noise or vibration         a.m..
    1n collector or conveyor.  ,                  p.m..
                               j
Primary Clarifier              ;

    Check for unusual noise or vibration         a.m..
    in drive unit.                               p.m..

Aeration Building

    Check blowers for unusual nbise or           a.m..
    vibration.                                   p.m..
                                                      TIME
                                       INITIALS
    Temperature:
       #1 Inlet
       #2 Inlet
       #3 Inlet
 °C
~
Outlet
Outlet
Outlet
    Check auto sampler operation and bottle
    installation.              !
                        a.m..
                        p.m..
(Form continued to include all process units and buildings requiring daily
 maintenance.)
                                    193

-------
                                  FORM 6-3

                       WEEKLY PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
                                                        DATE
INITIALS
Inlet Building

    Grit #1 Collector Drive:  Apply grease to upper   	  	
    and lower bearings 1n worm gear housing.

    Grit #1 Collector Drive:  Check oil level in      	  	
    gear housing; remove condensate in gear drive.

    Grit #1 Collector Drive:  Lubricate chain         	  	
    between drive unit and motor gear.

    Grit #1 Collector Drive:  Check torque            	  ^	
    overload alarm for proper operation.

    Communitor:  Check oil level in main gear         	  	
    box (lower).

    Communitor:  Check oil level in motor gear unit.  	  	

    Automatic Sampler:  Remove and clean sampling     	  	
    tube and strainer.

Grit Separator #2 Building

-   Grit #2 Drive Unit:  Check oil level in           	  	
    Philadelphia gear reducer.

    Grit #2 Conveyor Unit:  Apply grease to all       	  	
    bearings of chain drive and support sprockets.

    Grit #2 Conveyor Unit:  Check oil  level in            '      	
    conveyor drive reducer.

Aeration Building

    Automatic Sampler:  Remove and clean sampling     	  	
    tube and strainer.

    Aeration Blowers:  Check oil level - 3 points     	  	
    (gears, two bearings)

    Aeration Blowers:  Operate blower(s) (10 min      	  	
    each) not in service.  Check oil level and
    temperature.

(Form continued to include all process units and buildings requiring
 weekly maintenance.)
                                    194

-------
                                  FORM G-4

                       MONTHLY PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Inlet Building
    Automatic Sampler:   Check pump tubing for
    signs of failure.  Remove from pump housing
    to Inspect.                I

Grit Separator #2 Building     ,

    Gear Reducer:  Apply grease to upper and
    lower bearings.            j

Primary Clarlfler              '

    Drive Mechanism:  Check gear lubrication
    (dipstick).  Check  base plate lubrication
    (oil cap)                  |

    Gear Reducer:  Apply grease to upper, lower,
    and two side bearings.     :
                                                      DATE
INITIALS
(Form continued to Include all process units and buildings requiring
 monthly maintenance.)
Porvlde Similar Forms For:     ;

    QUARTERLY PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
    SEMIANNUAL PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
    ANNUAL PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
                                    195

-------
             APPENDIX H
DESIGN-RELATED PERFORMANCE-LIMITING
 FACTORS IDENTIFIED IN ACTUAL CPEs
                196

-------
                DESIGN-RELATED PERFORMANCE-LIMITING FACTORS
The design problems  listed  1n this appendix were  Identified  during actual
comprehensive  performance  evaluations.    Most   of   these  problems  have
resulted  1n  unnecessary   or  excessive   maintenance,   difficult  process
control, Inaccurate or excessive!sampling, and poor POTW performance.
These  design-related  problems i are  discussed
following categories:
                1n  the  -context  of  the
       Plant Layout
       Flow Measurement
       Bar Screens
       Comminutors
       Grit Removal
       Primary Clarlfiers
       Aeration Basins
       Aerators
       Trickling Filters
       ABF Towers
       RBCs
Secondary Clarifiers
Return Sludge Flows
Polishing Ponds
Chlorination
Wasting Capability
Sludge Holding Facilities
Aerobic Digesters
Anaerobic Digesters
Sludge Dewatering & Ultimate Disposal
Laboratory Facilities
Miscellaneous
                                    197

-------
Plant Layout
      -  Individual  process   trains,   without  interconnection,   require
         operation of  units  as if  three  separate  activated sludge  plants
         exist at one POTW rather than just one
      -  Covered  basins  without   adequate  observation  access   prevent
         observation of processes
      -  Return sludge air  compressors are located outside  and  repeatedly
         break down
      -  No flow splitting flexibility to parallel  units
      -  Bar screen located downstream from comminutor
      -  Freezing of influent sampler located outside
      -  Plant location inaccessible during Inclement  weather
      -  Excessive compressor noise
      -  Disinfection before polishing pond
      -  Parallel secondary  treatment  units not capable  of  being  operated
         as one facility
      -  Inadequate piping flexibility requires shutdown of one  trickling
         filter if one clarifier is down
      -  One  scraper  drive   for   primary   and  final   clariflers  requires
         shutdown of both for maintenance on either
      -  Lack of  bypasses on  individual  treatment units such as  aeration
         basins, trickling filters, chlorine contact basins,  etc.
      -  Use of  a septic tank  for inplant domestic and  laboratory  wastes
         and overflow from the septic tank to the plant effluent
      -  Both  trickling   filter and  activated  sludge  processes  in  very
         small plant causes excessive operational requirements
Flow Measurement
      -  Discharge  through a  pipe  rather than  the  control  section  for
         which the recorder is appropriate
      -  Downstream channel  slope and  geometry  causes backup  in  P.arshall
         flume throat
                                    198

-------
      -   Parshall  flume oversized
      -   Flow  measurement  inaccurate  due to  upstream barminutor  placement
      -   No  flow recorder       j
      -   Excessive  upstream   velocity   causes   turbulent   flow   through
         Parshall  flume
                               i
      -   Control  section not  accessible for  inspection and maintenance
      -   Level   transmitting   instrumentation   not compatible   with level
         receiving instrumentation
      -   Parshall  flume on POTW Affluent submerged during high river flows
      -   Recycle flows  (cooling water)  included in plant flow measurement
      -   Roll up flow chart requires  removal to observe  flow for more  than
         the preceding  4 hours
      -   Wires crossed  in  totalizer,  resulting in  wrong  reading
      -   Humid influent structure  causes problem with moisture-sensitive
         level sensor          i
      -   Flow velocity  too highiin  Kennison  nozzle
      -   Liquid level sensing float freezes
      -   Downstream bar screen backs  flow  into flume  throat  as screen plugs

Bar Screens                     :
                               i                   . •    -
      -   Bar spacing too narrowband causes excessive  blinding
      -   Backed-up  flow  released  after  cleaning  causes  hydraulic  surges
         through aeration  basinjand into clarifier
      -   Freezing problems with(mechanical bar screen located outside
Comminutors                     '
      -   Repeated mechanical  failure of hydraulic  drive-type comminutor
                                    199

-------
Grit Removal                     ',  '

      -  Excess wear  on  grit screw  center  bearing because of  exposure  to
         grit

      -  Odors from organics settling out in oversized grit channel

      -  Pump  discharge  to  grit  chamber directed  at  grit  buckets,  and
         washes grit from buckets

      -  Grit auger not functional

      -  Grit auger discharges too low for disposal in truck


Primary Clarifiers               '

      -  Overloaded by excessively large trickling filter humus  return pump
                                 !"                                      '
      -  Overload due  to  trickling filter recirculation designed to route
         through primary clarifier

      -  Improper placement of valve limits scum pumping

      -  Short-circuiting due to inlet baffle construction

      -  Preaeration  in  center  tof  clarifier  reduces  effective  clarifi-
         cation area


Aeration Basins

      -  Pipe outlet plugs with rags

      -  Lack of piping to operate as conventional as well  as step-load  or
         contact-stabilization activated sludge

      -  Receives hydraulic surges when the bar screen  is  cleaned and from
         oversized return pump on timeclock

      -  Loss  of  solids  caused  by flooding due  to  aeration basin  design
         elevation and lack of drainage control

      -  Action of  aeration  rotors and revolving  bridge and  configuration
         of  basin  creates  swells  and  voids  that  result   in wavelike
         stresses on bridge

      -  Leakage  between   contact  and   reaeration  basins   of   contact
         stabilization plant due to movable wall design

      -  No  wall   between  contact  and   reaeration  areas   of   contact
         stabilization plant
                                    200

-------
Aerators
      -  Inadequate capacity for oxygen transfer
      -  Surface mechanical aerators  overheat  and  shut off under increased
         flows due to infiltration/inflow
      -  Inadequate DO control because blowers provided are too large
      -  With floating aerators,  repeated  breaking of cables when operated
         on intermittent basis
                                •I
      -  With submerged turbine aerators,  repeated downtime due to bearing
         and shaft failure
      -  Surface aerators  that  do not provide adequate  bottom  mixing  in a
         deep oxidation ditch   \
      -  Inadequate   freeboard   for  splashing  with  surface   mechanical
         aerators               i
      -  Brush aerators provided in cold climate without ice protection
      -  Icing problems with surface mechanical aerators
      -  Rag accumulation on surface mechanical aerators
      -  Inadequate 00 control  i

Trickling Filters               |
                                i
      -  Recirculation only through primary clarifier
      -  Inadequate capacity of irickling filter arms
      -  Poor flow splitting to trickling filters
                                I
ABF Tower                       :
      -  Inadequately sized for prganic load
                                i
      -  Undersized pipe carrying tower underflow  back to  recirculation tank
                                i
      -  No  flexibility   to  vary  percent  tower underflow   returned  to
         recirculation tank
      -  Sludge  return  and tower  recycle  flow are directed  into the same
         pipe, which  limits thelj" volume recycled
                                I
      -  No flow measurement on direct recycle flow around  tower
                                    201

-------
RBCs
      -  No positive flow splitting to various trains
      -  No  access  provided  through  covers  to  take  dissolved  oxygen
         measurements
      -  Inadequate shaft design causes excessive downtime
Secondary Clariflers
      -  Poor flow splitting to clarifiers
      -  Poor development of surface area with weirs
      -  Sludge  scraper mechanism  directing  contercurrent  to  wastewater
         flow
      -  Hydraullcally  connected  clarifiers  not  of  the  same  elevation
         causes unequal flow splitting
      -  Freezing during cold weather
      -  Inlet  and outlet  on  circumference, a  large  diameter,  a  large
         design  overflow rate,  and  failure to  consider process  recycle
         flows cause problems with hydraulic washout of solids
      -  Scum returned to aeration basin; no ultimate disposal of scum
      -  Combined  primary  and  final  clarifler unit  allows  mixing of  two
         with scraper mechanism
      -  Hydraulic restriction causes submerged overflow weirs
      -  Short-circuiting due to inlet baffle construction
      -  Placement  of  trickling  filter redrculation  drawoff  overloads
         final clarlfier
      -  Weirs on single launder not balanced to pull evenly from each side
      -  No skimming device
      -  Shallow depth  promotes thin  underflow concentrations  and  solids
         washout
                                    202

-------
Return Sludge Flows

      -  Constant-speed centrifugal pumps make it d-ifficult to adjust flow

      -  Oversized constant-speed!pumps provided

      -  Return sludge flow not visible at any point

      -  No measurement          j

      -  Single pump  returning  from multiple  clarifiers;  balancing return
         flow difficult          I

      -  Variable-speed return pumps too large even at lowest setting

      -  Plugging of telescoping valves at lower flows

      -  Sludge returned to a point near the outlet of the aeration basin
                                 i
      -  Not accessible for sampling

      -  Piping  prohibits  return  sludge  flow  for   several   hours  while
         sludge is being removed from the aerobic digester

      -  Measurement  with  90°  V-notch  weir not  sensitive  enough  for
         needed flow adjustments

      -  Oversized  pump  on  timeclock  draws  down  final  clarifier,  then
         hydraulically overloads aeration basin

      -  Waste  piping  and  appurtenances  require  excess  return  rate   to
         accomplish wasting
                                 i
      -  Stilling  box  ahead of V-notch weir  too small
                                 i
      -  Location  of  return  measurement requires operator  to  walk out  on
         narrow wall  over  basins,  resulting  in unsafe  working conditions

      -  Sludge  return from  clarifiers  controlled by plug valve  into wet
         well>   Excess operator time required to match  variable-speed pump
         with  valve-controlled rate

      -  Return  adjustment requires alternate operation of  pump  from  first
         clarifier,  second clarifier,  and  both  clarifiers to set  desired
          total  return
       -  Partial  plugging  with
          sludge flow control
rags of  butterfly  valve  used  for return
       -  Rapid withdrawal   sludge  removal  designed  without  sampling  or
          adjustment capability from various ports
                                     203

-------
Polishing Ponds
      -  No pond bypass
      -  Sludge wasted to polishing pond                               ',
      -  Pond located after disinfection
Chlorination                    !
      -  Chlorine diffuser  located at  center  of contact tank  rather than
         at inlet
      -  Chlorine diffuser located at outlet of contact tank
      -  Single  contact  tank  prohibits disinfection  during cleaning  and
         discourages cleaning of contact basin
      -  Rotometer on chlorinator too large for present application
      -  Poor mixing
      -  Chlorine dosage paced  by  effluent  flow,  but  filter backwash water
         removed  from combined contact-backwash  storage  tank  shuts  off
         chlorination until it is again filled and discharging
      -  Inadequate chlorine contact time in outfall pipe
      -  No depth  control  device  on  contact tank  results  in  inadequate
         contact time and short-circuiting
      -  Short-circuiting over baffles during high flows
      -  Short-circuiting due to inlet design
Wasting Capability
      -  No digester or sludge holding facility;  inadequate  drying  beds
      -  Downtime of  exotic  sludge  treatment  facility causes  inadequate
         wasting
      -  Wasting  capability  only  from mixed  liquor  requires excessive
         waste volume
      -  Insufficient wasting capacity
      -  Sludge lagoons undersized
                                    204

-------
      -  No waste flow measurement

      -  Partial  plugging  of  waste pump  prevents use  of  pumping rate  to
         calculate waste volume

      -  Valve choice for directing return sludge to  waste  requires  excess
         operator time

      -  Undersized waste pump


Sludge Holding Facilities

      -  Odors from unaerated, uncovered sludge storage

      -  Undersized   storage   capacity  given  ultimate   sludge  disposal
         limitations

      -  Potential  gas  buildup  problem with  covered,  unaerated  sludge
         storage                 '


Aerobic Digesters                '

      -  High  groundwater   and  pressure  relief  valve   prevents   batch
         operation

      -  Inadequate air supply   !

      -  Inadequate supernating  capability

      -  Undersized

      -  Pump  used for  sludge  removal  prevents thickening of sludge

      -  Small   digesters  and   minimum   freeboard  make  foam   containment
         difficult               !

      -  Freezing  problems       J
                                 j
       -  Common  wall  with  aeration  basin  structurally  insufficient  to
         allow batch  operation

       -  Provided  with  "automatic"  supernating device that  cannot work

                                 I
 Anaerobic  Digesters
                                 I
       -  Inadequate  supernatant drawoffs

       -  With multiple  units,  Inflexibility  to  waste  to  desired  primary
         digester               !
                                     205

-------
      -  Plugging   problem   between   bottom  of   primary  digester   and
         second-stage digester
      -  Water seal  on  sludge recirculation pump loads digester with  cold
         water
      -  Sludge  pumping  line  from   clarifier   plugs   prevents   digester
         loading at concentrations above about 6  percent
                                               ,-•
      -  No gas meters
      -  No mixing
      -  Cold digester produces poor supernatant  quality and poor digestion
      -  Single gas meter for two digesters
      -  Uninsulated heating pipes outside

Sludge Dewatering & Ultimate Disposal
      -  Truck ramp too steep for use during winter
      -  Excessive maintenance on sludge incineration facilities
      -  Insufficient sludge drying lagoons
                *
      -  Disposal of sludge in polishing lagoon
      -  Truck capacity too small  for sludge produced
      -  Insufficient drying beds for wet or cold weather operation
      -  Land application  not possible during certain  times of the year;
         no alternate disposal or storage
Laboratory Facilities
      -  Vibrations prevent use of scale
      -  Inadequately equipped
      -  Humidity difficult to work in and hard on equipment
      -  Noise from blowers limits usability
      -  Poor lighting
      -  Insufficient floor space
                                    206

-------
Miscellaneous
      -  Stabilization  of  sludge with  chlorine  releases  heavy  metals  to
         recycled supernatant   \

      -  Wooden  gates  1n  flow  diversion  structure  swell  and  cannot  be
         removed                ;

      -  No automatic restart afiter power outage

      -  Butterfly  valve  used  Ibetween  mixed  liquor  and  final  effluent
         leaks mixed liquor into; effluent

      -  Undersized raw lift pumps
                                    207

-------
            APPENDIX I
EXAMPLE PROCESS MONITORING SUMMARY
   FOR AN ACTIVATED SLUDGE POTW
               208

-------

                       £ E


                        "£
                       si
rO_^


 O
 CD
 Q
 t/5
 Q
 LU
 O
 
 CD
 C£.
 8
          E  E
         CD  =3
         O  CO

         .32  .§



         O  O
                                                                                                                          E
                                                                                                                          O
                                                                                                                           T3
                                                                                                                           O)
                                                                                                                           It-
                                                                                                                           CD
03

(13
                                                                                                                          Q.
                                                                                                                          X
          E  E
 «=c
 Q
          II   II


          ^  ^-
          V  g2
                                                                                                                           £
                                                                                                                            0)
                                                                                                                            05
                                                                                                                           Q.
                                                                                                                           cn
                                                                                                                           E
          < O
                        I
                                                                                                                          II)
                                                                                                                          cu
                                                                                                                          oo
                                                                                                                         rd
                                                           209

-------
             COLUMN  INFORMATION FOR DAILY  CONTROL  CALCULATION SHEET
Column   Symbol
     Symbol Meaning
             Explanation
  I      DATE      Self-Explanatory

  2      ATC       Aeration Tank Concentration


  3      RSC       Return Sludge Concentration


  4      CSC       Clarifier Sludge Concentration
         DTB
         TURB
         FLOW
         RSF
         RFP
                               Average of  values  recorded during the day
                               on the Daily Data Sheet.

                               Average of  values  recorded during the day
                               on the Daily Data Sheet.

                               Average concentration of sludge within the
                               clarifier as  determined from a core sample
                               (Method I) or by calculation (Method 2).

                               Method  I.   Core  Sample  - average  of values
                               recorded  during  the day on  the Daily Data
                               Sheet.

                               Method  2.  Calculation -  average of  ATC
                               and RSC.
                                                   CSC =
                                                         ATC + RSC
Depth to (Sludge)  Blanket
Turbidity
Daily Wastewater Flow
Return Sludge Flow
Return Sludge Flow Percentage
Average of values  recorded  during  the day
on the Daily Data Sheet.

Average of values  recorded  during  the day
on the Daily Data Sheet.

Total wastewater flow for a given  24-hour
time period (e.g.,  8:00 a.m. to 8:00 a.m.).

Total  daily  return  sludge  flow.  (Note:
Time  period  for   determining this   rate
should be the same  as the time period used
for determining daily wastewater flow rate
[e.g., 8:00 a.m. to 8 :00 a.m.])

Return  sludge  flow  divided  by  average
daily wastewater flow.
                                                   RFP = —  x 100%
                                                         FLOW
                                            !210

-------
      COLUMN INFORMATION FOR  DAILY CONTROL CALCULATION  SHEET (continued)
Column   Symbol
Symbol Meaning
Explanation
 10      RSP       Return Sludge Percentage
  II      ASU       Aerator Sludge Units
  12      CSU       Clarifier Sludge  Units
  13      SDR       Sludge Distribution Ratio
  14      TSU       Total Sludge Units

  15      ESU       Effluent Sludge Units
                          Return  sludge  flow  percentage  based  on
                          mass balance.
                                                  RSP =
                                                          I
                                                         RSC
                                                         ATC
                                          x  100%
                           Total  aeration tank volume CAV) times ATC.

                           ASU =  (AV)(ATC)

                           Method I.   Core Sample - clarifier  sludge
                           concentration  times  the clarifier  volume
                           (CV).

                           CSU =  (CSCXCV)

                           Method 2.   Calculation  -  clarifier sludge
                           concentration  times  the  fraction  of  the
                           clarifier   filled  with  sludge,  times  the
                           clarifier  volume  (CV).
                                                  CSU =  (CSC)
                                        CD - DTB
                                           CD
            (CV)
                           Ratio  of  the  quantity  of  solids  under
                           aeration vs the  quantity of  solids in the
                           clarifier.
                                                   SDR =
                                                        ASU
                                 CSU
                           TSU = ASU + CSU

                           Quantity  of sludge  lost  in  the  effluent
                           each day.

                           ESU  =   Effluent  suspended   solids   (TSS)
                           times  FLOW divided  by ratio of  MLSS to
                           percent  solids  by centrifuge (e.g.,  ratio
                           = MLSS divided by ATC).
                                                   ESU =
                                 (TSS)(FLOW)
                                    Ratio
                                            211

-------
      COLUMN  INFORMATION FOR DAILY  CONTROL CALCULATION SHEEt (continued)
Column   Symbol
Symbol Meaning
Explanation
 16      XSU       Intentionally Wasted Sludge
                   Units
                           Quantity  of  Sludge  intentionally  wasted
                           from   the  system   each   day  =   average
                           concentration  of wasted  sludge times  the
                           volume  of  sludge wasted  (from the  Daily
                           Data Sheet).
 17      WSU       Total  Waste Sludge  Units

 18      MCRT      Mean Cell  Residence Time
  19      RSU       Return Sludge Units
 20      SDTA      Sludge Detention Time in
                   the Aerator
                            WSU  =  ESU + XSU

                            Average  of number  of  days  a given quantity
                            of sludge remains  in the system.
                                                  MCRT =
                                  TSU
                                  WSU
                            Return  sludge flow  rate times  the  return
                            sludge concentration.

                            RSU = (RSF)(RSC)

                            Average   number  of hours a given  quantity
                            of sludge ramain in the aerator.
 21      SDTC      Sludge Detention Time in
                   the Clarifier
 22      SDT/\ x    See meanings above     j
          ATC

 23      CSL       Clarifier Solids Loading
                                                  SDTA
                                     (AV) (24 hr/d)
                                      FLOW + RSF
                            Average length of time a given quantity of
                            sludge remains  in the clarifier.
                                                  SDTC =
                                   (CSU)(24 hr/d)
                                        RSU
                            Indication of  the treatment: pressure in the
                            system.

                            Average   daily  mass  of  sludge  to  the
                            clarifier divided  by the clarifier surface
                            area (CSA).
                                                  CSL =
                                  (FLOW + RSF)(ATC)
                                         CSA
                                            212

-------
      COLUMN INFORMATION FOR DAILY CONTROL  CALCULATION SHEET (continued)
Column   Symbol
 24
OFR
 25
 26
SSC5


SSCgg
    Symbol Meaning'

Clarifier Surface Overflow
Rate
Settled Sludge Concentration
in 5 minutes'

Settled Sludge Concentration
in 60 minutes
           Explanation

Upward velocity of the treated wastewater
in the secondary clarifiar.
                                                 OFR =
                                              FLOW
                                              CSA~
Average of values recorded during the day
on the Daily Data Sheet.

Average of values recorded during the day
on the Daily Data Sheet.
                                           213

-------
            APPENDIX J
EXAMPLE PROCESS MONITORING SUMMARY
         FOR AN RBC POTW
               214

-------
                 EXAMPLE RBC PROCESS MONITORING SUMMARY*
                                               Week of
19
Date
Day Sun Mon Tues Wed Thurs Fr1
Flow, mqd
INFLUENT
BOD. mq/1
SBOD. mq/1
TSSf mq/1 ;
pH. units !
Temp . . °C
j
.WET WELL j
SBOD- mq/1
PRIMARY CLARIFIER j
DTB.* m i
BODg. mq/1 i
SBOD... mq/1
5
TSS. mq/1
pH. units
Temp . . C
SECONDARY CLARIFIERS
DTB, . m
1 - ;
DTB-. m
2 	 : ;
BODg. mq/1
SBODC. mq/1
5 !
l
'1
Sat
AVQ
Ava

Ava

Ava

Avg





Avg
Ava
Avq


*Explanat1on provided at the end of Appendix J
                                    215

-------
             EXAMPLE RBC PROCESS MONITORING SUMMARY (continued)
                                                Week of
                                                  19
Date
Day
Sun
Mon
Tues   Wed   Thurs   Fri
Sat
CHLORINE CONTACT EFFLUENT
C12 Res. mg/1    	
Fecal CoHform,	
  MPN/1
pH, units        	
TSS. mg/1        	
O&G,* mg/1       	
                                                Avg
                                                GM*
                                                Avg
                                                Avg
SECONDARY SLUDGE
m1n/d pumped
1/s
m3/d
spin.* %
ratio*
mg/1
kg/d
                                                Avg
                                                Avg
PRIMARY SLUDGE
Start Time
End Time
Minutes
m3/d
m3
spin. %
ratio
mg/1
kg/d
                                                Avg
                                                Avg
                                    216

-------
             EXAMPLE RBC PROCESS MONITORING SUMMARY (continued)
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Stage 4
               RBC DISSOLVED OXYGEN
           (Date 	Time	)

            Train 1   Train 2   ;Train 3
                                       RBC TRAIN PERFORMANCE
                                    (Date _ Time _ )
                                               SBOO
                                       Train 1
                                       Train 2
                                       Train 3
                                                _mg/l
                                                _mg/l
                                                _mg/1
DO
jng/1
TSS
        RBC EFFLUENT
(Date J	Time 	)

          mg/1    pH.
Temp
20
18
16
si12
B! 10
si —
C 
-------
EXAMPLE RBC PROCESS MONITORING SUMMARY (continued)
    Term
            Explanation
    DTB
    GM
    O&G
    SPIN

    RATIO
Depth to (Sludge) Blanket
Geometric Mean
Oil and Grease
Concentration; percent of  sample  volume the
compacted sludge occupies  after a 15-minute
laboratory centrifuge spin
MLSS divided by  ATC  (see Appendix I,  Column
Information  for  Daily  Control  Calculation
Sheet)
                       218

-------
          APPENDIX K
PARAMETERS USED TO MONITOR THE
    ABF TREATMENT PROCESS
              219

-------
                              PARAMETERS USED TO  MONITOR
                              THE  ABF  TREATMENT  PROCESS
  >lumn   Symbol
               Symbol Meaning
                                          Explanation
  I

  2
 10
DATE

ATC


RSC


CSC



DTB


TURB


FLOW


RSF
         RFP
BCRF
SeIf-ExpIanatory

Aeration Tank Concentration


Return Sludge Concentration
Average of values recorded during the day
on the Daily Data Sheet.

Average of values recorded during the day
on the Daily Data Sheet.
                  Clarifier Sludge Concentration  Average concentration of  sludge within the
                                                 clarifier.    Average of   values   recorded
                                                 during the  day on the Daily Data Sheet.
                  Depth to (Sludge)  Blanket


                  Turbidity


                  Daily Wastewater Flow


                  Return Sludge Flow
                               Average of values recorded during  the day
                               on the Daily Data Sheet.

                               Average of values recorded during  the day
                               on the Daily Data Sheet.

                               Wastewater flow for a  given 24-hour time
                               period (e.g., 8:00 a.m.  to 8:00  a.m.)..

                               Total   daily  return  sludge  flow.   (Note:
                               Time  period   for  determining  this  rate
                               should be the  same  as the  time  period used
                               for determining daily Wastewater flow rate
                               [e.g.,  8:00 a.m. to 8:00 a.m.])
          Return Sludge Flow Percentage   Return  sludge  flow  divided  by  average
                                         daily wastewater flow.
                                                 RFP
                                              RSF
                                              FLOW
                                          x  100*
Biocell  Direct Recirculation
Flow
Daily  total   flow  from  the biocelI  under
drain  directly  to the  recirculatiori wet
well.  (Note: Time period  for  determining
this  flow  should be  the  same  as for
determining the  average daily  wastewater
flow.)
*A  Dally Control Calculation  Sheet similar  to the one  presented  for  ac-
 tivated sludge 1n  Appendix  I can  be  used to present these  parameters in
 tabular form.
                                           220

-------
            PARAMETERS USED TO  MONITOR
     THE  ABF  TREATMENT  PROCESS  (continued)
Column   Symbol

 11       BCRFP
12
13
14
15
 16
 17

 18

 19
         TFBC
         BCHL
         ASU
         CSU
          TVBC
          BCSU

          TSU

          SDR
                      Symbol Meaning i

                 Biocell Direct Recirculation
                 Flow Percentage     '
Total Flow to the Biocel I
Biocell Hydraul ic Load
Aerator Sludge Units



Clarifier Sludge Units




Total Volume in thai Biocel I




Biocell Sludge Units
                    1
Total Sludge Units

Sludge  Distribution Ratio
                                            Explanation

                               Percentage  expression of the  ratio of the
                               volume of  direct biocell recirculation to
                               the volume of raw wastewater.
                                                  BCRFP =
                                       FLOW
                                              x 100*
Total  volume  of  liquid  pumped  to  the
biocel I .

TFBC = FLOW + RSF + BCRF

Volume of  liquid pumped to the biocell per
unit area of biocell  in operation.

    TFBC x 695
Biocell Surface Area

Total aerator volume (AV)  times ATC.

ASU = AV x ATC

Clarifier   volume.  (CV)  times   clarifier
sludge concentration.

CSU = CV x CSC

Volume of  mixed liquor in the biocell and
associated  appurtenances.  TVBC  =  volume
in  tower,  volume  in  underdrain,  volume  in
recirculation, and volume in tower piping.

BCSU = TVBC x ATC

TSU = ASU + BCSU + CSU

Ratio  of   the  mass  of  solids   in  the
aeration  tank  +  mass  of  sludge   in  the
biocell to the mass of sludge in the final
clarifier.
                                SDR =
                                                         ASU + BCSU
                                                             CSU
                          221

-------
                               PARAMETERS USED TO  MONITOR
                        THE  ABF  TREATMENT  PROCESS  (continued)
Column   Symbol          Symbol Meaning

 20      ESU       Effluent Sludge  Units
 21
        XSU
 22

 23
        WSU

        MCRT
 24
 25
        RSU
        SDTA
26
Intentionally Wasted Sludge
Units
Total Waste Sludge Units

Mean Cell Residence Time
Return Sludge Units
Sludge Detention Time in
the Aerator
                   Sludge Detention Time in
                   the Biocel I
                                                               Explanation

                                                 Quantity  of  sludge  lost in  the effluent
                                                 each day.
                                                  ESU =
                                                        (TSS)(FLOW)
                                                  Ratio =
                                                           Ratio
                                                          MLSS
                                                           ATC
Quantity  of  SIudge  intent!ona11y  wasted
from  the   system  each  day   =  average
concentration of  wasted sludge  times the
volume  of  sludge  wasted (from  the  Daily
Data Sheet).

WSU = ESU + XSU

Indication of sludge age or the "mean time
an average sludge  cell  is  in residence in
the system."
                                                  MCRT =
                                                        TSU
                                                        xiu
Return sludge  flow rate times  the return
sludge concentration.

RSU = CRSFMRSC)

Average  length  of time  in  hours a given
quantity of sludge remains  in the aerator.
                                                  SDTA =
                                                          AV x 24 hr/d
                                                           TFBC - BCRF
                                Indication of  the  length  of the time   in
                                hours  the suspended growth  sludge spends
                                in     the    biocell     and     associated
                                appurtenances,   equaI   to  the   hydrauIi c
                                detention time.
                                                            TVBC

                                                            TFBC
                                            222

-------
                              PARAMETERS  USED  TO  MONITOR
                       THE ABF TREATMENT  PROCESS (continued)
Column   Symbol

 27      SDTC
 28

 29
 30
 31
  33
  34
  35
  36
TOT

CYCLES
SDTAx
 ATC

CSL
  32      OFR
 SSC5


 SSC3Q


 SSC60


 SVI
               Symbol Meaning

          Sludge  Detention Time in
          the Clarifiers
Total  Detention Time

Sludge Cycles per Day
See meanings above


Clarifier Solids Loading
          Clarifier Overflow Rate
Settled Sludge Concentration
in 5 minutes       !

Settled Sludge Concentration
in 30 minutes

Settled Sludge Concentration
in 60 minutes

Sludge Volume  Index
                                            Explanation

                               Average  length of time the sludge  remains
                               in the clarifiers  during  each  pass around
                               the system.
                                                  SDTC =
        CSU
        RSU
TOT = SDTA
                     SDTC
Number of times the  sludge  cycles  through
the entire system during  the day.
                                                  CYCLES =
                                                  24 hr/d
                                                    TOT
Indication of the treatment pressure  in the
system.

Indicates  the mass  loading of  solids  on
the final clarifiers.
                                                  CSL =
                                               ATC
                                                                  - BCRF)
                                                               CSA
                                Indication of  the  hydraulic  upflow  rate  in
                                the final clarifiers.
                                                   OFR =
                                                FLOW
                                                CSA~
Average of values from the Daily Data
Sheet.

Average of values from the Daily Data
Sheet.

Average of values from the Daily Data
Sheet.

      1.000.000
                                                          ) (MLSS/ATC)
                                             223

-------
                              PARAMETERS USED TO MONITOR
                       THE ABF TREATMENT PROCESS  (continued)
Column   Symbol         Symbol Meaning

 37      RSP      Return Sludge Percentage
 38      OUR      Oxygen Uptake Rate
 39      WASTE     Waste Volume
 40      RECIRC    Recirculation Power
 41      AERATION  Aeration Blower Power
 42     WASTE     Waste Power
             ExpIanati on

 Indication of  return flow  percentage  that
 is based on a solids balance.           i
                                                 RSP =
      ATC x 100
      RSC - ATC
Average  of  values  from  the  Daily  Data
Sheet.

Average  of  values  from  the  Daily  Data
Sheet.

Average  of  values  from  the  Daily  Data
Sheet.

Average  of  values  from  the  Daily  Data
Sheet.

Average  of  values  from  the  Daily  Data
Sheet.
                                           224

-------
                                           ;    Appendix L


                     Suspended Growth Major Unit Process Evaluation Worksheet


This worksheet is used to evaluate the capacity of existing major unit processes, i.e., aerator, secondary clarifier, and
sludge handling system. Key loading and process parameters are compared with standard values and point scores are
assigned. These points are subsequently compared with expected point scores for Type 1, Type 2, and Type 3 facilities
and a determination of the plant Type is made.


Instructions for Use:                        !


• Proceed through the steps contained in this worksheet in order.


• Use actual values in lieu of calculations if such data are collected and available, e.g., waste sludge volume.


• When assigning points, interpolate and use the nearest whole number:


• Minimum and maximum point values are indicated—do not exceed the range  illustrated.
Aeration
Basin
Calculate Hydraulic Detention Time (HOT):
                     HOT =
           Aeration Basin Volume
       Average Daily Wast^water Flow
                                                   cuft>  x  (180) =
                                                      hr
                                                    gpd)
                     Determine HOT Point Score:
                                                       HDT(hr)
I , I
J I(J 1 K
I I
I I I I I 1 1 I I I I I
20 *
I I I I I II I

                     -6
                            0
                                                      I     I    I     I     I
                                                        Points
                                                            1    I    I
10
                                                                        HOT Point Score =
                     Calculate Organic Loading:
                     Organic Loading = 	BOD. Loading	
                                      Aeration Basin Volume
                                                  225
                                                                                         Suspended Growth

-------
                     Organic Loading
                                                             cu ft)

                                               lbBOD5/d/1,OOOcuft
                      lb/d>  x (1,000)
                     Determine Organic Loading Point Score:
                     80
                      I
 Organic Loading (Ib BOD5/d/1,000 cu ft)
         50                          25
 l"         I                        .    I
                                                                                               15
                              i     r
          I
                                                      i    i
                                                        Points
              '     I
                  10
                                                             Organic Loading Point Score =
                     Calculate Oxygen Availability
                     If data are not available on oxygen transfer capacity, calculate it as Wire Horsepower (Appendix E)
                     times actual Oxygen Transfer Rate (Appendix F).
                                -hp) x (_
          _lb/hp-hr) x (24) =
Ib/d
                     Oxygen Availability = Oxygen Transfer Capacity
                                                                 Ib/d)
                                                                                  02/Ib BOD5
                     Determine Oxygen Availability Point Score:
                     0.8
                      I
     Oxygen Availability (Ib O2/lb BOD5)
1.0               1.2                1.5                2:5
 I         i         I    _i	l	I  l I I  I  I  I I  I  I I
                          IIII\   T   I    I        1   I   I    I    I    I   I    I-  I
                     -10               -5                  0                  5                 10
                                                         Points
                                                           Oxygen Availability Point Score =
Suspended Growth
                     Add Scores 1, 2, and 3 to Obtain Subtotal for Aeration Basin:
                                                                  Aeration Basin Subtotal =
                                                             ©
                                                  226

-------
Secondary
Clarifier
Determine Clarifier Configuration Point Score:

Configuration
                                                                         Points
                     Circular with "donut" or interior launders
                     Circular with weirs on walls
                     Rectangular with 33% covered with launders
                     Rectangular with 20% covered with launders
                     Rectangular with launder at or near end
                                                       10
                                                         7
                                                       -5
                                                       -5
                                                      -10
                                                       Clarifier Configuration Point Score =
                     Calculate Clarifier Surface Overflow Rate (SOR):
                         _  Clarifier Effluent Flow
                            Clarifier Surface Area
                                                    gpd) =
                                                   sqft)
                                             _gpd/sq ft
                    Determine SOR Point Score:
                     1,200
                       I
                       I   '
                     -15
                        Surface Overflow Rate (gpd/sq ft)
              1,000           800           650
                 I       I       I         .     I    ,
          500
300
                                                                                         I
           i  i  TITiTTT ill |   i   rn  I
               -10             0
                                    Points
I   I   I   I   I   I   I   I  I
           10            15
                                                                       SOR Point Score =
                    Determine Depth at Weirs Point Score:

7
I
i Depth at Weirs (ft)
8 10
I , I

12 1!
I , , I

I '
10
1 1 1 I 1 I 1 I I 1 1
-5 0
1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 1(
                                                        Points
                                                             Depth at Weirs Point Score =
                                                  227
                                                                    Suspended Growth

-------
                    Determine Return Activated Sludge (RAS) Removal Point Score:
                    RAS Removal
                      Points
                    Circular, rapid withdrawal
                    Circular, scraper to hoper
                    Rectangular, co-current scraper
                    Rectangular, counter-current scraper
                    No mechanical removal
                          10
                           8
                           2
                           0
                          -5


                  RAS Removal Score =
                    Determine Typical RAS Rate from Following:
                    Process Type
                    Conventional
                     (plug flow or complete mix)
                    Extended Aeration
                     (including oxidation ditches)
                    Contact Stabilization


                    Minimum Typical  RAS Rate = .


                    Maximum Typical RAS Rate =
      Return Activated Sludge Rate
                                                      Minimum
                       Maximum'
                                                    % of average daily wastewater flow
         25

         50
         50


     -percent
 75

100
125
      -percent
                    Calculate Recommended RAS Flow Range:
                    Min. Typical Typical RAS Rate x POTW Flow = Min. Recommended RAS Flow
                               %)
            gpd) x (0.01) =
       -9Pd
                    Max. Typical Typical RAS Rate x POTW Flow = Min. Recommended RAS Flow
                               %) x
            gpd) x (0.01) =
       -gpd
                                                                                                ®
                    Determine Actual RAS Flow Range:

                    Minimum Actual RAS Flow = J	gpd

                    Maximum Actual RAS Flow = i	gpd
Suspended Growth
228

-------
                    Determine RAS Control Point Score:
                    RAS Control
                                                                  Points
                    The actual RAS flow range is completely within the recommended
                     RAS flow range and the capability to measure RAS flow exists              10
                    The actual RAS flow range is completely within the recommended
                     RAS flow range but the capability to measure RAS flow does not exist          7
                    50% of the recommended RAS flow range is covered by the actual
                     RAS flow range and the capability to measure RAS flow exists               5
                    50% of the recommended RAS flow range is covered by the actual
                     RASflowrangebutthecapabilitytomeasureRASflowdoesnot exist          0
                    The actual RAS flow range is completely outside the recommended
                     RAS flow range        I                                             -5
                                                             RAS Control Point Score =
Sludge Handling
Capability
                    Add Scores 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9 to Obtain Subtotal for Secondary Clarifier:
                                                         Secondary Clarifier Subtotal =
Determine Sludge Controllability Point Score:

Controllability	
                                                                     Points
                    Automated sampling and volume control                   5
                    Metered volume and hand sampling                       3
                    Hand measured volume and hand sampling                 2
                    Sampling or volume measurement by hand not practical      0
                                                    Sludge Controllability Point Score =
                    Calculate BOD$ Mass Removed:
                    POTW w/Primary Clarification:
                    Prim. BODsm - Prim. BODSOut= Prim. BOD5 Cone. Removed
                               mg/l) -  {
                              mg/l) =
-mg/l
                   Prim. BODsout- POTW Eff.!BOD5= Sec. BOD5 Cone. Removed
                               mg/l) -  (
                              mg/l) =
 mg/l
                                                229
                                                                                     Suspended Growth

-------
                     Prim. BODS Cone. Removed x POTW Flow = Prim. BOD5 Mass Removed


                     (	mg/l) x  (	gpd)  x (8.34 x 1CT6) =          Ib/d



                     Sec. BOD5 Cone. Removed x POTW Flow = Sec. BOD5 Mass Removed


                     (	mg/l) x  (	gpd)  x (8.34 x 10'6) =          Ib/d



                     POTW w/o Primary Clarification:
                     BODsin - POTW Eff. BOD5 = Total BOD5 Cone. Removed
                                 mg/l) - (_
   mg/l) =
_mg/l
                     Total BOD5 Cone. Removed x POTW Flow = Total BOD5 Mass Removed


                     (	mg/l) x (      	gpd) x (8.34 x 10~6) = 	Ib/d


                     Determine Typical Unit Sludge Production from Following:
                     Process Type
                   Ib TSS (sludge)/lb
                    BOD5 Removed
                     Primary Clarification

                     Activated Sludge w/Primary Clarification

                     Activated Sludge w/o Primary Clarification
                      Conventional0
                      Extended Aeration"
                      Contact Stabilization
                         1.7

                         0.7


                         0.85
                         0.65
                         1.0
                     "Includes tapered aeration, step feed, plug flow, and complete mix with wastewater detention times
                      <10 hours.
                     Includes oxidation ditch.


                     If plant records include actual sludge production data, the actual unit sludge production value
                     should be compared to the typical value. If a discrepancy of more than 15 percent exists between
                     the two values, further evaluation is needed. If not, use the actual unit sludge production value.


                     Calculate Expected Sludge Mass:


                     POTW w/Primary Clarification:
                     Unit Sludge Prod, x Prim. BOD5 Mass Removed = Prim Sludge Mass
                                 Ib/lb) x (
    Ib/d) =
 Ib/d
Suspended Growth
230

-------
Unit Sludge Prod, x Sec. BODs Mass Removed = Sec. Sludge Mass
            Ib/lb) x (
Ib/d) =
Ib/d
                     Total Sludge Mass =
                Ib/d
POTWw/o Primary Clarification:
Unit Sludge Mass x Total BOD5 Mass Removed = Total -Sludge Mass
            Ib/lb) x
Ib/d) =
Ib/d
Determine Sludge Concentration from Following:
Sludge Type
            Waste Concentration
Primary

Activated
 Return Sludge/Conventional
 Return Sludge/Extended Aeration
 Return Sludge/Contact Stabilization
 Return Sludge/small plant with low SORa
 Separate waste hopper in secondary clarifier
                   mg/l

                  50,000


                   6,000
                   7,500
                   8,000
                  10,000
                  12,000
"Returns can often be shut off for short periods to thicken waste sludge in clarifiers with surface
 overflow rates less than 500 gpd/sq ft.
Calculate Expected Sludge Volume:
POTW w/Primary Clarification:
Sludge Volume =  Prim. Sludge Mass
                 Prim. Sludge Cone.
                      50,000
                                   lb/d) x (120,000) =
  mg/l)
                             -gpd
Sludge Volume =  fee. Sludge Mass
                 Sec. Sludge Cone.
                                   lb/d> x (120,000) =
                                  mg/l)
                             -gpd
                                 Total Sludge Volume =.
                             -gpd
                             231
                                    Suspended Growth

-------
                     POTWw/o Primary Clarification:
                     Total Sludge Volume = Total Sludge Mass
                                          Total Sludge Cone.
                                                          mg/l)
                                                                x (120,000) =
                                          -gpd
                     Calculate Capacity of Sludge Handling Unit Processes:

                     1.   Establish capacity of each existing sludge handling process (treatment and disposal). The
                         most common unit processes for which this calculation will have to be performed are:
                           Aerobic digestion
                           Anaerobic digestion
                           Gravity thickening
                           Mechanical dewatering
                           Drying beds
                           Liquid haul
                         For example, the capacity of a gravity thickener is the maximum sludge loading it can handle:


                         _.. ,      ,    ..       Total Sludge Mass
                         Thickener Loadmg = Thickener Suyrface Area
                                                                    Ib/d) _
                                                                    sqft)
                                                                                   Jb/d/sq ft
                     2.   Determine percentage of the expected sludge production that each process can handle.
                                _     .
                         Process Capac.ty =
                                           Typical Process Loading
                                         =
                                                 Process Loading
                         Assume the sludge being thickened by the gravity thickener above is mixed primary and
                         activated. From Table 3-9, 10 Ib/d/sq ft is considered typical loading for the thickener. Its
                         capacity would therefore be calculated as:
                                 10
Ib/d/sq ft)
                                           Ib/d/sq ft)
                                                      x (100) =
                            .percent
Suspended Growth
                                                   232

-------
List Each Process and Its Associated Sludge Handling Capacity and Identify the Lowest
Percentage Capacity:
 Process
                         Percentage
                      Lowest Capacity =
                                 percent
Determine Sludge Handling Capacity Point Score:
 50
% of Calculated Long-Term Average Sludge Production

    75               100               125
                                                                        150
                          I      I
 -10
                      15

                     Points
                                                       20
                             Sludge Handling Capacity Point Score = _


Add Scores 11 and 12 to Obtain Subtotal for Sludge Handling Capability:
                               Sludge Handling Capability Subtotal =
25
                            233
                                                    Suspended Growth

-------
                      Compare Subtotals and Total Score with Following to Determine Whether POTWis Type 1,
                      Type 2, or Type 3:
                      Aeration Basin
                      Secondary Clarifier
                      Sludge Handling Capability

                                  Total
                      Aeration Basin
                      Secondary Clarifier
                      Sludge Handling Capability

                                  Total

                      Select the Worst Case:  POTW is Type.
Score
(4)
(1D)
(13)

Type




s Typp
Points Required
Type 1 Type 2 Type 3
13-30 0-12 <0
25-55 0-24 <0
10-30 0-9 <0
60-115 20-59 <20
Suspended Growth
234

-------
                                              Appendix M


                        Trickling Filter Major Unit Process Evaluation Worksheet

This worksheet is used to evaluate the capacity of existing major unit processes, i.e., aerator, secondary clarifier, and
sludge handling system. Key loading and process parameters are compared with standard values and point scores are
assigned. These points are subsequently compared with expected point scores for Type 1, Type 2, and Type 3 facilities
and a determination of the plant Type is  made.

Instructions for Use:

•  Proceed through the steps contained in this worksheet in order.

•  Use actual values in lieu of calculations if such data are collected and available, e.g., waste sludge volume.

•  When assigning points, interpolate and use the nearest whole number.

•  Minimum and maximum point values are indicated—do not exceed the range illustrated.

"Aerator"            Calculate Equivalent Filter Media Volume:


                     Equivalent Filter _  Actual Filter Media Specific Surface Area  x Actual Media Volume
                     Media Volume   ~   Rock Filter Media Specific Surface Area
                                                         sq ft/cu ft)
                                              43
        sq ft/cu ft)
                                                                   x (
                                .cu ft) =
_cuft
                     Calculate Organic Loading:
                     _    ••_,•_      Primary Effluent BOD5
                     Organ.c Loading =  Equjvalent Fjlter Media Vo|ume
                                                              Ib/d)
                                                             cuft)

                                              Jb BOD5/d/1,000 cu ft
                                                                   x (1,000)
                     Determine Organic Loading Point Score:

                                         Organic Loading (Ib BODs/d/1',000 cu ft)
                     70                50   ;              30                 20                10
                      I	I	I         l	I	I	1  I I  I  I  I I I  I  I  I
                      I   '   '    '   '    I
                    -20               -10
  I    I    I i I l l l l l  l i I I I I I  I   I   I   I   I
         0                 15                20
Freezing Temperatures
                      I   I   I    I   I    l i  i i l i 11 « i i i i i i i i i  i  i  |  |  i  i  i  i
                    -10               -5                 10                 20
                               Covered Filter/Nonfreezing Temperatures
                                                        Points
                                                             Organic Loading Point Score =
                                                  235
                                             Trickling Filter

-------
                      Calculate Recirculation Ratio:
                      Recirculation Ratio  =
                                                     Return Flow
                                            Average Daily Wastewater Flow
                                                                    gpd) _
                                                                    gpd)
                      Determine Recirculation Ratio Point Score:

None
1
Ftecirculation
1:1
I

2:1
J

1
0

I
2
i Points
I
3

                                                            Recirculation Ratio Point Score =
                      Determine Anaerobic Side Streams Point Score:
                      Anaerobic Side Streams*
                                                      Points
                      Not returned ahead of trickling filter
                      Returned to the wastewater stream ahead
                       of the trickling filter
                                                        -10
                      'Supernatant from anaerobic digesters or filtrate/concentrate from the dewatering
                      processes following anaerobic digesters.
                                                       Anaerobic Side Streams Point Score =
                     Add Scores 1, 2, and 3 to Obtain Subtotal for "Aerator":
Secondary
Clarifier
Determine,Clarifier Configuration Point Score:

Configuration	
                     Circular with "donut" or interior launders
                     Circular with weirs on walls
                     Rectangular with 33% covered with launders
                     Rectangular with 20% covered with launders
                     Rectangular with launder at or near end
                                                                        'Aerator" Subtotal =
                                                                            Points
                                                         10
                                                          7
                                                          0
                                                         -5
                                                        -10
                                                                                 ©
 Trickling Filter
                                                          Clarifier Configuration Point Score =_
                               236
                                                                                 0

-------
Calculate Clarifier Surface Overflow Rate (SOP):
SOR = Clarifier Effluent Flow
       Clarifier Surface Area
                               gpd) _
                               sqft)
                                              _gpd/sq ft
Determine SOR Point Score:
                      ,  Surface Overflow Rate (gpd/sq ft)"
1,200          1,000           800            650            500           300
   I	  ,	III         .     I     .          I.I
   I  I  |   I   I  I I I I I I I I I I I   T  I  I   I   I11   III   I   I
 -15            -10             0              5             10
                                     Points
   15
                                                   SOR Point Score =
Determine Depth at Weirs Point Score:
                              Depth at Weirs (ft)
                                    10
12

I
D
I
3
Points
I
t
                                               Depth at Weirs Score =
Add Scores 5, 6, and 7 fo Obtain Subtotal for Secondary Clarifier:
                                         Secondary Clarifier Subtotal =
                              237
Trickling Filter

-------
 Sludge Handling
 Capability
Determine Sludge Controllability Point Score:

Controllability	
                                                                        Points
                     Automated sampling and volume control                    5
                     Metered volume and hand sampling                        3
                     Hand measured volume and hand sampling                  2
                     Sampling or volume measurement by hand not practical       0
                                                       Sludge Controllability Point Score =
                     Calculate BOD5 Mass Removed:
                     Prim. BODsm - Prim. BODsout= Prim. BODS Cone. Removed
                                 mg/l) - (
                               mg/l) =
_mg/l
                     Prim. BODsout- POTW Eff. BODS= Sec. BOD5 Cone. Removed
                                 mg/l) - (
                               mg/l) =
 mg/l
                     Prim. BOD5 Cone. Removed x POTW Flow= Prim. BODS Mass Removed


                     {	mg/l) x (	      gpd) x (8.34 x 10~6) = 	|b/d



                     Sec. BODS Cone. Removed x POTW Flow = Sec. BOD5 Mass Removed


                     (	mg/l) x (	gpd) x (8.34 x 1CT8) =          Ib/d



                     Determine Typical Unit Sludge Production from Following:
                     Process Type
                                              Ib TSS (sludge)/lb
                                               BOD5 Removed
                     Primary Clarification

                     Trickling Filter
                                                    1.7

                                                    1.0
                     If plant records include actual sludge production data, the actual unit sludge production value
                     should be compared to the typical value: If a discrepancy of more than 15 percent exists between
                     the two values, further evaluation is needed. If not, use the actual unit sludge production value.
Trickling Filter
                            238

-------
Calculate Expected Sludge Mass:




Unit Sludge Prod, x PrimJ BODs Mass Removed = Prim Sludge Mass




(	Ib/lb) x (	Ib/d) = 	Ib/d





Unit Sludge Prod, x Sec. BOD5 Mass Removed = Sec. Sludge Mass




(	Ib/lb) x (  i	Ib/d) = 	Ib/d
                    Total Sludge Mass =
                           Ib/d
Calculate Expected Sludge Volume:
Method 1
_.  .  ...       Prim. Sludge Mass
Sudge Volume = =-r—„,  .?  „	
    a           Prim. Sludge Cone.
                                  Ib/d)
                (     ,50,000      mg/l)
_.  .  ...       Sec. Sludge Mass
Sludge Volume = Sec  Sludge Conc.
                                       x (120,000) =
                                  Ib/d)
                                       x (120,000) =
                     130,000      mg/l)




                                Total Sludge Volume =
Method 2
Total Sludge Volume
Total Sludge Mass

Total Sludge Conc.
                                     Ib/d)
                     (     45,000    mg/l)
                                          x (120,000) =
                                       -gpd
                                       -gpd



                                       -gpd
                                          -gpd
                             239
                                                  Trickling Filter

-------
                      Calculate Capacity of Sludge Handling Unit Processes:


                      1.   Establish capacity of each existing sludge handling process (treatment and disposal). The
                          most common unit processes for which this calculation will have to be performed are:
                            Aerobic digestion
                            Anaerobic digestion
                            Gravity thickening
                            Mechanical dewatering
                            Drying beds
                            Liquid haul
                          For example, the capacity of a gravity thickener is the maximum sludge loading it can handle:


                          Thickener Loading =   Total Sludge Mass
                                             Thickener Surface Area
                                                                     Ib/d) _
                                                                     sqft)
                                                                                    Jb/d/sq ft
                     2.  Determine percentage of the expected sludge production that each process can handle.


                         Process Capacity = Typical Process Loading
                                           Actual Process Loading


                         Assume the sludge being thickened by the gravity thickener above is trickling filter. From
                         Table 3-9, 8 Ib/d/sq ft is considered typical loading for the thickener. Its capacity would
                         therefore be calculated as:
                                            Ib/d/sq ft)
                                            Ib/d/sq ft)
                                                      x  ,(100) =
                      -percent
                     List Each Process and Its Associated Sludge Hand/ing Capacity and Identify the Lowest
                     Percentage Capacity:
                      Process
                                                              Percentage
                                            Lowest Capacity =
                    percent
Trickling Filter
240

-------
 Determine Sludge Handling Capacity Point Score:
 50
% of Calculated Long-Term Average Sludge Production
          75                      100
           I                        I
                                                                         125
 -10
                          I
                        I
 I
15
                                    Points
                              Sludge Handling Capacity Point Score
                                                                          20
Add Scores 9 and 10 to Obtain Subtotal for Sludge Handling Capability:
                                Sludge Handling Capability Subtotal =
Compare Subtotals and Total Score with Following to Determine Whether POTWis Type 1,
Type 2, or Type 3:
"Aerator"
Secondary Clarifier    |
Sludge Handling Capability
            Total

"Aerator"
Secondary Clarifier    !
Sludge Handling Capability
            Total
                                 Score
                                                        Points Required
                                Type 1	Type 2	Type 3
-  (4)
-  (8)
-(11)
17-23
17-30
                                              0-11
                                              0-16
                                              0- 9
                                             1 5-44
                   Type
Select the Worst Case:   POTW is Type_
                        <0
                        <0
                        <0
                       <1 5
                             241
                                                                        Trickling Filter

-------
                                               Appendix N


                                 RBC Major Unit Evaluation Worksheet


This worksheet is used to evaluate the capacity of existing major unit processes, i.e., aerator, secondary clarifier, and
sludge handling system. Key loading and process parameters are compared with standard values and point scores are
assigned. These points are subsequently compared with expected point scores for Type 1, Type 2, and Type 3 facilities
and a determination of the plant Type  is  made.


Instructions for Use:


•  Proceed through the steps contained in this worksheet in order.


•  Use actual values in lieu of calculations if such data are collected and available, e.g., waste sludge volume.


•  When assigning points, interpolate and use the nearest whole number.


•  Minimum and maximum point values'are indicated—do not exceed the range illustrated.
 'Aerator'
Calculate First-Stage Loading:
                      _    ....     First-Stage Soluble BOD5 Loading
                      Organic Loading -  First.Stage Media Surface Area
                                                     or
                      _    .  .    ..     (0.5) x (First-Stage BOD5 Loading)
                      Organic Loading -   First.Stage Medja Surface Area
                                                            Ib/d)
                                                            sqft)
                                                                 x (1,000) =
                                                               JbSBOD/d/1,000 sqft
                     Determine First-Stage Loading Point Score:
                     6.0
 I
-6
                            '     '
                  First-Stage Loading (Ib SBOD/d/1,000 sq ft)

                                    4.0

                                     L           .
  I    '
  0

Points
                                                                                               2.5
                                                                                               10
RBC
                                                            First-Stage Loading Point Score =_
                                                  242

-------
Calculate System Loading:
Organic Loading =
               _ Total Soluble BODS Loading
                  Total Media Surface Area
                            or
Organic Loading =
 (0.5) x (Total BOD5 Loading)

First-Stage Media Surface Area
                                     Ib/d)
                                     sqft)
                                          x (1,000) =
                                          JbSBOD/d/1,000 sqft
Determine System Loading Point Score:
1.5
 System Loading (Ib SBOD/d/1,000 sq ft)

  :               1.0
        J	I       I	I
                                              I
                                                       I
                                         0.6
      I      I       II
-6
1      I   r    r
     0

   Points
                                 r   r    \   \    \    \
                                                     10
                                       System Loading Point Score =
Determine Number of Stages Point Score:
                                No. Stages

                                    3
                                    7

                                  Points
                                                     10
                                     Number of Stages Point Score  =_
                             243
                                                                              RBC

-------
                     Determine Anaerobic Side Streams Point Score:
                     Anaerobic Side Streams'*
                                                     Points
                     Not returned ahead of RBC                                 0
                     Returned to the wastewater stream ahead of the RBC	-10
                     'Supernatant from anaerobic digesters or filtrate/concentrate from the dewatering
                      processes following anaerobic digesters.
                                                      Anaerobic Side Streams Point Score =
                     Add Scores 1, 2, 3, and 4 to Obtain Subtotal for "Aerator":
                                                                       'Aerator" Subtotal =
                                                                                ©
Secondary
Clarifier
Determine Clarifier Configuration Point Score:

Configuration	
                     Circular with "donut" or interior launders
                     Circular with weirs on walls
                     Rectangular with 33% covered with launders
                     Rectangular with 20% covered with launders
                     Rectangular with launder at or near end
                                                                          Points
                                                        10
                                                         7
                                                         0
                                                       ,-5
                                                       -10
                                                         Clarifier Configuration Point Score =_
                     Calculate Clarifier Surface Overflow Rate (SOR):
                     SOR =
       Clarifier Effluent Flow
       Clarifier Surface Area
                                                    gpd) _
                                                    sqft)
                                                                   _gpd/sq ft
                     Determine SOR Point Score:
                     1,200
                        Surface Overflow Rate (gpd/sq ft)
              1,000           800           650
                 I.I          .     I     .
500
300
                                                                                          I
                       I
                     -15
        i   i   i   11 i 11 i i rrrj   i   i   i  I      I   i   i   rn  i   i   r  r
               -10             0              5              10
                                     Points
               15
                                                                        SOR Point Score =
RBC
                              244

-------
                    Determine Depth at Weirs Point Score:
                                                 Depth at Weirs (ft)
7
1
! 10
I'-:'-! I
12
I

1
0

' ' I
3
; Points
I
5

                                                                 Depth at Weirs Score =
                                                                            ®
Sludge Handling
Capability
                    Add Scores 5, 6, and 7 to Obtain Subtotal for Secondary Clarifier:
                                                           Secondary Clarifier Subtotal =
Determine Sludge Controllability Point Score:

Controllability	;    !
                                                                      Points
                    Automated sampling and volume control                     5
                    Metered volume and hand sampling                         3
                    Hand measured volume and hand sampling                  2
                    Sampling or volume measurement by hand not practical       0
                                                    Sludge Controllability Point Score =
                    Calculate BOD5 Mass Removed:
                    Prim. BODsin - Prim. BOD5put = Prim. BOD5 Cone. Removed
                               mg/l) -|
                               mg/l) =
-mg/l
                    Prim. BODsout- POTW Eff. BOD5= Sec. BOD5 Cone. Removed
                               mg/l) -;
                               mg/l) =
 mg/l
                                                245
                                                                                                 RBC

-------
                    Prim. BOD5 Cone. Removed x POTW Flow = Prim. BOD5 Mass Removed
                                mg/l) x (
    gpd) x (8.34 x1CT6) =
                                                                                 Ib/d
                    Sec. BOD5 Cone. Removed x POTW Flow= Sec. BOD6 Mass Removed


                    {	mg/l) x (     	gpd) x (8.34 x 1(T6) =  	Ib/d
                    Determine Typical Unit Sludge Production from Following:
                    Process Type
                  Ib TSS (sludge)/lb
                   BODs Removed
                    Primary Clarification

                    Trickling Filter
                        1.7

                        1.0
                    If plant records include actual sludge production data, the actual unit sludge production value
                    should be compared to the typical value. If a discrepancy of more than 15 percent exists between
                    the two values, further evaluation is needed. If not, use the actual unit sludge production value.
                    Calculate Expected Sludge Mass:

                    Unit Sludge Prod, x Prim. BOD5 Mass Removed = Prim Sludge Mass


                    (	Ib/lb) x  (     :	Ib/d) = 	Ib/d


                    Unit Sludge Prod, x Sec. BOD5 Mass Removed = Sec. Sludge Mass


                    {            Ib/lb) x  (	Ib/d) = 	Ib/d
                                        Total Sludge Mass =
                   Ib/d
                    Calculate Expected Sludge Volume:
                    Method 1
                    „.  .  ...       Prim. Sludge Mass
                    S udgeVo ume = ^-.—-„,  ,9  ^	
                        a           Prim. S udge Cone.
                                                      Ib/d)
                                    (      50,000      mg/l)
                                                           x (120,000) =
                                -gpd
RBC
246

-------
_,               Sec. Sludge Mass
Sludge Volume =  Sec. s,Udge Conc.
                                   Ib/d)
                                        x (120,000) =
                (     30,000      mg/l)

                                 Total Sludge Volume =
                                       -gpd

                                       -gpd
Method 2
    ._,   .  .. .       Total Sludge Mass
Total Sludge Volume = Total S|udge Conc.
                                      Ib/d)
                          45,000     mg/l)
                                           x (1.20,000) =
                                          -gpd
Calculate Capacity of Sludge Handling Unit Processes:

1.  Establish capacity oi each existing sludge handling process (treatment and disposal). The
    most common unit processes for which this calculation will have to be performed are:

      Aerobic digestion
      Anaerobic digestion
      Gravity thickening!
      Mechanical dewatering
      Drying beds     , :
      Liquid haul

    For example, the capacity of a gravity thickener is the maximum sludge loading it can handle:
    Thickener Loading =\
   Total Sludge Mass
Thickener Surface Area
                                               Ib/d) _
                                               sqft)
                                                              Jb/d/sq ft
2.  Determine percentage of the expected sludge production that each process can handle.


                      Typical Process Loading
    Process Capac.ty = Actual Process Loading


    Assume the sludge being thickened by the gravity thickener above is mixed primary and RBC.
    From Table 3-9, 15 Ib/d/sq ft is considered typical loading for the thickener. Its capacity
    would therefore be calculated as:
             15
Ib/d/sq ft)
                       Ib/d/sq ft)

                              247
                                 x  (100) =
                            .percent
                                                           RBC

-------
                     List Each Process and Its Associated Sludge Handling Capacity and identify the Lowest
                     Percentage Capacity:
                     Process
                         Percentage
                                          Lowest Capacity =
                                 percent
                     Determine Sludge Handling Capacity Point Score:
                     50
% of Calculated Long-Term Average Sludge Production

          75                      100
                                                          I
                     -10
                                   15
                                                       Points


                                                  Sludge Handling Capacity Point Score =
125
 20
                    Add Scores 10 and 11 to Obtain Subtotal for Sludge Handling Capability:
                                                   Sludge Handling Capability Subtotal =
RBC
              248

-------
Compare Subtotals and Total Score with Following to Determine Whether POTWis Type 1,
Type 2, or Type 3:
"Aerator"
Secondary Clarifier
Sludge Handling Capability
            Total      ;
"Aerator"
                      i
Secondary Clarifier     j
Sludge Handling Capability
           Total
                                                       Points Required
                                 Score
Type 1
  (5)
-(12)
14-30
17-30
10-30

48-90
                                 Type
Type 2
Type 3
  0-13
,- 0-16
  0-9

 1 5-47
  <0
  <0 ,
  <0

 <1 5
Select the Worst Case:   POTW is Type_
                             249
                                 RBC

-------
                                              Appendix O

                                 ABF Major Unit Evaluation Worksheet

This worksheet is used to evaluate the capacity of existing major unit processes, i.e., aerator, secondary clarifier, and
sludge handling system. Key loading and process parameters are compared with standard values and point scores are
assigned. These points are subsequently compared with expected point scores for Type 1, Type 2, and Type 3 facilities
and a determination of the plant Type is made.

Instructions for Use:

• Proceed through the steps contained in this worksheet in order.

• Use actual values in lieu of calculations if such data are collected and available, e.g., waste sludge volume.

• When assigning points, interpolate and use the nearest whole number.

• Minimum and maximum point values are indicated—do not exceed the range illustrated.
 'Aerator"
Calculate Biocell Organic Loading:
                     Organic Loading =
                     BODs Loading
                 Biocell Media Volume
                                                             Ib/d)
                                                             cuft)
                                                                   x (1,000)
                                              JbBODs/d/1,000 cuft
                    Determine Biocell Organic Loading Point Score:



                                        Organic Loading (Ib BOD5/d/1,000 cu ft)

                    300            250           200            175           150
                     I   I   I   I.  I   I   I   I   I   I   I      I      I   I   I      |     I
                                                                        100
                                                                 I   I   I
                     I   '   '
                    -10
              -5
   I   I   I   I
0
     Points
   I   I   I   I
5
                                                              I  1  1   T
10
                                                                                              15
ABF
                                                            Organic Loading Point Score  =
                                                  250

-------
Calculate Aeration Basin Detention Time:
Aeration Basin       Aeration Basin Volume
Detention Time  Average Daily Wastewater Flow
                                        cuft)
                                        gpd)
                                             x (180) =
                                                              _hr
Determine Aeration Basin Detention Point Score:
                       Aeration Basin Detention Time (hr)

 0.5           0.75   ,          1              2
  I      I     I   I  I      I	I	I	I
               I
-10
                             I     I  I  I  I  I  I

                               5              12
                                    Points
         '   '
15
                    20
                                Aeration Basin Detention Point Score =
Calculate Oxygen Availability:


If data are not available oh oxygen transfer capacity, calculate it as Wire Horsepower (Appendix E)
times actual Oxygen Transfer Rate (Appendix F).
           _hp) x
                             Jb/hp-hr) x (24) =
Jb/d
Oxygen Availability =
                           Transfer Capacity
                      Biocell BODS Loading
                                            Ib/d) _
                                            Ib/d)
                                                             O2/lb BOD5
Determine Oxygen Availability Point Score:
0.3
                       Oxygen Availability (Ib O2/lb BOD5)
                  0.4                0.5               0.75
                   r                i       ,        i    i    ,
                                                                          1.0
 I  I I I I  I I I I I I I 1 I I I      I      I

-15                0
                                      |     I    I    I     |

                                      3                   7
                                    Points
        \      I
                                                                           10
                                     Oxygen Availability Point Score =
                             251
                                                                                ABF

-------
                     Calculate Recirculation Ratio:
                     Recirculation Ratio  =
                                                    Return Flow
                                           Average Daily Wastewater Flow
                                                                   gpd)  _
                                                                   gpd)
                                                           :1
                     Determine Recirculation Ratio Point Score:

None
I
Recirculation
0.5:1
I 1 1

1:1
I

I
0
1 2

I
3
                                                          Points
                                                           Recirculation Ratio Point Score =
Secondary
Clarifier
                     Add Scores 1,2,3, and 4 to Obtain Subtotal for "Aerator":
Determine Clarifier Configuration Point Score:

Configuration    	
                     Circular with "donut" or interior launders
                     Circular with weirs on walls
                     Rectangular with 33% covered with launders
                     Rectangular with 20% covered with launders
                     Rectangular with launder at or near end
                                                                       'Aerator" Subtotal =
                                                                          Points
                                                        10
                                                          7
                                                          0
                                                        -5
                                                       -10
                                                         Clarifier Configuration Point Score =_
                     Calculate Clarifier Surface Overflow Rate (SOR):
                     SOR =
       Clarifier Effluent Flow
       Clarifier Surface Area
                                                     gpd) _
                                                    sqft)
                                              _gpd/s$ ft
ABF
                             252

-------
Determine SOR Point Score:
1,200
  I
 l^
-15
         Surface Overflow Rate (gpd/sq ft)

1,000          800          650

  I.I        .     I     .
           1   1
              -10
                                                         500
                                                                     300
                                                                1
                        1  I I
                   7   I  I
                                  Points
                                                         10
T  T  r-j
        15
                                                SOR Point Score =
Determine Depth at Wefrs Point Score:
                            Depth at Weirs (ft)
                                  10
                                                                     12
1
II 1
1 1

1
0

1
3
i Points
1
£

                                            Depth at Weirs Score =
Calculate Recommended PAS Flow Range:
Min. Typical Typical RAS Rate x POTW Flow = Min. Recommended RAS Flow
(     25    %) x (
                                       gpd) x (0.01) =
                                              -gpd
Max. Typical Typical RAS Rate x POTW Flow = Min. Recommended RAS Flow
(     75    %) x (
                                       gpd) x (0.01) =
                                              -gpd
Determine Actual RAS Flow Range:
Minimum Actual RAS Flow =
                                -gpd
Maximum Actual RAS Flow =
                                 -gpd
                           253
                                                                            ABF

-------
                    Determine HAS Control Point Score:
                    RAS Control
                                                                                      Points
                    The actual RAS flow range is completely within the recommended
                     RAS flow range and the capability to measure RAS flow exists
                    The actual RAS flow range is completely within the recommended
                     RAS flow range but the capability to measure RAS flow does not exist
                    50% of the recommended RAS flow range is covered by the actual
                     RAS flow range and the capability to measure RAS flow exists
                    50% of the recommended RAS flow range is covered by the actual
                     RAS flow range but the capability to measure RAS flowdoes not exist
                    The actual RAS flow range is completely outside the recommended
                     RAS flow range
                                                                    10

                                                                     7

                                                                     5

                                                                     0

                                                                    -5
                                                             RAS Control Point Score =
                    Add Scores 5,, 6. 7. 8, and 9 to Obtain Subtotal for Secondary Clarifier:
                                                         Secondary Clarifier Subtotal =
Sludge Handling
Capability
Determine Sludge Controllability Point Score:
Controllability	
                                                                      Points
                    Automated sampling and volume control                    5
                    Metered volume and hand sampling                        3
                    Hand measured volume and hand sampling                 2
                    Sampling or volume measurement by hand not practical       0
                                                    Sludge Controllability Point Score =
                    Calculate BOD5 Mass Removed:
                    Prim. BODsin- Prim. BOD5out= Prim. BODS Cone. Removed
                               mg/l) - (
                               mg/l) =
-mg/l
                    Prim. BODsout - POTW Eff. BOD5 = Sec. BOD5 Cone. Removed
                               mg/l) - (
                               mg/l) =
.mg/l
 ABF
                                                254

-------
Prim. BODs Cone. Removed x POTW Flow = Prim. BODS Mass Removed


(	mg/l)  x {	     gpd) x (8.34 x 1CT6) = 	Ib/d
Sec. BODs Cone. Removed x POTW Flow = Sec. BOD5 Mass Removed
            mg/l) x  (
                                                -61 _
gpd) x (8.34x10-°) =
                                                             .Ib/d
Determine Typical Unit Sludge Production from Following:
Process Type
              Ib TSS (sludge)/lb
               BOD5 Removed
Primary Clarification

Trickling Filter
                    1.7

                    1.0
If plant records include actual sludge production data, the actual unit sludge production value
should be compared to the typical value. If a discrepancy of more than 15 percent exists between
the two values, further evaluation is needed. If not, use the actual unit sludge production value.
Calculate Expected Sludge Mass:


Unit Sludge Prod, x PrimJ BODs Mass Removed = Prim Sludge Mass


(	Ib/lb) x (_	Ib/d) =	Ib/d
                      I

Unit Sludge Prod, x Sec. BOD5 Mass Removed = Sec. Sludge Mass


(	Ib/lb) x (_	Ib/d) = 	Ib/d
                     Tptal Sludge Mass

Calculate Expected Sludge Volume:


Method 1              l
              Jb/d
 „.  .   ...       Prim. Sludge Mass
 Sludge Volume = Prjm Slud*e Conc.
                                   Ib/d)
                      50,000
  mg/l)
                                        x (120,000) =
                            -gpd
                             255
                                                                               ABF

-------
                    „.  .  ...        Sec. Sludge Mass
                    Sludge Volume =  Sec. S|udg9e Conc.
                                                       Ib/d)
                                          12,000
     mg/l)
                                                            x (120,000) =
                                -9Pd
                                                    Total Sludge Volume =
                                -gpd
                    Method 2
                    -r   ,^,  j  w i       Tota Sludge Mass
                    Tota S udgeVo ume = T x , „,  *—^	
                                         Tota Sludge Conc.
                                                         Ib/d)
                                         (     35,000     mg/l)
                                                               x (120,000) =
                                  -gpd
                    Calculate Capacity of Sludge Handling Unit Processes:

                    1.   Establish capacity of each existing sludge handling process (treatment and disposal). The
                        most common unit processes for which this calculation will have to be performed are:

                          Aerobic digestion
                          Anaerobic digestion
                          Gravity thickening
                          Mechanical dewatering
                          Drying beds
                          Liquid haul

                        For example, the capacity of a gravity thickener is the maximum sludge loading it can handle:


                        ,.. . .     .    ..        Total Sludge Mass
                        Th,ckenerLoadmg = Tnickener Su*face Area
                                                                  Ib/d) _
                                                                  sqft)
                                                                                 Jb/d/sq ft
                    2.  Determine percentage of the expected sludge production that each process can handle.


                        „      _     .     Typical Process Loading
                        Process Capacity =  -^r—T~E	i—?~~^
                                          Actual Process Loading

                        Assume the sludge being thickened by the gravity thickener above is ABF. From Table 3-9,4
                        Ib/d/sq ft is considered typical loading for the thickener. Its capacity would therefore be
                        calculated as:
                                          Ib/d/sq ft)
                                          Ib/d/sq ft)
                                                     x  (100) =
                     -percent
ABF
256

-------
List Each Process and Its Associated Sludge Handling Capacity and Identify the Lowest
Percentage Capacity:
 Process
Percentage
                      Lowest Capacity =
         percent
Determine Sludge Handling Capacity Point Score:
               % of Calculated Long-Term Average Sludge Production
 50                     75                     100                     125
  I	    I                        \	I
                                      I
 -10
          15
                                   Points
                             Sludge Handling Capacity Point Score =
 I
20
Add Scores 11 and 12 to Obtain Subtotal for Sludge Handling Capability:
                               Sludge Handling Capability Subtotal =
                            257
                                      ABF

-------
                      Compare Subtotals and Total Score with Following to Determine Whether POTW is Type 1,
                      Type 2, or Type 3:
                      "Aerator"
                      Secondary Clarifier
                      Sludge Handling Capability

                                  Total
                      "Aerator"
                      Secondary Clarifier
                      Sludge Handling Capability
                                  Total

                      Select the Worst Case:  POTW is Type.
Score
(K)
(in)
(13)

Type




5 Typp
Points Required
Type 1 Type 2 Type 3
15-48 0-14 <0
20-55 0-19 <0
10-30 0- 9 <0
50-133 15-49 <15
ABF
                                                    258
   • Ua. flOVtflNMENTJWmNO OFFICE; 1M4- 759-102/10645

-------

-------
1££
^«5
=rs s
™ o o
.  < o
  CD CD
  C -»
  3|
  o|

  (D O
  m X
  as
   3]
   . m
   •Q
|||


11 is
                                                                              > m i
                                                                             ,
                                                                              00
                                                                                   (D 1
                                                                                   n> I

-------